JP2005073732A5 - - Google Patents
Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- JP2005073732A5 JP2005073732A5 JP2003304357A JP2003304357A JP2005073732A5 JP 2005073732 A5 JP2005073732 A5 JP 2005073732A5 JP 2003304357 A JP2003304357 A JP 2003304357A JP 2003304357 A JP2003304357 A JP 2003304357A JP 2005073732 A5 JP2005073732 A5 JP 2005073732A5
- Authority
- JP
- Japan
- Prior art keywords
- symbol
- display
- area
- game
- reach
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 claims description 15
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 151
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 148
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 66
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 57
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 53
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 43
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 43
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 34
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 26
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 26
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 26
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 25
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 23
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000003014 reinforcing effect Effects 0.000 description 17
- 210000000078 claw Anatomy 0.000 description 14
- 238000010304 firing Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229920003002 synthetic resin Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 239000000057 synthetic resin Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229920000122 acrylonitrile butadiene styrene Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 10
- 238000005034 decoration Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 7
- 229920005668 polycarbonate resin Polymers 0.000 description 7
- 239000004431 polycarbonate resin Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 4
- NJPPVKZQTLUDBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N novaluron Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C(OC(F)(F)C(OC(F)(F)F)F)=CC=C1NC(=O)NC(=O)C1=C(F)C=CC=C1F NJPPVKZQTLUDBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 4
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 3
- 230000005856 abnormality Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- RNFJDJUURJAICM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2,4,4,6,6-hexaphenoxy-1,3,5-triaza-2$l^{5},4$l^{5},6$l^{5}-triphosphacyclohexa-1,3,5-triene Chemical compound N=1P(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)=NP(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)=NP=1(OC=1C=CC=CC=1)OC1=CC=CC=C1 RNFJDJUURJAICM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003063 flame retardant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000644 propagated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910000897 Babbitt (metal) Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine atom Chemical compound [F] YCKRFDGAMUMZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000016623 Fragaria vesca Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 240000009088 Fragaria x ananassa Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000011363 Fragaria x ananassa Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000287127 Passeridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 244000269722 Thea sinensis Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019504 cigarettes Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000035622 drinking Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011120 plywood Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007858 starting material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009423 ventilation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000005282 vitamin D3 Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000011647 vitamin D3 Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002023 wood Substances 0.000 description 1
Description
æ¬çºæã¯ãéææ©ã«é¢ãããã®ã§ããã   The present invention relates to a gaming machine.
äŸãã°ããã³ã³éææ©ãã¹ããããã·ã³çã®éææ©ã«ãããŠã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ã«è€æ°ã®å³æãå€å衚瀺ããå³æè¡šç€ºè£ çœ®ãåãããã®ããããéæè ã«æå©ãªç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒå€§åœããç¶æ ïŒã®çºçæã«ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ã«äºãèšå®ãããŠããæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºããã峿ãç¹å®ã®å³æã®çµã¿åãããšãããããããŠãç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã®çºçã«äŒŽãå€§å ¥è³å£ãéæŸããããããã°ããŒãã¹ã²ãŒã ã«çªå ¥ãããããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   For example, some game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are equipped with a symbol display device that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner on the display screen. When a special gaming state (a big hit state) advantageous to the player occurs, it is displayed. A symbol that is fixedly displayed on an active line set in advance on the screen is a combination of specific symbols. Then, with the occurrence of a special gaming state, the big prize opening is opened or a big bonus game is entered.
ãããéææ©ã«ãããŠã¯ãç¹å¥éæç¶æ
ãšãªãéã®ç¹å®ã®å³æè¡šç€ºã®å段éãšããŠã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã§ãããããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ããããäžäŸãšããŠãïŒã€ã®å³æåãïŒã»ãããšãªã£ãŠå€å衚瀺ããããšãšãã«å峿åã®å³æãé æ¬¡åæ¢ãããå³æè¡šç€ºè£
眮ã§ã¯ãå€åéå§åŸãå
ïŒã€ã®å³æåã®å³æãäžæŠåæ¢ããéã«ããããæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã§åäžå³æãšãªãããšã«ãããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ãããããããŠããªãŒã衚瀺ããªãããåŸã«çš®ã
ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãé©å®è¡ãããç¹å¥éæç¶æ
ã®çºçæã«ã¯ãæçµã®å³æïŒäŸãã°ïŒã€ç®ã®å³æïŒãæŽã«åäžå³æã§åæ¢è¡šç€ºãããïŒäŸãã°ç¹èš±æç®ïŒïŒã
æ¬çºæã¯ãçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã«å ããŠå¯åéšæãåããŠããã«ããããããããã€ãºçã«ããçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µãžã®åœ±é¿ãæå¶ãåŸãéææ©ãæäŸããããšãç®çãšãããã®ã§ããã An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the influence of noise or the like on the picture display means despite having a movable member in addition to the picture display means .
æ¬çºæã¯ãéæã®é²è¡ãçµ±æ¬ç®¡çããäž»å¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã  The present invention comprises a main control means for managing the progress of the game,
衚瀺ç»é¢ã«çµµæãå€å衚瀺ãããçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µãšã  A pattern display means for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen;
åèšçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ãããçµµæã®è¡šç€ºæ
æ§ãå¶åŸ¡ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã  Display control means for controlling the display mode of the picture on the display screen of the picture display means;
åèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã®åé¢åŽã«é
眮ãããåäœå¯èœã«èšããããå¯åéšæãšã  A movable member disposed on the front side of the display screen and provided to be operable;
åèšå¯åéšæã®åäœãå¶åŸ¡ããå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã  Movable control means for controlling the operation of the movable member;
ãåããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãA gaming machine equipped with
åèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µããåèšäž»å¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«çŽåã«æ¥ç¶ãããæ§æãšããäžæ¹ãåèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«å¯ŸããŠåã
ç¬ç«ããŠé»åäŸçµŠææ®µããé»åãäŸçµŠãããæ§æãšãã  The display control unit and the movable control unit are connected in series to the main control unit, while power is supplied from the power supply unit to the display control unit and the movable control unit independently. And
åèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšå¯åéšæã®åäœã«å¯Ÿå¿ãããŠåèšçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã«ããã衚瀺ç»é¢ã®è¡šç€ºæ
æ§ãå¶åŸ¡ãããã®ã§ããã  The display control means controls the display mode of the display screen in the picture display means in correspondence with the operation of the movable member,
åèšå¯åéšæã¯ãåœè©²å¯åéšæã®äžç«¯ãäžæãããåååäœãå¯èœãªè»žéšãæãã  The movable member has a shaft portion capable of rotating to raise the lower end of the movable member,
åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšå¯åéšæã®äžç«¯ãäžæãããå¶åŸ¡ãå®è¡å¯èœã§ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããã  The movable control means can execute control for raising the lower end of the movable member.
æ¬çºæã«ããã°ãçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã«å ããŠå¯åéšæãåããŠããã«ããããããããã€ãºçã«ããçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µãžã®åœ±é¿ãæå¶ãåŸãã  According to the present invention, in spite of having a movable member in addition to the picture display means, the influence on the picture display means due to noise or the like can be suppressed.
ã¯ããã«ãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ããæœåºããåŸãçºæçŸ€ãææ®µïœïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒâŠïŒãšããŠåºåããŠç€ºããããããå¿ èŠã«å¿ããŠå¹æçã瀺ãã€ã€èª¬æããããªã以äžã«ãããŠã¯ãçè§£ã®å®¹æã®ãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã«ãããŠå¯Ÿå¿ããæ§æãæ¬åŒ§æžãçã§é©å®ç€ºããããã®æ¬åŒ§æžãçã§ç€ºããå ·äœçæ§æã«éå®ããããã®ã§ã¯ãªãã  First, invention groups that can be extracted from the present embodiment are shown as means n (n = 1, 2, 3,...), And will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the present embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.
ææ®µïŒïŒè¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒè¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ïŒäžã®çµµæåïŒå³æåïŒãïŒïŒã«ãããŠäºãå®ããé
åã§çµµæãå€å衚瀺ããçµµæè¡šç€ºè£
眮ïŒç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãšãçµµæã®å€ååã³åæ¢ãå¶åŸ¡ããäžæ¹ãéæè
ã«æå©ãªç¹å¥éæç¶æ
ãšãªãéã®ç¹å®è¡šç€ºæ
æ§ã®å段éãšããŠåŸ
æ©çµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããšãšãã«ã該åŸ
æ©çµµæã®è¡šç€ºåŸã«æå®ã®åŸ
æ©ç¶æ
å€åæŒåºãè¡ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãåããéææ©ã«ãããŠã  Means 1. A pattern display device (first symbol display device 41) that displays a pattern in a predetermined arrangement in a pattern row (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on a display screen (display screen G), and controls variation and stoppage of the pattern. On the other hand, a display control means (display control device) that stops and displays the standby picture as a pre-stage of the specific display mode when the special gaming state advantageous to the player is performed, and performs a predetermined standby state variation effect after the standby picture is displayed 214),
åèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã®çµµæåã§åèšé
åéãã®çµµæãšåé
åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããšãšãã«ããããåæ¢çµµæã«ããåèšåŸ
æ©çµµæãæç«ãããé
å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  An array change control means (display control device 214) for stopping and displaying the pattern according to the arrangement and the pattern contrary to the arrangement in the pattern row on the display screen, and establishing the standby pattern by the stop pattern. A gaming machine characterized by having it.
ææ®µïŒã®éææ©ã§ã¯ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«ãã£ãŠãçµµæã®å€ååã³åæ¢ãå¶åŸ¡ãããäžæ¹ãéæè ã«æå©ãªç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãšãªãéã®ç¹å®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã®å段éãšããŠåŸ æ©çµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããè©²åŸ æ©çµµæã®è¡šç€ºåŸã«æå®ã®åŸ æ©ç¶æ å€åæŒåºãè¡ãããããŸããé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«ãã£ãŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã®çµµæåã§ãäºãå®ããé åéãã®çµµæãšåé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºããããããåæ¢çµµæã«ããåèšåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããããã«ããªã£ãŠãããæ¬æ§æã«ããã°ãé åéãã®çµµæãšåé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšããŠãããããéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠäºæž¬å€ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºãè¡ãããšãã§ããããã®å ŽåãåŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºãç»äžçãªãã®ã§ã¯ãªããªããåŸã£ãŠã倿§ãªçµµæè¡šç€ºãå¯èœãšããã²ããŠã¯éæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ããã  In the gaming machine of means 1, the display control means controls the change and stop of the picture, while the standby picture is stopped and displayed as a pre-stage of the specific display mode when the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, A predetermined standby state variation effect is performed after the display of the standby pattern. Further, the arrangement change control means stops and displays a predetermined array of patterns and a pattern contrary to the same arrangement in the pattern sequence on the display screen, and the standby pattern is established by the stop patterns. It is also. According to this configuration, since the pattern according to the arrangement and the pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed, it is possible to perform the standby picture display that is unexpected to the player. In this case, the standby picture display is not uniform. Therefore, it is possible to display a variety of patterns, and thus enhance the interest of the game.
ããã§ããåŸ æ©çµµæãã¯ãããããªãŒã衚瀺絵æã«çžåœããäŸãã°ãïŒã€ã®çµµæåãå€å衚瀺ãããçµµæè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ã§ã¯ãåïŒã€ã®çµµæãåäžçµµæã§åæ¢ããæ®µéãããªãã¡æçµåæ¢å³æã®åæ¢åã«ãªãŒã衚瀺絵æã衚瀺ãããããšãšãªãããåŸ æ©ç¶æ å€åæŒåºãã¯ãªãŒãæŒåºã«çžåœããåŸ æ©çµµæã®æç«åŸãç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããç¹å®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«è¿ã¥ãããè¡ããã衚瀺æŒåºã®ããšã§ããã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«èšå®ãããçµµæåãšããŠã¯ãäŸãã°çµµæã瞊æ¹åïŒäžäžæ¹åïŒã«å€å衚瀺ããããã®ãçµµæã暪æ¹åïŒå·Šå³æ¹åïŒã«å€å衚瀺ããããã®çã§ããã°ããããŸããçµµæã®ã忢ãã«ã¯ãå®å šãªãéæ¢ç¶æ ãšãªãå Žåã ãã§ãªã现ããæºãåãå Žåãå«ã¿ãçµµæå€åã忢ãããšã¿ãªãããç¶æ ãåºçŸ©ã«æå³ããã  Here, the âstandby patternâ corresponds to a so-called reach display pattern. For example, in a pattern display device in which three pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner, the stage where the previous two patterns stop at the same pattern, that is, the stop of the final stop pattern. The reach display pattern will be displayed before. The âstandby state variation effectâ corresponds to a reach effect, and is a display effect that is performed so as to approach the specific display mode corresponding to the special game state after the standby picture is established. The pattern sequence set on the display screen may be, for example, a pattern in which the pattern is variably displayed in the vertical direction (up and down direction) or a pattern in which the pattern is variably displayed in the horizontal direction (left and right direction). Also, the âstopâ of the pattern broadly means a state in which the variation of the pattern is considered to be stopped, including not only a completely stationary state but also a case where the pattern fluctuates.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ã¯ãåèšé åéãã«äžŠã¶çµµæãšããŠå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®çµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããæ§æãšããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Mean 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display screen is configured to stop and display at least two patterns as the patterns arranged in the arrangement.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé åéãã«äžŠã¶çµµæãšããŠå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®çµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããããããããåºæºã«ãã以å€ã®çµµæãèŠãããšã§ãé åã«åããçµµæãååšããããšãããæç¢ºã«éæè ã«èªèãããããšãå¯èœãšãªããããã«ãããåèšã®éãç»äžçã§ã¯ãªãéææŒåºãè¡ãããšãã§ããããã«ãªãã  According to the means 2, since at least two patterns are stopped and displayed as the patterns arranged in accordance with the arrangement, the player can clearly see that there is a pattern contrary to the arrangement by viewing the other patterns on the basis of this. Can be recognized. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a game effect that is not uniform as described above.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒåã¯ææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã§åèšé åéãã®çµµæãäžæŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºããåŸãæéå·®ãæãããŠåèšé åã«åããçµµæã衚瀺ããŠåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 3. In the means 1 or 2, the arrangement change control means temporarily stops and displays the pattern according to the arrangement on the display screen, and then displays a picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference to establish a standby picture. A gaming machine characterized by that.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé åéãã®çµµæãäžæŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããåŸãæéå·®ãæãããŠé åã«åããçµµæã衚瀺ãããŠåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããã®ã§ãç¹æ®µå€ãããªã衚瀺ãäžæŠè¡ãããåŸãã€ã¬ã®ã¥ã©ãŒãªåŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºãžãšç§»è¡ãããæéå·®ãæãããŠè¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå€ããããšã«ãããéæè ã®æ³šæãåŒããããªæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªãããã®å Žåãéæè ã¯ã次ã«ã©ã®ããã«çºå±ããã®ããšæåŸ ãæã¡ã€ã€ãäžé£ã®æŒåºãè峿·±ãèŠãããšãã§ããããã«ãªãã  According to the means 3, after the pattern according to the arrangement is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern contrary to the arrangement is displayed with a time difference and the standby pattern is established. Transition to regular standby picture display. By changing the display form with a time difference, it is possible to produce an effect that draws the player's attention. In this case, the player can see the series of effects with interest while expecting how to develop next.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒåã¯ææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã§åèšé åéãã®çµµæã«ããåŸ æ©çµµæãäžæŠè¡šç€ºããåŸãæéå·®ãæãããŠåèšé åã«åããçµµæã«ããæŽã«åŸ æ©çµµæã远å 衚瀺ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 4. In the means 1 or 2, the arrangement change control means displays the standby picture once with the picture according to the arrangement on the display screen, and then additionally displays the standby picture with a picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference. A gaming machine characterized by that.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé åéãã®çµµæã«ããåŸ æ©çµµæãäžæŠè¡šç€ºãããåŸãæéå·®ãæãããŠãé åã«åããçµµæã«ããæŽã«åŸ æ©çµµæã远å 衚瀺ãããã®ã§ãéæè ã¯ãæ¢ã«çºçããŠããåŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºã«å ããæŽã«å¥ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºãçŸããããšã®æåŸ ãæ±ãããšãã§ãããæéå·®ãæãããŠè¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå€ããããšã«ãããéæè ã®æ³šæãåŒããããªæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªããåŸã£ãŠãéæè ã¯ã次ã«ã©ã®ããã«çºå±ããã®ããšæåŸ ãæã¡ã€ã€ãäžé£ã®æŒåºãè峿·±ãèŠãããšãã§ããããã«ãªãã  According to the means 4, after the standby picture is once displayed by the picture according to the arrangement, the standby picture is additionally displayed by the picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference, so that the player has already occurred. In addition to the standby picture display, another standby picture display can be expected to appear. By changing the display form with a time difference, it is possible to produce an effect that draws the player's attention. Accordingly, the player can see the series of effects with interest while expecting how to develop next.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ã¯çµµæãå€å衚瀺ããçµµæå€åé åïŒäž»è¡šç€ºé åïœïŒãšã該絵æå€åé åã«é£æ¥ããŠèšããããä»å é åïŒå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœïŒãšãèšå®ãããŠãããåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšä»å é åã«åèšé åã«åããçµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 5. In any one of the means 1 to 4, the design variation area (main display area Rm) for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen, and an additional area (sub display area Rs) provided adjacent to the pattern variation area, Is set, and the arrangement change control means stops and displays a picture contrary to the arrangement in the additional area.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé åã«åããçµµæããä»å é åãçšããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºããæ§æãšãããããæ¬æ¥çµµæã衚瀺ãããçµµæå€åé åã«å ãããã®å€åŽé åã§ãçµµæã衚瀺ããã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã§è¡šç€ºãããçµµææ°ãå¢ããããšãã§ãããæ ã«ãé åéãã®çµµæãšé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããšãã£ãè¡šç€ºæ æ§ã奜é©ã«å®çŸã§ããããŸãã衚瀺ãããçµµææ°ãå¢ãããããç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãžã®æåŸ æãé«ãããããæŽã«ãä»å é åãçšããããšã§ã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«è¡šç€ºãããçµµææ°ãå¢ããŠãå¿ ãããåçµµæã®çž®å°åã匷ããããããšã¯ãªããåœè©²çµµæã®èŠèªæ§ãç¶æã§ããããªããåèšä»å é åã¯ãåŸ æ©çµµæã®è¡šç€ºåã¯ç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã®çºçãäºèŠããããšãã§ãããããªäºå衚瀺ãè¡ã£ãããçµµæå€åé åã§ã®å€åçµµæãšã¯ç°ãªãçµµæçã«ãã衚瀺æŒåºãè¡ã£ããããé åã§ããã°ããã  According to the means 5, since the design contrary to the arrangement is stopped and displayed using the additional area, the design is displayed in the outer area in addition to the design variation area where the design is originally displayed, and is displayed on the display screen. You can increase the number of pictures to be played. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a display mode in which a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed and stopped. In addition, since the number of pictures to be displayed increases, a sense of expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced. Furthermore, by using the additional area, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained. In addition, the additional area displays a standby picture or a notice display that allows foreseeing the occurrence of a special gaming state, or performs a display effect with a picture that is different from the changing picture in the picture changing area. Any area may be used.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšä»å é åã«åèšé åã«åããçµµæãåæ¢è¡šç€ºããã®ã«äŒŽããåèšçµµæå€åé åã«ä»å é åãçµ±åãã衚瀺é åçµ±åææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæŽã«åããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 6. The means 5 further comprises display area integration means (display control device 214) for integrating the additional area into the pattern variation area in accordance with the stop display of the pattern contrary to the arrangement in the additional area. Gaming machine.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãçµµæå€åé åã«ä»å é åãçµ±åãããããšã§çµµæå€åé åãæ¡åŒµãããããšãšãªããåºé åã§ã®åŸ æ©ç¶æ å€åæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªããæ ã«ããã€ãããã¯ãªæŒåºãå®çŸã§ããã  According to the means 6, the design variation area is expanded by integrating the additional region with the design variation region, and a standby state variation effect in a wide region is possible. Therefore, dynamic production can be realized.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã®äžéšãé ãããã«ããŠèšããããé èœéšæïŒæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãšããã®é èœéšæãå¶åŸ¡ããé èœéšæå¶åŸ¡ææ®µïŒé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãåããåèšé èœéšæå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«ãã£ãŠé èœéšæãå¶åŸ¡ãããŠãã®èåŸã®é èœé åãéæŸãããã®ã«äŒŽããåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µããåèšé èœé åã«åèšé åã«åããçµµæã衚瀺ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Mean 7 In any one of the means 1 to 4, a concealing member (door bodies 171 and 172) provided so as to conceal part of the display screen, and concealing member control means (audio lamp control device) for controlling the concealing member 272), and when the concealing member is controlled by the concealing member control means and the concealment area behind it is opened, the arrangement change control means displays a picture contrary to the arrangement in the concealment area. A gaming machine characterized by that.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé èœéšæãå¶åŸ¡ãããŠãã®èåŸã®é èœé åãéæŸãããã®ã«äŒŽããé èœé åã«åèšé åã«åããçµµæã衚瀺ããæ§æãšãããããæ¬æ¥çµµæã衚瀺ãããéé èœé åïŒé èœéšæã«ããé èœãããªãé åïŒã«å ãããã®åèšé èœé åã§ãçµµæã衚瀺ããã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã§è¡šç€ºãããçµµææ°ãå¢ããããšãã§ãããæ ã«ãé åéãã®çµµæãšé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºãããšãã£ãè¡šç€ºæ æ§ã奜é©ã«å®çŸã§ããããŸãã衚瀺ãããçµµææ°ãå¢ãããããç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãžã®æåŸ æãé«ãããããæŽã«ãé èœé åãçšããããšã§ã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«è¡šç€ºãããçµµææ°ãå¢ããŠãå¿ ãããåçµµæã®çž®å°åã匷ããããããšã¯ãªããåœè©²çµµæã®èŠèªæ§ãç¶æã§ããã  According to the means 7, as the concealing member is controlled to open the concealment area behind it, the design is displayed in the concealment area so that the pattern contrary to the arrangement is displayed. In addition to the area that is not concealed by the concealing member, the pattern is also displayed in the concealed area, and the number of patterns displayed on the display screen can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a display mode in which a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed and stopped. In addition, since the number of pictures to be displayed increases, a sense of expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced. Furthermore, by using the concealment area, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢å ã«è¡šç€ºãããçµµæåæ°ã«é¢é£ã¥ããŠãã®çžåœæ°ã®é èœéšæãèšããããŠããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 8. A gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein a considerable number of concealing members are provided in association with the number of picture sequences displayed in the display screen.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãçµµæåæ°ã«é¢é£ããçžåœæ°åã®é èœéšæãèšããããããšãããèŠãé ãããçµµæã«ã€ããŠå€çš®å€åœ©ãªæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªããæ ã«ãéæã®é¢çœã¿ãåäžããããšãã§ããã  According to the means 8, since a considerable number of concealment members related to the number of pattern rows are provided, a wide variety of effects can be provided for the patterns that are visible and hidden. Therefore, the fun of the game can be improved.
ææ®µïŒïŒææ®µïŒåã¯ææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ã¯çµµæãå€å衚瀺ããçµµæå€åé åïŒäž»è¡šç€ºé åïœïŒãšã該絵æå€åé åã«é£æ¥ããŠèšããããä»å é åïŒå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœïŒãšãèšå®ãããŠãããåèšé èœéšæã¯ãåèšä»å é åã®å°ãªããšãäžéšãé ããã®ã§ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 9. In the means 7 or 8, a picture change area (main display area Rm) for changing and displaying a picture and an additional area (sub display area Rs) provided adjacent to the picture change area are set on the display screen. And the concealing member conceals at least a part of the additional area.
ææ®µïŒã«ããã°ãé èœéšæã¯ãåèšä»å é åã®å°ãªããšãäžéšãé ããã®ãšããŠæ§æãããŠãããããé åã«åããçµµæãä»å é åã«è¡šç€ºããå Žåã«ãåœè©²çµµæãé èœéšæã«ããé ããŠããããšãã§ãããæ ã«ãçµµæè¡šç€ºã倿§åããäžã§ãæŽãªã倿§åãå¯èœãšãªãã  According to the means 9, since the concealing member is configured to conceal at least a part of the additional region, when displaying a pattern contrary to the arrangement in the additional region, the concealing member is concealed by the concealing member. Can do. Therefore, further diversification is possible in diversifying the pattern display.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒã«ãããŠãåèšé èœéšæãå¶åŸ¡ãããŠãã®èåŸã®é èœé åãéæŸãããã®ã«äŒŽããåèšé èœéšæã«é èœãããŠããåèšä»å é åãåèšçµµæå€åé åã«çµ±åãã衚瀺é åçµ±åææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæŽã«åããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 10. Means 9: Display area integration means (display control) that integrates the additional area concealed by the concealment member into the design variation area as the concealment member is controlled to open the concealment area behind it. A gaming machine further comprising a device 214).
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãé èœéšæã«é èœãããŠããä»å é åãçµµæå€åé åã«çµ±åãããããšã§ãçµµæå€åé åãæ¡åŒµãããããšãšãªããåºé åã§ã®åŸ æ©ç¶æ å€åæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªããæ ã«ããã€ãããã¯ãªæŒåºãå®çŸã§ããããŸããã®å Žåã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«è¡šç€ºãããçµµææ°ãå¢ããŠãå¿ ãããåçµµæã®çž®å°åã匷ããããããšã¯ãªããåœè©²çµµæã®èŠèªæ§ãç¶æã§ããã  According to the means 10, since the additional area concealed by the concealing member is integrated into the pattern variation area, the pattern variation area is expanded, and a standby state variation effect in a wide area is possible. Therefore, dynamic production can be realized. In this case, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåèšçµµæå€åé åå ã«è€æ°ã®çµµæãäžŠã¶æå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãïŒïŒãèšå®ãããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãåèšä»å é åã«çµµæè¡šç€ºããããšã«äŒŽãåèšæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢èšãã該æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«åŸ æ©çµµæã远å 衚瀺ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³å¢èšææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæŽã«åããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 11. In any one of means 5, 6, 9, and 10, a gaming machine in which an effective line (effective lines L1 to L5) in which a plurality of patterns are arranged in the pattern changing area is set, and the pattern is displayed in the additional area. Accordingly, a gaming machine further comprising effective line expansion means (display control device 214) for expanding the effective line and additionally displaying a standby picture on the effective line.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãä»å é åã«çµµæè¡šç€ºããããšã«äŒŽãåèšæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢èšããã該æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«åŸ æ©çµµæã远å 衚瀺ããããããç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãžã®æåŸ æãé«ããããšãã§ããã  According to the means 11, since the active line is added along with the picture display in the additional area and the standby picture is additionally displayed on the active line, the expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåäžã®çµµæåã®éäžã§åèšé åãé転ãããŠçµµæã衚瀺ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 12. In any one of the means 1 to 11, the arrangement change control means displays a picture by reversing the arrangement in the middle of the same picture row.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãçµµæã®é åãé転ããŠè¡šç€ºãããããšã«ãããåãçµµæã亀äºã«åºçŸãããããšãå¯èœãšãªããããã«ãã£ãŠåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããããªããåã¯ååŸ æ©çµµæãç¹°ãè¿ãçºçããçã®èŠãç®äžã®é¢çœã¿ãå¢ããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããããŸããèŠãç®äžã®æåŸ 床ãé«ããããã  According to the means 12, the same pattern can appear alternately by displaying the pattern arrangement reversed. As a result, it becomes easier to establish a standby picture or the appearance of the standby picture is repeatedly generated, and the fun of the game is enhanced. It also increases the degree of visual expectation.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåäžã®çµµæåã®éäžã§åãçµµæãé£ç¶ããŠè¡šç€ºããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 13. In any one of the means 1 to 11, the arrangement change control means displays the same picture continuously in the middle of the same picture row.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãåãçµµæãé£ç¶ããŠè¡šç€ºãããããšã«ãããåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããããªããåã¯ååŸ æ©çµµæãç¹°ãè¿ãçºçããçã®èŠãç®äžã®é¢çœã¿ãå¢ããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããããŸããèŠãç®äžã®æåŸ 床ãé«ããããããªããããã§èšãçµµæã¯åŸ æ©çµµææç«ã®å¯Ÿè±¡ãšãªãçµµæã§ãããäŸãã°ãåŸ æ©çµµæå¯Ÿè±¡ã®çµµæïŒäž»å³æïŒãšé察象ã®çµµæïŒå¯å³æïŒãšã亀äºã«è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãåè ã®ã¿ãæãã  According to the means 13, the same picture is continuously displayed, so that it becomes easy to establish the standby picture or the appearance of the standby picture repeatedly occurs, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It also increases the degree of visual expectation. In addition, the pattern said here is the pattern that is the target of the standby pattern establishment. For example, when the pattern of the standby pattern target (main pattern) and the non-target pattern (sub-pattern) are displayed alternately, only the former is displayed. Point to.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã«äžåã«äžŠã¶çµµæåãèšãããã®çµµæåã®ãã¡ãäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®çµµæãäžæ¹ã¯æé ã仿¹ã¯éé ã«å€åããããšãšãã«ã該䞡åŽã®çµµæãå ã«åæ¢ãããŠãã®åæ¢çµµæãåäžãšãªãããšã§åŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããããã«ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 14. In any one of the means 1 to 11, a pattern row arranged in three rows is provided on the display screen, and one of the pattern rows on both sides of the pattern row is changed in ascending order and the other is changed in descending order. A gaming machine characterized in that a standby pattern is established by stopping the patterns on both sides first and making the stopped patterns the same.
衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«èšå®ãããäžåã®çµµæåã®ãã¡ãäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®çµµæãäžæ¹ã¯æé ã仿¹ã¯éé ã«å€åããæ§æã§ã¯ãããããã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã§ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºïŒãªãŒãçµµæè¡šç€ºïŒãå¯èœãšãªãããããå Žåã«ãããŠãé åéãã®çµµæãšåé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºããããšã«ãããä»ãŸã§ã«ãªã衚瀺æŒåºãå®çŸã§ããã  Of the three patterns set on the display screen, when the patterns on both sides change in ascending order and the other in descending order, so-called cross line standby display (reach pattern display) is possible. It becomes. In such a case, an unprecedented display effect can be realized by stopping and displaying a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒïŒã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®éäžã§åèšé åãé転ããäžã€åäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®çµµæãå ¥ãéããšãªãããçµµæã衚瀺ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 15. In the means 14, the arrangement change control means displays the pattern so that the arrangement is reversed in the middle of the pattern rows on both sides and the patterns in the pattern rows on the both sides are reversed.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãäžåã«äžŠã¶çµµæåã«ãããŠãäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã§çµµæã®é åãé転ããäžã€åäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®çµµæãå ¥ãéããšãªãããçµµæã衚瀺ããããšã«ãããåãçµµæã亀äºã«åºçŸãããããšãå¯èœãšãªããã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã§ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºãéè€ãããŠç¹°ãè¿ãçºçãããããšãã§ããïŒå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïœïŒåç §ïŒãã€ãŸããããããïŒæ¬ã®ãžã°ã¶ã°ã©ã€ã³ã§åŸ æ©çµµæãçºçããããã«ãªããããã«ãã£ãŠèŠãç®äžã®é¢çœã¿ãå¢ããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããã  According to the means 15, in the pattern row arranged in three rows, the same pattern is alternately displayed by reversing the arrangement of the patterns in the pattern rows on both sides and displaying the patterns so that the patterns in the pattern rows on both sides are reversed. It is possible to make it appear, and the standby picture display on the cross line can be repeatedly generated with overlapping (see FIGS. 56C and 56D). In other words, it is as if the standby pattern has been generated by two zigzag lines. This increases the fun of the appearance and enhances the fun of the game.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒïŒã«ãããŠãåèšé å倿Žå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã®éäžã§åãçµµæãé£ç¶ããŠè¡šç€ºããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 16. The game machine according to claim 14, wherein the arrangement change control means continuously displays the same pattern in the middle of the pattern rows on both sides.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãäžåã«äžŠã¶çµµæåã«ãããŠãäž¡åŽã®çµµæåã§åãçµµæãé£ç¶ããŠè¡šç€ºãããããšã«ãããã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºïŒïŒã©ã€ã³ãªãŒãïŒã«éè€ãããŠæšªã©ã€ã³åã¯çžŠã©ã€ã³ã®åŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºïŒïŒã©ã€ã³ãªãŒãïŒãçºçãããããšãã§ããïŒå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒåç §ïŒãããã«ãã£ãŠèŠãç®äžã®é¢çœã¿ãå¢ããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããã  According to the means 16, in the pattern row arranged in three rows, the same pattern is continuously displayed in the pattern rows on both sides, thereby overlapping the standby pattern display (two line reach) of the cross line in the horizontal line or the vertical direction. It is possible to generate a standby picture display (1 line reach) of the line (see FIG. 60B). This increases the fun of the appearance and enhances the fun of the game.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãåçµµæåã®åäžçµµæã®çµã¿åãããåèšç¹å®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ãšããŠè¡šç€ºããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã®å€åçµµæãå šãŠåæ¢ããæã«åçµµæåã®åäžçµµæãšãªãçµã¿åãããïŒéã以äžè¡šç€ºãããå Žåã«ãããŠããã®ãã¡ããããïŒã€ã®ã¿ãç¹å®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ãšããŠæå¹ãšããä»ãšè¡šç€ºåœ¢æ äžã®å·®ç°ãä»ããŠè¡šç€ºããè¡šç€ºæ æ§å·®å¥åææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæŽã«åããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 17. In any one of the means 1 to 16, a gaming machine that displays a combination of the same patterns in each pattern row as the specific display mode, and when all the changing patterns on the display screen are stopped, the same pattern in each pattern row When two or more combinations are displayed, only one of them is effective as the specific display mode, and the display mode differentiating means (display control device 214) displays the display with a difference in display mode from the others. A gaming machine, further comprising:
çµµæé åãé転ãããããåäžçµµæãé£ç¶ããŠè¡šç€ºãããããããªã©ãé åéãã®çµµæãšåé åã«åããçµµæãšãæ··åšãããŠåæ¢è¡šç€ºããå Žåãå šçµµæã®åæ¢æã«ãããŠåçµµæåã®åäžçµµæãšãªãçµã¿åãããïŒéã以äžè¡šç€ºãããããšãçãåŸããäŸãã°ææ®µïŒïŒã®å ŽåãããããïŒæ¬ã®ãžã°ã¶ã°ã©ã€ã³ã§åŸ æ©çµµæãçºçããããã«ãªããããããããç¶æ ãçãåŸãïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒããããäºæ ãçããŠããæ¬ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãããããæå¹ãªçµµæã§ããããèªèã§ããéæè ã®æ··ä¹±ãæªç¶ã«é²æ¢ã§ããããªããè¡šç€ºæ æ§å·®å¥åææ®µãšããŠãäŸãã°ãæå¹ãšãªããªãçµµæãåéæåããããçž®å°åãããããããšãèããããã  When displaying a mixed pattern and a pattern that is contrary to the same sequence, such as reversing the pattern arrangement or displaying the same pattern continuously, the same pattern is displayed when all the patterns are stopped. It may occur that two or more combinations of pictures are displayed. For example, in the case of the means 15, since a standby pattern appears as if two zigzag lines were generated, such a state may occur (specifically, lines Le2 and Le4 shown in FIG. 57 (d)). Even if such a situation occurs, according to the present means 17, it is possible to recognize which is an effective picture and to prevent confusion of the player. As a display mode differentiating means, for example, it is conceivable to make a pattern that is not effective semi-transparent or downsized.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒïŒã«ãããŠãåèšè¡šç€ºæ æ§å·®å¥åææ®µã¯ãå©ç䟡å€ã®ç°ãªãçµµæã§çµµæåäžãšãªãçµã¿åãããïŒéã以äžè¡šç€ºãããå Žåã«ãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠå©ç䟡å€ã®é«ãæ¹ã®çµµæãæå¹ãšããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 18. In the means 17, the display mode differentiating means validates the pattern having the higher profit value for the player when two or more combinations of the same pattern in the patterns having different profit values are displayed. A gaming machine.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãçµµæåäžã®çµã¿åãããïŒéã以äžè¡šç€ºããããšãéæè ã¯ãã®åŸãã©ã®çµã¿åãããæå¹ãšãªãã®ãã«èå³ã泚ããããã®éãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠå©ç䟡å€ã®é«ãæ¹ã®çµµæãæå¹ãšãªãã°ãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠæºè¶³æãåŸãããéæã®èè¶£ãããäžå±€é«ããããã  According to the means 18, when two or more combinations having the same pattern are displayed, the player is interested in which combination is effective. At this time, the pattern having the higher profit value for the player is used. If becomes effective, a sense of satisfaction is obtained for the player, and the interest of the game is further enhanced.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒïŒã«ãããŠãéæè ã«æå©ãªç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒäœç¢ºç峿ã§ã®å€§åœããïŒãšã該第ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãããéæè ã«æå©ãªç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒé«ç¢ºç峿ã§ã®å€§åœããïŒãšãçºçãåŸããšãšãã«ãåç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãåèšçµµæã«ãã£ãŠå ±ç¥ããããã«ããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãåèšè¡šç€ºæ æ§å·®å¥åææ®µã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãããçµµæïŒäœç¢ºç峿ïŒãšåèšç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãããçµµæïŒé«ç¢ºç峿ïŒãšãå ±ã«è¡šç€ºãããå Žåã«ãåèšç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãããçµµæãæå¹ãšããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 19. In the means 17, a first special gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit with a low probability symbol) and a second special gaming state advantageous to the player over the first special gaming state (a jackpot with a high probability symbol) In which each special gaming state is notified by the pattern, wherein the display mode differentiating means includes a pattern (low probability symbol) that is confirmed and displayed in the first special gaming state. ) And a picture that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state (high probability symbol) are displayed together, the picture that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state is made effective. Machine.
第ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãããçµµæïŒäœç¢ºç峿ïŒãšç¬¬ïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãããçµµæïŒé«ç¢ºç峿ïŒãšãå ±ã«è¡šç€ºããããšãéæè ã¯ãã®åŸãäœãã®çµµæãæå¹ãšãªãã®ãã«èå³ã泚ããããã®éãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠæå©ãªçµµæïŒããã§ã¯é«ç¢ºç峿ïŒãæå¹ãšãªãã°ãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠæºè¶³æãåŸãããéæã®èè¶£ãããäžå±€é«ããããã  When the pattern (low probability pattern) that is confirmed and displayed in the first special gaming state and the pattern (high probability pattern) that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state are displayed together, the player then determines which pattern Attention is paid to whether or not it is effective. At this time, if a picture advantageous to the player (here, a high-probability pattern) becomes effective, the player can be satisfied and the interest of the game is further enhanced.
ææ®µïŒïŒïŒææ®µïŒä¹è³ææ®µïŒïŒã®ããããã«ãããŠãäºãå®ããæé åã¯éé ã®é åã§çµµæãå€å衚瀺ãããæçµåæ¢çµµæãæ®ããŠå ã«åæ¢ããå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®çµµæåã®çµµæã«ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«åŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããããã«ããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãæçµåæ¢ããçµµæåãæ®ããŠå ã«åæ¢ããçžç°ãªãçµµæåã§ïŒåã®çµµæãšè€æ°åã®çµµæãšã®çµã¿åããã«ããè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãããåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããåŸ æ©çµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæŽã«åããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Means 20. In any one of the means 1 to 19, the picture is variably displayed in a predetermined ascending order or descending order, and the standby picture is displayed on the active line by the picture of at least two picture sequences that have been stopped first leaving the final stop picture. It is a gaming machine to be established, and a standby pattern on a plurality of active lines is obtained by combining a single pattern and a plurality of patterns in different pattern lines that have been stopped first while leaving a pattern line to be finally stopped. A gaming machine further comprising standby picture display means (display control device 214) to be established.
ææ®µïŒïŒã«ããã°ãæçµåæ¢ããçµµæåãæ®ããŠå ã«åæ¢ããçžç°ãªãçµµæåã§ïŒåã®çµµæãšè€æ°åã®çµµæãšã®çµã¿åããã«ããè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãããåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããããã«ããªã£ãŠãããèšãæãããšã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã«åæ¢è¡šç€ºãããå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®çµµæãè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãããåŸ æ©çµµæã«é¢äžããããšãå ±éã®çµµæãçšããŠè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ã§åŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããããšãå¯èœãšããŠããã  According to the means 20, the standby pattern on the plurality of effective lines is established by the combination of one pattern and a plurality of patterns in the different pattern strings that have been stopped first while leaving the last stopped pattern string. It has become. In other words, it is possible that at least one picture stopped and displayed on the display screen is involved in a standby picture on a plurality of active lines, and a standby picture can be established on a plurality of active lines using a common picture. .
èŠããã«ãäºãå®ããæé åã¯éé ã®é åã§çµµæãå€å衚瀺ãããéææ©ã§ã¯ãæçµåæ¢çµµæãæ®ããŠå ã«åæ¢ããå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®çµµæåã®çµµæã«ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«åŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããéãçµµæã®çš®é¡ãšåŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ãšã¯ïŒå¯ŸïŒã®å¯Ÿå¿é¢ä¿ã«ããïŒã€ãŸããïœçš®é¡ã®çµµæã«ããåŸ æ©çµµææç«ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ã¯ïœæ¬ã§ããïŒãéæè ããããèªèããäžã§éæãè¡ã£ãŠãããããã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬ææ®µïŒïŒã®æ§æã«ããã°ãïŒåã®çµµæã§ãã£ãŠãä»ã®è€æ°åã®çµµæãšã®çµã¿åããã«ããè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ã§åŸ æ©çµµæãæç«ãããæ ã«ãç»äžçã§ã¯ãªãçµµæè¡šç€ºãè¡ãããšãã§ããäžæ¹ãç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã®çºçã«å¯ŸããŠæåŸ ã倧ãã«æ±ãããããšãã§ãããåŸã£ãŠãéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ããããã«ãªãã  In short, in a gaming machine in which pictures are displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined ascending or descending order, when the standby picture is established on the active line by the pictures of at least two picture sequences that have been stopped first, leaving the final stop picture, There is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of pattern and the number of effective lines for which a standby pattern is established (that is, the number of effective lines for establishing a standby pattern with n types of patterns is n). The player also plays the game after recognizing it. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present means 19, even if it is one picture, a standby picture is formed on a plurality of effective lines by combination with a plurality of other pictures. Therefore, it is possible to display a pattern that is not uniform, while having great expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
以äžã«ã以äžã®åææ®µãé©çšãåŸãåçš®éææ©ã®åºæ¬æ§æã瀺ãã  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means can be applied is shown below.
éæé åãæ¡åŒµããéææ©ïŒå·Šå³äžåŽéšåŽãäžå¿ã«å·Šå³ä»åŽéšåŽãééå¯èœãšãªãããã«æ§æãããéæç€ïŒéæç€ïŒïŒïŒãæ¯æããéææ©æ¬äœïŒæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒçïŒãšã  A gaming machine with an expanded gaming area: a gaming machine main body (main body frame 12 or the like) that is configured so that the left and right other side can be opened and closed with the left and right one side as the center, and that supports the gaming board (game board 30). ,
åèšéæç€ã®åé¢ã«èšããããã¬ãŒã«éšæïŒã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ããç¥å圢ç¶ã«åºç»ãããéæé åãšã  A game area partitioned into a substantially circular shape by a rail member (rail unit 50) provided on the front surface of the game board;
åèšéææ©æ¬äœã®åé¢åŽã«ãŠåèšå·Šå³äžåŽéšåŽãäžå¿ã«åèšå·Šå³ä»åŽéšãééå¯èœãšãªãããæ¯æãããééç¶æ
ã«ãããŠåèšéæé åãèŠèªå¯èœãªèŠèªçªïŒçªéšïŒïŒïŒïŒãæããå颿ïŒåææ ïŒïŒïŒãšÂ  A viewing window (window portion 101) is supported on the front side of the gaming machine main body so that the left and right other side portions can be opened and closed around the left and right side portions, and the gaming area can be seen in the closed state. The front door (front door frame 13)
ãåããWith
åèšéææ©æ¬äœã®åèšå·Šå³äžåŽéšã«ã¯é·å°ºç¶ã®è£åŒ·éšæïŒè»žåãéå
·ïŒïŒïŒïŒãäžäžæ¹åãžå»¶ã³ãããã«èšãããšãšãã«ãåèšéææ©æ¬äœã®åèšå·Šå³ä»åŽéšã«ã¯åèšéææ©æ¬äœåã³å颿ã®éæŸãçŠæ¢ããããã«æœé ããæœé è£
眮ïŒã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒãé£åæïŒïŒïŒçïŒãèšãã  A long reinforcing member (bearing bracket 235) is provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine main body so as to extend in the vertical direction, and the gaming machine main body and the left and right other sides of the gaming machine main body are provided. Provide a locking device (cylinder lock 91, interlocking rod 248, etc.) that locks to prevent the opening of the front door,
該æœé è£
眮ã¯ãéææ©æ¬äœã®åèšå·Šå³ä»åŽéšã«äžäžæ¹åãžå»¶ã³ãããã«ãã€äžäžæ¹åãžç§»åå¯èœãšãªãããã«èšããããé·å°ºç¶ã®é£åéšæïŒé£åæïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãéææ©æ¬äœã®åèšå·Šå³ä»åŽéšã®ãã¡åèšéæé åã®æå€§å¹
ãšãªãäœçœ®ãšã¯ç°ãªãäœçœ®ã«èšãããåèšé£åéšæãäžåŽåã¯äžåŽã«éžæçã«ç§»åãããéµéšæïŒã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒïŒãšãåãã該éµéšæã®æäœã«ããåèšé£åéšæã®äžäžäžæ¹ãžã®ç§»åã«ããéææ©æ¬äœã®æœé ãè§£é€ããããšãšãã«ãåèšé£åéšæã®äžäžä»æ¹ãžã®ç§»åã«ããåèšåé¢æã®æœé ãè§£é€ãããããã«æ§æãã  The locking device includes a long interlocking member (interlocking rod 248) provided on the other left and right sides of the gaming machine main body so as to extend in the vertical direction and to be movable in the vertical direction, and the gaming machine main body. A key member (cylinder lock 91) that is provided at a position different from the position that is the maximum width of the game area in the left and right other side portions, and that selectively moves the interlocking member upward or downward, The locking of the gaming machine body is released by moving the interlocking member up and down by operating the key member, and the locking of the front door is released by moving the interlocking member up and down,
åèšéæç€ãåèšéææ©æ¬äœã®å¹
å
ã«ãããŠåèšè£åŒ·éšæåã³é£åéšæãå·Šå³ã«æ¯ãåããŠé
眮ããããã®é åãæ®ããå¹
ãšãªãããã«åœ¢æãããšãšãã«ãåèšéæç€ã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽéšã«ã¯åèšéææ©æ¬äœã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽããã®åŒµåºé åãšã®å¹²æžãåé¿ããããã«éšåçã«å¹éšïŒåæ¬ ïŒïŒïŒã圢æããããã«ãåèšã¬ãŒã«éšæã®ãã¡ãåèšéæé åã®æå€§å¹
ãšãªãäœçœ®ããéæç€ã®å·Šå³ç«¯äœçœ®ã«è³ãããã«é
èšããããšã«ããã  The game board is formed to have a width that leaves a region for arranging the reinforcing member and the interlocking member to be distributed to the left and right within the width of the gaming machine main body. A recess (notch 38) is partially formed so as to avoid interference with the overhanging area from the left and right sides of the gaming machine body, and the position of the rail member that is the maximum width of the gaming area is By arranging to reach the left and right end positions of the game board,
éæé åãæ¡åŒµããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  A gaming machine characterized by an expanded gaming area.
匟çéææ©ïŒéæè ãæäœããæäœææ®µïŒéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒïŒãšããã®æäœææ®µã®æäœã«åºã¥ããŠéæçã匟ããŠçºå°ããççºå°ææ®µïŒçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒçïŒãšããã®çºå°ãããéæçãæå®ã®éæé åã«å°ãçéè·¯ïŒã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®çæ¡å éè·¯ïŒãšãéæé åå ã«é 眮ãããåéæéšåïŒäžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãäœåå£ïŒïŒãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒçïŒãšãåããéææ©ã  Ball game machine: operation means (game ball launch handle 18) operated by a player, ball launch means (shot motor 229, etc.) for playing and firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and its launch A ball path (ball guide path of the rail unit 50) for guiding the game balls to a predetermined game area, and each game component (general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, operating port 33, variable display) arranged in the game area A gaming machine equipped with a unit 35 and the like.
å¯å€è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ãåãã匟çéææ©ïŒéæè ãæäœããæäœææ®µïŒéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒïŒãšããã®æäœææ®µã®æäœã«åºã¥ããŠéæçã匟ããŠçºå°ããççºå°ææ®µïŒçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒçïŒãšããã®çºå°ãããéæçãæå®ã®éæé åã«å°ãçéè·¯ïŒã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®çæ¡å éè·¯ïŒãšãéæé åå ã«é 眮ãããäœåå£ïŒäœåå£ïŒïŒïŒãå¯å€è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³å¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšãåããäœåå£ãžã®éæçã®å ¥çãæ€ç¥ãããšå¯å€è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ã«è¡šç€ºããã峿ãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãããã®åæ¢æã®å³æãç¹å®å³æã§ããå Žåã«å¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ãæå®æ æ§ã§éæŸãããããã«ããéææ©ã  Ball game machine equipped with a variable display device: operation means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 18), and ball launching means for launching and playing game balls based on the operation of the operation means (e.g. launch motor 229) ), A ball passage (ball guide passage of the rail unit 50) for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, an operation port (operation port 33) disposed in the game region, a variable display device (first The symbol display device 41) and the variable winning device (variable winning device 32) are provided, and when a game ball enters the operating port is detected, the symbol displayed on the variable display device is variably displayed. A gaming machine in which the variable winning device is opened in a predetermined manner when the symbol is a specific symbol.
ã¹ããããã·ã³çã®åèŽåŒéææ©ïŒè€æ°ã®å³æãããªã峿åïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯å³æãä»ããããªãŒã«ïŒãå€å衚瀺ïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ãªãŒã«ã®ååïŒããåŸã«å³æåã確å®åæ¢è¡šç€ºããå¯å€è¡šç€ºææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ãªãŒã«ãŠãããïŒãåããå§åçšæäœææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ã¹ã¿ãŒãã¬ããŒïŒã®æäœã«èµ·å ããŠå³æã®å€åãéå§ãããåæ¢çšæäœææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ã¹ããããã¿ã³ïŒã®æäœã«èµ·å ããŠåã¯æå®æéçµéããããšã«ãã峿ã®å€åã忢ããããã®åæ¢æã®ç¢ºå®å³æãç¹å®å³æã§ããããšãå¿ èŠæ¡ä»¶ãšããŠéæè ã«æå©ãªç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒããŒãã¹ã²ãŒã çïŒãçºçãããããã«ããéææ©ã  Slot machines such as slot machines: A symbol row consisting of multiple symbols (specifically, a reel with symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, the reel is rotated), and then the symbol row is confirmed and stopped. Variable display means (specifically a reel unit), and the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the start operation means (specifically the start lever), and the stop operation means (specifically stop) The special game state (bonus game etc.) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the button) or when the predetermined time elapses and the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol ) Is a game machine.
ç䜿çšãã«ãåŒéææ©ïŒè€æ°ã®å³æãããªã峿åïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯å³æãä»ããããªãŒã«ïŒãå€å衚瀺ïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ãªãŒã«ã®ååïŒããåŸã«å³æåã確å®åæ¢è¡šç€ºããå¯å€è¡šç€ºææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ãªãŒã«ãŠãããïŒãåããå§åçšæäœææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ã¹ã¿ãŒãã¬ããŒïŒã®æäœã«èµ·å ããŠå³æã®å€åãéå§ãããåæ¢çšæäœææ®µïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ã¹ããããã¿ã³ïŒã®æäœã«èµ·å ããŠåã¯æå®æéçµéããããšã«ãã峿ã®å€åã忢ããããã®åæ¢æã®ç¢ºå®å³æãç¹å®å³æã§ããããšãå¿ èŠæ¡ä»¶ãšããŠéæè ã«æå©ãªç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒããŒãã¹ã²ãŒã çïŒãçºçãããããã«ããããã«ãçåç¿ïŒäžç¿çïŒãèšããŠãã®çåç¿ããéæçãåã蟌ãæå ¥åŠçãè¡ãæå ¥è£ 眮ãšãåèšçåç¿ã«éæçã®æåºãè¡ãæåºè£ 眮ãšãåããæå ¥è£ 眮ã«ããéæçãæå ¥ãããããšã«ããåèšå§åçšæäœææ®µã®æäœãæå¹ãšãªãããã«æ§æããéææ©ã  Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: Variable display that displays a fixed sequence of symbols after a variable display (specifically, a reel rotation) of a symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols (specifically, a reel with symbols) Means (specifically, a reel unit), the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the start operating means (specifically, the start lever), and the stop operating means (specifically, the stop button) Due to the operation or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game state (bonus game etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the fixed symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol And a charging device that includes a ball receiving tray (such as an upper plate) for performing a charging process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray, and a paying device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray. By game balls Gaming machine constructed as the operation of the starter operation means it becomes effective by being turned.
以äžãéææ©ã®äžçš®ã§ããããã³ã³éææ©ïŒä»¥äžããããã³ã³æ©ããšããïŒã®äžå®æœã®åœ¢æ ããå³é¢ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æãããå³ïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢å³ãå³ïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®äž»èŠãªæ§æãå±éåã¯åè§£ããŠç€ºãæèŠå³ãå³ïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒãæ§æããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å颿§æãç€ºãæ£é¢å³ã§ããããªããå³ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯äŸ¿å®äžãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®éæé åå ã®æ§æã空çœãšããŠããã   Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as âpachinko machineâ), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded or exploded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing a front structure of a main body frame 12 constituting the pachinko machine 10. is there. 2 and 3, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is left blank for convenience.
å³ïŒãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã¯ãåœè©²ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®å€æ®»ã圢æãã倿 ïŒïŒãåããŠããã倿 ïŒïŒã¯ãéæããŒã«ãžã®èšçœ®ã®éã«ãããããå³¶èšåã«åãä»ããããã倿 ïŒïŒã¯ãæšè£œã®æ¿æãå šäœãšããŠç©åœ¢æ ç¶ã«çµã¿åãããç¶æ ãšãããåæ¿æãå°ããžçã®é¢è±å¯èœãªç· çµéšæã«ããåºå®ããããšã«ãã£ãŠæ§æãããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãéããªãããã䜿ã£ãŠåæ¿æãçµã¿ä»ããŠããåŸæ¥æ§é ãšæ¯ã¹ãŠæ§æéšæã®åå©çšïŒãªãŠãŒã¹ïŒã容æãªæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã倿 ïŒïŒã®äžäžæ¹åã®å€å¯žã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒå 寞ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒãå·Šå³æ¹åã®å€å¯žã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒå 寞ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒãšãªã£ãŠããããªãã倿 ïŒïŒãåææš¹èãã¢ã«ãããŠã çã®éå±ã«ãã£ãŠæ§æããŠãããã   As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. The outer frame 11 is attached to a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is in a state in which wooden plate materials are combined in a rectangular frame shape as a whole, and is configured by fixing each plate material with a detachable fastening member such as a small screw. Therefore, the structure can be easily reused (reused) compared to the conventional structure in which the plate members are assembled using nails and rivets. In the present embodiment, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm) and the outer dimension in the left and right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). In addition, you may comprise the outer frame 11 with metals, such as a synthetic resin and aluminum.
倿 ïŒïŒã®äžåŽéšã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãééå¯èœã«æ¯æãããŠããããã®éé軞ç·ã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢ããã¿ãŠå·ŠåŽã«äžäžãžå»¶ã³ãããã«èšå®ãããŠããããã®éé軞ç·ã軞å¿ã«ããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãåæ¹åŽã«éæŸã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæŽã«èšããšãæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ã¯å³åŽã«éæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã®èšçœ®ç®æãèšããããŠãããããéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒãšã¯å察åŽã®åŽéšãäžå¿ã«æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãééå¯èœãšãããšããããšãã§ãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã¯åææš¹èãå ·äœçã«ã¯ïŒ¡ïŒ¢ïŒ³æš¹èã«ããæ§æãããŠããã暹èãçšããããšã«ãããæ¯èŒçäœã³ã¹ãã§èè¡ææ§ã®é«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãåŸãããšãã§ãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãã¢ã«ãããŠã çã®éå±ã«ãã£ãŠæ§æããŠãããããªãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã倿 ïŒïŒãšæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšã«ããéææ©æ¬äœãæ§æãããŠããã倿 ïŒïŒã«ä»£ããæ§æãšããŠèšçœ®æ äœãéæããŒã«åŽã«äºãèšããŠãããéæããŒã«ãžã®ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èšçœ®ã«éããŠã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãåèšèšçœ®æ äœã«çµã¿ä»ããæ§æãšããããšãå¯èœã§ããããããæ§æã§ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšã«ããéææ©æ¬äœãæ§æãããã   A body frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing axis is set to extend vertically to the left as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the main body frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as the axis. Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a game ball launching handle 18 on the right side, the main body frame 12 can be opened and closed around the side opposite to the game ball launching handle 18. It can be said. The main body frame 12 is made of synthetic resin, specifically ABS resin. By using the ABS resin, the main body frame 12 having a relatively low cost and high impact resistance can be obtained. The body frame 12 may be made of a metal such as aluminum. In the present embodiment, the outer frame 11 and the main body frame 12 constitute a gaming machine main body. As an alternative to the outer frame 11, an installation frame may be provided in advance on the game hall side, and the main body frame 12 may be assembled to the installation frame when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In such a configuration, the main body frame 12 constitutes a gaming machine main body.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã®äžéšäœçœ®ã«ã¯ãå颿¿ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããå颿¿ïŒïŒã¯æšªé·ç¶ã«åœ¢æããããã®æšªå¹ ã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®æšªå¹ ãšã»ãŒäžèŽããããã«æ§æãããŠãããå颿¿ïŒïŒã¯ãå¹ æ¹åã»ãŒäžå€®éšã«ãããŠæååŽãžèšåºããèšåºéšïŒïŒïœãæããããŒã¹éšïŒïŒãšãããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã®èšåºéšïŒïŒïœå åŽã«èšãããäžæ¹ã«ããŒãã ç¿åœ¢ç¶ããªãçåç¿ãšããŠã®äžç¿ïŒïŒãšãäžç¿ïŒïŒã®å¥¥åŽã®å£é¢ãæ§æãã奥å£ããã«ïŒïŒãšãåããŠãããããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠããžçã®ç· çµéšæã«ããåºå®ãããŠããããšãããããŒã¹éšïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããåä»éšãæ§æããŠãããããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã«ã¯èšåºéšïŒïŒïœããã峿¹ã«ãæååŽãžçªåºããããã«ããŠéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã奥å£ããã«ïŒïŒã«ã¯çæåºå£ïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠãããçæåºå£ïŒïŒïœããæåºãããéæçãäžç¿ïŒïŒå ã«è²¯çãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   A front plate 14 is provided at a lower position on the front side of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and the width thereof is configured to substantially match the width of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 includes a base portion 15 having a bulging portion 15a that bulges to the near side in a substantially central portion in the width direction, and a ball tray that is provided inside the bulging portion 15a of the base portion 15 and has a dish shape recessed downward. And a back wall panel 17 constituting a wall on the back side of the bottom plate 16. Since the base portion 15 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by a fastening member such as a screw, the base portion 15 constitutes an attachment portion for the main body frame 12. A game ball launching handle 18 is provided on the base portion 15 so as to protrude to the right side of the bulging portion 15a. The back wall panel 17 is provided with a ball discharge port 17 a so that the game balls discharged from the ball discharge port 17 a are stored in the lower plate 16.
ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã®èšåºéšïŒïŒïœåé¢åŽã«ã¯ã¹ã©ã€ãåŒã®çæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããªããçæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒã¯ããã·ã¥åŒãšããŠãããããããŠãçæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒãæäœããããšäžç¿ïŒïŒã®åºé¢ã«èšããããå³ç€ºããªãééæ¿ãäžäœã«åã¯ãªã³ã¯ãä»ããŠç§»åããŠçæã穎ãéæŸãããäžç¿ïŒïŒå ã®è²¯ççãäžæ¹ã«æåºãããããæ§æãããŠãããçæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒã«ã¯çæã穎ãå¡ãåŽãžçæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒãä»å¢ããã³ã€ã«ããçã®ä»å¢éšæãèšããããçæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒã®æäœãè§£é€ãããéã«ã¯ä»å¢éšæã®ä»å¢åã«ãã£ãŠééæ¿ãçæã穎ã®éæŸäœçœ®ã«åŸ©åž°ããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããã奥å£ããã«ïŒïŒã®çæåºå£ïŒïŒïœãšã¯ç°ãªãäœçœ®ã«ã¯ã倿°ã®å°åãéåããã¹ããŒã«ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïœã圢æãããŠãããåœè©²ããã«ïŒïŒã®åŸæ¹ã«èšçœ®ãããã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒã®åºåé³ãã¹ããŒã«ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïœãéããŠåæ¹ã«çºããããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   A slide-type ball removal lever 19 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 15 a of the base portion 15. The ball removal lever 19 may be a push type. When the ball removal lever 19 is operated, a closing plate (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the lower plate 16 moves integrally or via a link to open the ball removal hole, and the stored balls in the lower plate 16 are moved. It is configured to be discharged downward. The ball removal lever 19 is provided with a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases the ball removal lever 19 toward the side where the ball removal hole is closed, and the biasing force of the biasing member when the operation of the ball removal lever 19 is released. Thus, the closing plate returns to the open position of the ball hole. A speaker cover portion 17b in which a large number of small holes are gathered is formed at a position different from the ball outlet 17a of the back wall panel 17, and the output sound of the speaker 20 installed behind the panel 17 is the speaker cover. It is emitted forward through the portion 17b.
ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã«ã¯èšåºéšïŒïŒïœã®å·Šæ¹ã«ç°ç¿ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããç°ç¿ïŒïŒã¯ãå éšã«æºãŸã£ãåžãæ®»çãé€å»ããããããã«æååŽäžæ¹ã«å転å¯èœã«åãä»ããããŠããããã®å³åŽé¢ãšèé¢ãšã§ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿé¢ããŠãããå ·äœçãªå³ç€ºã¯çç¥ããããç°ç¿ïŒïŒã®å³åŽé¢ã«ã¯åœè©²ç°ç¿ïŒïŒãååå¯èœãªç¶æ ã§çæã¡æ¯æããããã®æ¯è»žãèšããããåèé¢ã«ã¯ç°ç¿ïŒïŒãå³ç€ºã®ããã«äžæ¹ã«éå£ããäœçœ®ã§ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒã«ä¿æ¢ãããä¿æ¢éšãèšããããŠãããå颿¿ïŒïŒã¯ãã®å€§éšåãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšåæ§ã暹èã«ãŠæåœ¢ãããŠãããå颿¿ïŒïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã«é²åºããããã暹èã§æåœ¢ããŠããããšã«ãã£ãŠãè£ é£Ÿçã®ç®çã§è¡šé¢ã®é©å®ç®æã«ã¡ãããæœãããšãå¯èœãšãªãããªããç°ç¿ïŒïŒãè¿ãã«é 眮ãããŠããé¢ä¿äžãäžç¿ïŒïŒãšå¥¥å£ããã«ïŒïŒãšãæ§æããéšäœã«é¢ããŠã¯é£çæ§ã®ïŒ¡ïŒ¢ïŒ³æš¹èãçšããä»®ã«èª€ã£ãŠãã°ãçã眮ããŠãçãã«ãããªãããæ§æããããšã奜ãŸããã   The base part 15 is provided with an ashtray 21 on the left side of the bulging part 15a. The ashtray 21 is attached so as to be able to be reversed to the lower side on the front side so as to easily remove the butts and the like accumulated in the inside, and faces the base portion 15 on the right side surface and the back surface thereof. Although a specific illustration is omitted, a support shaft for cantilevering the ashtray 21 in a rotatable state is provided on the right side surface of the ashtray 21, and the ashtray 21 is disposed on the back as shown in the drawing. A locking portion that is locked to the base portion 15 is provided at a position that is open to the bottom. Most of the front plate 14 is formed of ABS resin in the same manner as the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding with ABS resin, it is possible to apply plating to appropriate portions of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like. In addition, since the ashtray 21 is disposed in the vicinity, the portion constituting the lower plate 16 and the back wall panel 17 is made of flame-retardant ABS resin, so that it is difficult to burn even if cigarettes are accidentally placed. It is preferable to configure as described above.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã®å颿¿ïŒïŒãé€ãç¯å²ã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãèŠãããã«ããŠå颿ãšããŠã®åææ ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãå颿¿ïŒïŒãšåææ ïŒïŒãšã«ããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽå šäœãèŠãããŠãããåææ ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠééå¯èœã«åãä»ããããŠãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšåæ§ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢ããã¿ãŠå·ŠåŽã«äžäžã«å»¶ã³ãéé軞ç·ã軞å¿ã«ããŠåæ¹åŽã«éæŸã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããåææ ïŒïŒã¯å颿¿ïŒïŒãšåæ§ã暹èã«ãŠæåœ¢ãããŠãããåææ ïŒïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã«é²åºããããã暹èã§æåœ¢ããŠããããšã«ãã£ãŠãè£ é£Ÿçã®ç®çã§è¡šé¢ã®é©å®ç®æã«ã¡ãããæœãããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   A front door frame 13 as a front door is provided in a range excluding the front plate 14 on the front side of the main body frame 12 so as to cover the main body frame 12. Accordingly, the entire front side of the main body frame 12 is covered by the front plate 14 and the front door frame 13. The front door frame 13 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the main body frame 12, the front door frame 13 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis extending vertically to the left when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is like that. The front door frame 13 is formed of ABS resin, like the front plate 14. The front door frame 14 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding it with ABS resin, it is possible to plate an appropriate portion of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like.
åææ ïŒïŒã®äžéšäœçœ®ã«ã¯ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ãããŠæååŽãžèšåºããèšåºéšïŒïŒãèšãããããã®èšåºéšïŒïŒå åŽã«ã¯äžæ¹ã«éå£ããäžç¿ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããäžç¿ïŒïŒã¯ãåŸè¿°ããæåºè£ 眮ããæãåºãããéæçãäžæŠè²¯çããäžåã«æŽåãããªããéæççºå°è£ 眮åŽãžå°ãããã®çåç¿ã§ãããèšåºéšïŒïŒåé¢åŽã«ã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒçšã®çæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®çæãã¬ããŒïŒïŒãæäœãããšäžç¿ïŒïŒã®æäžæµéšä»è¿ã«èšããããçæãéè·¯ïŒå³ç€ºç¥ïŒãéæŸãããäžç¿ïŒïŒå ã®è²¯ççãäžç¿ïŒïŒãžæåºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããäžç¿ïŒïŒãäžç¿ïŒïŒçãšåæ§ãé£çæ§ã®ïŒ¡ïŒ¢ïŒ³æš¹èã«ãŠæ§æããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   A lower portion of the front door frame 13 is provided with a bulging portion 22 that bulges to the near side above the lower plate 16, and an upper plate 23 that opens upward is provided inside the bulging portion 22. . The upper plate 23 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device to be described later and guiding them to the game ball launching device side while aligning them in a line. A ball removal lever 24 for the upper plate 23 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 22. When this ball removal lever 24 is operated, a ball removal passage (not shown) provided near the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23. Is opened, and the stored balls in the upper plate 23 are discharged to the lower plate 16. In addition, the upper plate 23 can also be comprised with a flame-retardant ABS resin similarly to the lower plate 16 grade | etc.,.
æ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãã¬ã©ã¹ææ ãšåé£Ÿãæ ãšãåå¥ã«èšãããããå颿 ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®æ¬äœæ ã«çžåœïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåã ééå¯èœãšãããšå ±ã«åé£Ÿãæ ã«äžç¿ãèšããŠããåŸæ¥æ§æãšç°ãªããã¬ã©ã¹ææ ãšåé£Ÿãæ ãšãïŒã€ã«çµ±åããŠåææ ïŒïŒãšããåææ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžäœçã«äžç¿ïŒïŒãèšããæ§æãšããŠããããã®å Žåãã¬ã©ã¹ææ ãšåé£Ÿãæ ãšãïŒã€ã«çµ±åããŠåææ ïŒïŒãšãããããåœè©²åææ ïŒïŒã«ãããŠã¬ã©ã¹æ¯ææ§é ã®åŒ·åºŠåäžãå®çŸã§ãããã€ãŸããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãéæé åã®æ¡åŒµãç®çãšãããã®éæé åæ¡åŒµã«äŒŽã倧ããã®ã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåææ ïŒïŒã«æèŒããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãã¬ã©ã¹åšå²ã®æ éšåãå¹ çã«ãªãã匷床äœäžã®åé¡ãæžå¿µãããããã¬ã©ã¹äžæ¹ã«äžç¿äžäœã®æ éšåãèšããããšçã«ããã¬ã©ã¹æ¯ææ§é ã®ååãªåŒ·åºŠã確ä¿ã§ããããªããã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®çžŠæšªå¯žæ³ã¯ãåŸæ¥äžè¬ã«ïŒïŒïŒïœïœÃïŒïŒïŒïœïœã§ãã£ãã®ã«å¯Ÿããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœÃïŒïŒïŒïœïœãšããŠããã   In the pachinko machine 10, a glass door frame and a front decoration frame are individually provided, and these can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame (corresponding to the main body frame of the present embodiment), and an upper plate is provided on the front decoration frame. Unlike the conventional configuration, the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into a front door frame 13, and the upper plate 23 is provided integrally with the front door frame 13. In this case, since the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into the front door frame 13, the strength of the glass support structure can be improved in the front door frame 13. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, for the purpose of extending the game area, a large glass 137 is mounted on the front door frame 13 along with the expansion of the game area. Therefore, although the frame portion around the glass becomes narrow and there is a concern about the problem of strength reduction, sufficient strength of the glass support structure can be secured by providing a frame portion integrated with the upper plate below the glass. The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the glass 137 are generally 405 mm à 405 mm, whereas the pachinko machine 10 has 453 mm à 434 mm.
ãŸããåææ ïŒïŒã¯ãå°ãªããšããã®ééã®éã«éæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒãšå¹²æžããªãããã«ããŠäžæ¹ã«æ¡åŒµãããŠãããå ·äœçãªæ°å€ã瀺ããšãããã³ã³æ©äžç«¯ããåææ ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯ãŸã§ã®å¯žæ³ïŒ¬ïœã¯ãæ¢åã®äžæ©çš®ã§äŸãã°çŽïŒïŒïŒïœïœã§ããã®ã«å¯Ÿããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒïŒïœïœçšå°ãããçŽïŒïŒïŒïœïœãšãªã£ãŠããããŸããããã«äŒŽãããã³ã³æ©äžç«¯ããäžç¿ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯ãŸã§ã®å¯žæ³ïŒ¬ïœãå°ãããªã£ãŠãããæ¢åã®äžæ©çš®ã§ã¯äŸãã°çŽïŒïŒïŒïœïœã§ããã®ã«å¯Ÿããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯çŽïŒïŒïŒïœïœãšãªã£ãŠãããããã§ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã®äœçœ®ãäžããããšã«ãããéæããŒã«ã«ãããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå·ŠåŽã«äžŠèšãããç貞ãè£ çœ®ã®ããºã«å 端ãšã®äžäžæ¹åã®è·é¢ã倧ãããªã£ãŠè²žçã®ããŒãèœã¡çãæžå¿µãããããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåœè©²ããºã«ããã®è²žçæåºéšåãšãªãå·ŠåŽéšåã«ãããŠãèšåºéšïŒïŒã®å£é¢ãä»ã®å£é¢ããé«ãããç«ã¡äžãéšïŒïŒïœã圢æããŠãããããã«ãããäžç¿ïŒïŒã®äœçœ®ãäžããæ§æã«ãã£ãŠã貞çã®ããŒãèœã¡çã®äžéœåãè§£æ¶ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããç«ã¡äžãéšïŒïŒïœã®é«ã寞æ³ã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒã®äžã寞æ³ã«èŠåããã®ã§ããã°è¯ãããã®æå€§é«ã寞æ³ã¯æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïœïœãšãããŠããã   The front door frame 13 is extended downward so as not to interfere with the game ball launching handle 18 at least when opening and closing the front door frame 13. Specifically, the dimension La from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the lower end of the front door frame 13 is, for example, about 201 mm in the existing model, whereas the present pachinko machine 10 is about 30 mm smaller, about 172 mm. It has become. In addition, along with this, the dimension Lb from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the upper end of the upper plate 23 is also reduced, which is about 298 mm in the existing model, for example, is about 261 mm in the present pachinko machine 10. Here, by lowering the position of the upper plate 23, the distance in the vertical direction from the tip of the nozzle of the ball lending device arranged side by side on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall becomes large, and there is a concern that the lending of the lending ball will be lost. However, in the present embodiment, the rising portion 22a in which the wall surface of the bulging portion 22 is made higher than the other wall surface is formed in the left side portion that is a rental ball discharge portion from the nozzle. Thereby, even if it has the structure which lowered | hung the position of the upper plate 23, inconveniences, such as spilling of a rental ball, are eliminated. The height dimension of the rising portion 22a may be anything that matches the lowered dimension of the upper plate 23, and the maximum height dimension is 25 mm in the present embodiment.
ãªããåææ ïŒïŒã«ãããŠã¯ãäžç¿åœ¢æã®ããã®èšåºéšïŒïŒãæååŽã«å€§ããèšåºããŠèšããããããäžç¿ïŒïŒããäžæ¹ã®ãã以å€ã®éšäœïŒåŸè¿°ããç°ç¶é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒçïŒã¯ãç貞ãè£ çœ®ã®ããºã«ãšã®å¹²æžãé¿ããã¹ãæååŽãžã®èšåºãå¶éãããŠãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ã倿 ïŒïŒããã®æååŽãžã®å¯žæ³ãïŒïŒãïŒïŒïœïœã«å¶éãããŠããã   In the front door frame 13, the bulging portion 22 for forming the upper plate is provided so as to bulge greatly toward the front side, but other portions above the upper plate 23 (annular electric decoration portion 102 and the like to be described later) ) Is restricted to bulge to the near side to avoid interference with the nozzle of the ball lending device. Specifically, the dimension from the outer frame 11 toward the front side is limited to 45 to 50 mm.
å³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã¯ãå€åœ¢ãåèšå€æ ïŒïŒãšã»ãŒåäžåœ¢ç¶ããªãæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒãäž»äœã«æ§æãããŠãããæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®äžå€®éšã«ã¯ç¥å圢ç¶ã®çªåïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®åŸåŽã«ã¯éæç€ïŒïŒãçè±å¯èœã«è£ çãããŠãããå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãéæç€ïŒïŒã¯ç¥åè§åœ¢ç¶ã®åæ¿ãããªãããã®åšçžéšãæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®è£åŽã«åœæ¥ããç¶æ ã§åçãããŠãããããªãã¡ãéæç€ïŒïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ããåãä»ããããéæç€ïŒïŒã®åé¢éšã®ç¥äžå€®éšåã ããæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®çªåïŒïŒãéããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã«é²åºããç¶æ ãšãªã£ãŠããããªããéæç€ïŒïŒã¯ãåŸæ¥ãšåæ§ãäžäžæ¹åã®é·ãã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœãå·Šå³æ¹åã®é·ãã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœãšãªã£ãŠããã   As shown in FIG. 3, the main body frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 25 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially circular window hole 26 is formed at the center of the resin base 25. Is formed. A game board 30 is detachably mounted on the rear side of the resin base 25. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 30 is made of a substantially rectangular plywood, and is attached in a state where the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the resin base 25. That is, the game board 30 is attached from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and only the substantially central portion of the front part of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 12 through the window hole 26 of the resin base 25. Note that the gaming board 30 has a length in the vertical direction of 476 mm and a length in the horizontal direction of 452 mm, as in the prior art.
次ã«ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®æ§æãå³ïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æãããéæç€ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã«ãŒã¿å å·¥ãæœãããããšã«ãã£ãŠååŸæ¹åã«è²«éãã倧å°è€æ°ã®éå£éšã圢æãããŠãããåéå£éšã«ã¯äžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãäœåå£ïŒïŒãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒåã³å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒçãããããèšããããŠãããå®éã«ã¯ãäžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãäœåå£ïŒïŒãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒåã³å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã¯æšããçã«ããéæç€è¡šé¢ã«åãä»ããããŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã®ç¥äžå€®ã«é 眮ããããã®äžæ¹ã«äœåå£ïŒïŒãé 眮ãããããã«ãã®äžæ¹ã«å¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãé 眮ãããŠããããŸããå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽã«ã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãé 眮ãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžéšäž¡åŽã«äžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãããããè€æ°é 眮ãããŠãããäœåå£ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæå®ã®æ¡ä»¶äžã§äœåç¶æ ïŒéæŸç¶æ ïŒãšãªãé»å圹ç©ãä»éçã«èšããããŠãããåèšäžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒåã³äœåå£ïŒïŒã«éæçãå ¥ããšããããåŸè¿°ããæ€åºã¹ã€ããã«ããæ€åºããããã®æ€åºçµæã«åºã¥ããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒïŒå Žåã«ãã£ãŠã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿãæå®æ°ã®è³åçãæãåºãããããã®ä»ã«ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®æäžéšã«ã¯ã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåçš®å ¥è³å£çã«å ¥ããªãã£ãéæçã¯ã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒãéã£ãŠå³ç€ºããªãçæåºè·¯ã®æ¹ãžãšæ¡å ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯ç¥äžå€®ãéåç¶ã«åãæ¬ ããŠåœ¢æãããŠããããã®ãããã¢ãŠãå£ã穎ç¶ã«åœ¢æããŠããåŸæ¥æ§æã«æ¯ã¹ãã¢ãŠãå£åœ¢æã容æãšãªãïŒäœããå³ïŒã§ã¯æååŽã«ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒãéããŠèšããããŠãããããã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ç€ºãããŠããïŒããŸããéæç€ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæçã®èœäžæ¹åãé©å®åæ£ã調æŽçããããã«å€æ°ã®éãæ€èšãããŠãããšå ±ã«ã颚è»ïŒïŒçã®åçš®éšæïŒåœ¹ç©ïŒãé èšãããŠããã   Next, the structure of the game board 30 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port 33, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like. Actually, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the operating port 33, the through gate 34, and the variable display unit 35 are attached to the surface of the game board by wood screws or the like. In the present embodiment, the variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 30, the operation port 33 is disposed below the variable display unit 35, and the variable winning device 32 is disposed further below. Further, through gates 34 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35, and a plurality of general winning holes 31 are arranged on both sides of the lower part of the game board 30. The operating port 33 is additionally provided with an electric accessory that is activated (opened) under a predetermined condition. When a game ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33, it is detected by a detection switch which will be described later, and based on the detection result, the upper plate 23 (in some cases, the lower plate 16) is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 36 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30 so that game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are guided through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). It has become. The out port 36 is formed by cutting out the substantially lower center of the game board 30 in an inverted U shape. Therefore, compared to the conventional configuration in which the out port is formed in a hole shape, it is easier to form the out port (however, in FIG. 4, the rail unit 50 is provided on the front side so that the out port 36 is closed. Is shown). The game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (functions) such as a windmill 37 are disposed.
éæç€ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽéšã«ã¯ãçµä»çžæã§ããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽããã®åŒµåºé åãšã®å¹²æžãåé¿ããããã«å¹éšãšããŠã®åæ¬ ïŒïŒãè€æ°ç®æã«åœ¢æãããŠããã   Notches 38 as recesses are formed at a plurality of locations on the left and right sides of the game board 30 so as to avoid interference with the protruding regions from the left and right sides of the body frame 12 that is the assembly partner.
åè¿°ãããšãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒã®äœçœ®ãäžããããŠãããããã«äŒŽãäžç¿ïŒïŒã®æäžæµéšã«èšããéæçã®å蟌å£ã®äœçœ®ãåæ§ã«äžããããŠããããã®å Žåãéæçå蟌å£ãæ¯èŒçé«ãäœçœ®ã«ãã£ãåŸæ¥æ§æã§ã¯ãéæçå蟌å£ãšéæç€ïŒïŒãšãååŸã«éãªããéæç€ïŒïŒã«ã¯éæçå蟌å£ã«å¯Ÿå¿ãã忬 ãèšããå¿ èŠããã£ãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãéæçå蟌å£ãäžããããšã«ããéæçå蟌å£ãšéæç€ïŒïŒãšãååŸã«éãªãããšããªããéæçå蟌å£çšã®åæ¬ ã®åœ¢æãäžèŠãšãªããæ ã«ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®è£œäœå·¥çšäžãæå©ãªæ§æãšãªãã   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the position of the upper plate 23 is lowered, and accordingly, the position of the game ball intake port provided in the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23 is also lowered. In this case, in the conventional configuration in which the game ball inlet is at a relatively high position, the game ball inlet and the game board 30 overlap each other, and the game board 30 has a notch corresponding to the game ball inlet. In this pachinko machine 10, the game ball intake port and the game board 30 do not overlap each other by lowering the game ball intake port. No formation is necessary. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous configuration in the manufacturing process of the game board 30.
å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ãäœåå£ïŒïŒãžã®å ¥è³ãããªã¬ãšããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æïŒç¹å¥å³æïŒãå€å衚瀺ãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãå²ãããã«ããŠã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒãé èšãããŠãããã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒã®äžéšã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒãééããåæ°ã¯æå€§ïŒåãŸã§ä¿çãããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒã®ç¹ç¯ã«ãã£ãŠãã®ä¿çåæ°ã衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®äžéšã§å€å衚瀺ãããæ§æçã§ãã£ãŠãè¯ããåèšç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒããçµµæãå€å衚瀺ããããã®ãçµµæè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ãã«çžåœããã   The variable display unit 35 is provided with a first symbol display device 41 for variably displaying the first symbol (special symbol) with a winning at the operation port 33 as a trigger. The variable display unit 35 is provided with a center frame 43 so as to surround the first symbol display device 41. A holding lamp 44 corresponding to the first symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper portion of the center frame 43. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 33 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the hold is displayed by turning on the hold lamp 44. Note that the hold lamp 44 may be configured so as to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41. The first symbol display device 41 corresponds to a âpattern display deviceâ for variably displaying a pattern.
ãŸããã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒã®äžéšäžå€®ã«ã¯ãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒã®ééãããªã¬ãšããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æïŒæ®é峿ïŒãå€å衚瀺ãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒã®äžéšã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããéæçãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééããåæ°ã¯æå€§ïŒåãŸã§ä¿çãããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒã®ç¹ç¯ã«ãã£ãŠãã®ä¿çåæ°ã衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒã¯ãåèšä¿çã©ã³ãïŒïŒãšåæ§ã«ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®äžéšã§å€å衚瀺ãããæ§æçã§ãã£ãŠãè¯ãã   Further, in the upper center of the center frame 43, there is provided a second symbol display device 42 for variably displaying the second symbol (ordinary symbol) with the passage of the through gate 34 as a trigger. A holding lamp 46 corresponding to the second symbol display device 42 is provided below the center frame 43. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when the hold lamp 46 is turned on. Note that the hold lamp 46 may be configured so as to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41, similarly to the hold lamp 44.
第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯ïŒã€ã³ããµã€ãºã®æ¯èŒç倧åã®æ¶²æ¶ãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ãåããæ¶²æ¶è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ãšããŠæ§æãããŠãããåŸè¿°ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«ãã衚瀺å 容ãå¶åŸ¡ãããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãäŸãã°å·Šãäžåã³å³ã«äžŠã¹ãŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ããããããã®å³æãäžäžæ¹åã«ã¹ã¯ããŒã«ãããããã«ããŠå¯å€è¡šç€ºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯ãïŒã€ã³ã以å€ã®ïŒïŒã€ã³ãïŒïŒã€ã³ãçã®æ¶²æ¶ãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ãåãããã®ãã¯ã€ããµã€ãºã®ãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ãåãããã®ãåã¯ïŒ£ïŒ²ïŒŽïŒããããããªãã¯ã¹ïŒïŒã»ã°ã¡ã³ãçãã®ä»ã®ã¿ã€ãã«ãã衚瀺ç»é¢ãæ§æãããã®ã§ãã£ãŠãããã   The 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is comprised as a liquid crystal display device provided with the comparatively large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and a display content is controlled by the display control apparatus mentioned later. On the first symbol display device 41, for example, the first symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. In addition, the 1st symbol display device 41 is equipped with liquid crystal displays of 10 inches other than 8 inches, 7 inches, etc., equipped with a wide size display, or other types such as CRT, dot matrix, 7 segments, etc. A display screen may be configured.
第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ãâãããÃãã®ïŒçš®é¡ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãã衚瀺éšïŒïŒãåããŠããããããŠãéæçãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééããæ¯ã«è¡šç€ºéšïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºå³æïŒç¬¬ïŒå³æïŒãå€åãããã®å€å衚瀺ãæå®å³æïŒäŸãã°ãâã峿ïŒã§åæ¢ããå Žåã«ãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«ä»éããé»å圹ç©ãæå®æéã ãéæŸç¶æ ãšãªãããæ§æãããŠãããå ·äœçãªå€åæ æ§ã¯ãéæçãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééãããšããâããšãÃãã®è¡šç€ºãä»ãããéšåã®èé¢ã«å èµãããåã亀äºã«ç¹ç¯ãããæçµçã«ãâãããÃãã®äžæ¹ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ã¿ãç¹ç¯ããããšãããã®ã§ããããªãã衚瀺éšïŒïŒã¯ãè€æ°ã®ã©ã³ãïŒïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€ïŒã亀äºã«ç¹ç¯ãããããšã«ããå€å衚瀺ãããæ§æã®ä»ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒæ¶²æ¶è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒã®äžéšã§å€å衚瀺ãããæ§æçã§ãã£ãŠãããã   The 2nd symbol display apparatus 42 is provided with the display part 45 which displays 2 types of 2nd symbols, for example, "(circle)" and "x". When the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the display symbol (second symbol) of the display unit 45 fluctuates, and when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, ââ¯â symbol), the operation port 33 The electric accessory attached to is configured to be open for a predetermined time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, each LED built in the back of the portion marked with âOâ and âXâ is alternately lit, and finally âO Only âLEDâ corresponding to one of ââ and âÃâ is turned on. The display unit 45 is configured to be variably displayed by alternately lighting a plurality of lamps (LEDs), or to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41 (liquid crystal display device). There may be.
å¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯ãéåžžã¯éæçãå ¥è³ã§ããªãåã¯å ¥è³ãé£ãéç¶æ ã«ãªã£ãŠãããç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒä»¥äžã倧åœãããšããïŒã®éã«éæçãå ¥è³ããããæå®ã®éæŸç¶æ ã«åãæããããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã詳ããã¯ãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«éæçãå ¥è³ãããšç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã§ç¬¬ïŒå³æãå€å衚瀺ããããã®åæ¢åŸã®ç¢ºå®å³æãäºãèšå®ããç¹å®ã®å³æã®çµåããšãªã£ãå Žåã«å€§åœãããçºçããããããŠãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãæå®ã®éæŸç¶æ ãšãªããéæçãå ¥è³ãæãç¶æ ã«ãªãããæ§æãããŠãããå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã®éæŸæ æ§ãšããŠã¯ãæå®æéïŒäŸãã°ïŒïŒç§éïŒã®çµéåã¯æå®åæ°ïŒäŸãã°ïŒïŒåïŒã®å ¥è³ãïŒã©ãŠã³ããšããŠãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒå ã®ç¶ç¶å ¥è³å£ãžã®å ¥è³ãæ¡ä»¶ãšããŠæ¬¡ã©ãŠã³ããžã®ç§»è¡æ¡ä»¶æç«ãšããè€æ°ã©ãŠã³ãïŒäŸãã°ïŒïŒã©ãŠã³ãïŒãäžéãšããŠå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãç¹°ãè¿ãéæŸããããã®ãäžè¬çã§ããã   The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or difficult to win, and can be switched to a predetermined open state in which the game balls are likely to win in a special game state (hereinafter referred to as jackpot). It has become. More specifically, when a game ball wins in the operating port 33, the first symbol display device 41 displays the first symbol in a variable manner, and when the confirmed symbol after the stop is a combination of specific symbols set in advance, a big hit is given. Occur. The variable winning device 32 is configured to be in a predetermined open state so that the game ball can easily win. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winnings is defined as one round, and the following is performed on condition that a winning is made to a continuous prize opening in the variable prize winning device 32. In general, it is assumed that the condition for transition to a round is satisfied, and the variable prize-winning device 32 is repeatedly opened up to a maximum of a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds).
å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã«ãããŠãã®äžéšã«éãªãããã«ããŠé èœéšæãšããŠã®å·Šå³äžå¯Ÿã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æãå³ïŒãå³ïŒãçšããŠè©³ãã説æãããå³ïŒã®ïŒïœïŒã¯å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãåæ¹ããèŠãæ£é¢å³ãïŒïœïŒã¯ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒæ¶²æ¶è¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒãåãå€ããç¶æ ã§å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãè£åŽããèŠãèé¢å³ã§ãããå³ïŒã¯ãæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®é§åæ©æ§ã®æ§æã説æããããã®å³é¢ã§ãããå³ïŒã¯ãæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœåç¶æ ã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ããããªãã以äžã®å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«é¢ãã説æã§ã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢ããèŠãŠãããªãã¡å³ïŒïŒïœïŒã®ç¶æ ã§å·Šå³åæ¹åãèšèŒããããšãšããå³åŽã®æäœïŒïŒïŒãã峿ïŒïŒïŒããå·ŠåŽã®æäœïŒïŒïŒããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒããšãç§°ããã   The variable display unit 35 is provided with a pair of left and right door bodies 171 and 172 as concealing members so as to overlap a part of the display screen of the first symbol display device 41. The structure of the door bodies 171 and 172 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5A is a front view of the variable display unit 35 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 5B is a rear view of the variable display unit 35 as viewed from the back side with the first symbol display device 41 (liquid crystal display device) removed. It is. FIG. 6 is a view for explaining the configuration of the drive mechanism of the door bodies 171 and 172. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating state of the door bodies 171 and 172. In the following description of the variable display unit 35, the right and left directions are described when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in the state of FIG. The left door 172 is also referred to as âleft door 172â.
å³ïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯äœããåã倧ããã®ç¥ç©åœ¢ç¶ã®æ¿ç¶ããªãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«ãããŠãã®å³äžé éšã«å³æïŒïŒïŒãèšããããåå·Šäžé éšã«å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒã¯ãå°ãªããšã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžåŽãéæç€ïŒïŒãããããã³ã³æ©åæ¹ã«åŒµãåºããŠããããã®åŒµãåºããéšäœïŒåŒµåºéšïŒã®çŽäžã«å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãé 眮ãããŠãããããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãšã»ãŒåã倧ããã®ééãéãŠãŠé¢éãããŠããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã瞊暪ã«åã ïŒåºåããŠå šäœã§ïŒåå²ããæã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯æŠãåèšïŒåå²ãããã¡ã®ïŒé ååã®å€§ãããæãããã€ãŸããã®ãšãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«éãªãããã«ããŠå³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãé èšãããããšã§ãåèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®çŽïŒïŒïŒÃïŒã®é åãé ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   As shown in FIG. 5A, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both substantially rectangular plates having the same size, and are displayed on the upper right corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. A right door 171 is provided, and a left door 172 is provided at the upper left corner. The center frame 43 has at least the upper side of the display screen G projecting forward from the game board 30 to the front of the pachinko machine, and the right door 171 and the left door 172 are arranged directly below the projecting portion (projected portion). The right door 171 and the left door 172 are spaced apart from each other by a space having substantially the same size as the doors 171 and 172. When the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is divided into 9 parts by dividing the display screen G vertically and horizontally, the right door 171 and the left door 172 generally have a size corresponding to one of the 9 parts. That is, at this time, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed so as to overlap the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41, so that an area of about 1/9 à 2 of the display screen G is hidden. It is like that.
峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®é§åæ©æ§ãå³ïŒïŒïœïŒåã³å³ïŒãçšããŠèª¬æããããªããå³ïŒã¯ãåºæ¬çã«å³ïŒïŒïœïŒã®ïŒ¡âïŒ¡ç·æé¢ã瀺ããã説æã®äŸ¿å®äžã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãåãå²ãåšå²å£ïŒïŒïŒãåãé€ããç¶æ ã§ç€ºããŠããã峿ïŒïŒïŒã¯éç¶æ ã§ãå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯éç¶æ ã§ç€ºããŠãããå³ïŒäžã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯éæç€ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ã®ãã¬ãŒã ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã«è£ çãããŠããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®åŸæ¹ã«ã¯ãåŸè¿°ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãèšçœ®ãããŠããã   The drive mechanism of the right door 171 and the left door 172 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 basically shows a cross section taken along line AA in FIG. 5B, but for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is shown with the peripheral wall 191 surrounding the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 removed. Yes. The right door 171 is shown in a closed state, and the left door 172 is shown in an open state. In FIG. 6, the first symbol display device 41 is attached to the frame cover 213 behind the game board 30, and a display control device 214 described later is installed behind the first symbol display device 41.
峿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®åºç«¯éšïŒå³ïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šç«¯éšïŒã«èšãããã軞éšïŒïŒïŒïœã«ãããŠæ¯è»žïŒïŒïŒã«ããååå¯èœã«æ¯æãããŠããããŸãã峿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïœããå»¶ã³ãã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœãèšãããããã®ã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœã®å 端éšããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«é£çµãããŠããããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®å 端éšã¯ãå¥ã®ãªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠãœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒã®åºå軞ïŒïŒïŒã«é£çµãããŠããã峿ïŒïŒïŒã®è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïœãã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãã¯åšå²å£ïŒïŒïŒã«æ²¿ã£ãŠãã®å€æ¹ã«èšããããŠãããçµæãšããŠãããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ãå²ãããã«ããŠé 眮ãããããã®ãšãããœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒã®åºå軞ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããïŒïŒïŒã®ä»å¢åã«ãã£ãŠäŒžé·ç¶æ ãšããããããç¶æ ã§ã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«å¯Ÿé¢ããç¶æ ãããªãã¡åœè©²è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžéšãé ããããªç¶æ ã§ä¿æãããã   The right door 171 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 173 at a shaft portion 171a provided at the base end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5B). The right door 171 is provided with an arm portion 171b extending from the shaft portion 171a, and the distal end portion of the arm portion 171b is connected to the link 175. The distal end portion of the link 175 is connected to the output shaft 178 of the solenoid 177 via another link 176. The shaft portion 171a, the arm portion 171b, the links 175, and 176 of the right door 171 are provided on the outside along the peripheral wall 191, and as a result, they are arranged so as to surround the display screen G. At this time, the output shaft 178 of the solenoid 177 is extended by the urging force of the spring 179, and in this state, the right door 171 faces the display screen G, that is, in a state where a part of the display screen G is hidden. Retained.
å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒåŽã§ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåŽãšåæ§ã®æ§æãæããŠãããããªãã¡ãå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®åºç«¯éšïŒå³ïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯å³ç«¯éšïŒã«èšãããã軞éšïŒïŒïŒïœã«ãããŠæ¯è»žïŒïŒïŒã«ããååå¯èœã«æ¯æãããŠããããŸããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïœããå»¶ã³ãã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœãèšãããããã®ã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœã®å 端éšããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«é£çµãããŠããããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®å 端éšã¯ãå¥ã®ãªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠãœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒã®åºå軞ïŒïŒïŒã«é£çµãããŠãããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïœãã¢ãŒã éšïŒïŒïŒïœããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãã¯åšå²å£ïŒïŒïŒã«æ²¿ã£ãŠãã®å€æ¹ã«èšããããŠãããçµæãšããŠãããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ãå²ãããã«ããŠé 眮ãããããã®ãšãããœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒã®åºå軞ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããïŒïŒïŒã®ä»å¢åã«ãã£ãŠäŒžé·ç¶æ ãšããããããç¶æ ã§ã¯å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«å¯Ÿé¢ããç¶æ ãããªãã¡åœè©²è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžéšãé ããããªç¶æ ã§ä¿æãããã   The left door 172 side has the same configuration as the right door 171 side. That is, the left door 172 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 181 at a shaft portion 172a provided at the base end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 5B). Further, the left door 172 is provided with an arm portion 172b extending from the shaft portion 172a, and a distal end portion of the arm portion 172b is connected to the link 182. The distal end of the link 182 is connected to the output shaft 185 of the solenoid 184 via another link 183. The shaft portion 172a, the arm portion 172b, the links 182 and 183 and the like of the left door 172 are provided on the outside along the peripheral wall 191, and as a result, they are arranged so as to surround the display screen G. At this time, the output shaft 185 of the solenoid 184 is extended by the urging force of the spring 186, and in this state, the left door 172 faces the display screen G, that is, in a state where a part of the display screen G is hidden. Retained.
åèšæ§æã®å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãäŸãã°å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒåŽã®ãœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒãéé»ãããããšã«ãããããïŒïŒïŒã®ä»å¢åã«æããŠåºå軞ïŒïŒïŒãçž®ã¿ãããã«äŒŽããªã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãæºåããããããŠãå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã軞éšïŒïŒïŒïœãäžå¿ã«ååããããšã§ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«å¯ŸããŠçŽç«ããç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ããïŒå³ç€ºã®éç¶æ ïŒãå¿è«ã峿ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœã«ã€ããŠãåæ§ã§ããããªãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®è¡šé¢ããã幟å奥ãŸã£ãäœçœ®ã«èšããããŠããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãšããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåé¢ã®ã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãšã®éã«ã¯ååãªééã確ä¿ãããŠãããæ ã«ãåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåäœããéãäœãæ¯éãªãåæ¹åŽãžã®åååäœãè¡ãããããšãã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the right door 171 and the left door 172 configured as described above, for example, when the solenoid 184 on the left door 172 side is energized, the output shaft 185 contracts against the urging force of the spring 186, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the links 182 and 183 are swung. Then, the left door 172 rotates about the shaft portion 172a, so that the left door 172 shifts to an upright state with respect to the display screen G (open state in the figure). Of course, the same applies to the operation of the right door 171. In addition, the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is provided in the position somewhat behind the surface of the game board 30, and it is between the display screen G of the 1st symbol display apparatus 41, and the glass 137 of the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. A sufficient interval is secured. Therefore, when the doors 171 and 172 are operated, the forward movement can be performed without any trouble.
å³ïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®é§åæ©æ§ã®éã«ã¯äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ãœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠã¯äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠé§åä¿¡å·ãåºåããããã®é§åä¿¡å·ã«åŸã£ãŠåãœã¬ãã€ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéé»ãããããã®ãšãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯åã ç¬ç«ããŠééé§åãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   As shown in FIG. 5B, a relay board 188 is provided between the drive mechanisms of the right door 171 and the left door 172. A drive signal is output to the solenoids 177 and 184 of the doors 171 and 172 via the relay substrate 188, and the solenoids 177 and 184 are energized according to the drive signal. At this time, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are independently opened and closed.
峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãããããã«éç¶æ ããéç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ããããšã«ããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ãããŠè¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ïŒç»å衚瀺é åã®å€§ããåã³åœ¢ç¶ïŒã倿Žããããå³ïŒã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ããã衚瀺圢æ äŸã瀺ãã   When the right door 171 and the left door 172 shift from the closed state to the open state, the display form (size and shape of the image display area) is changed on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. In FIG. 7, the example of a display form in the display screen G of the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is shown.
å³ïŒã«ãããŠãïŒïœïŒã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãå ±ã«éç¶æ ã«ããå Žåã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå³ç€ºããŠããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®å³äžé éšåã³å·Šäžé éšã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžéšé åã§ã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«æãŸããäžå€®éšåã®ã¿ãé²åºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã®ãšãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å šç»é¢é åã®ãã¡çŽïŒïŒïŒã®é åã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ãããã   7A shows a display form when both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are in the closed state. In this state, the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 are hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, and are sandwiched between the right door 171 and the left door 172 in the upper area of the display screen G. Only the center part is exposed. At this time, about 2/9 of the entire screen area of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172.
ïŒïœïŒã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒãéããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå³ç€ºããŠããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®å·Šäžé éšãå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžéšé åã§ã¯å³åŽïŒïŒïŒã®éšåãé²åºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããŸããïŒïœïŒã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒãéããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå³ç€ºããŠããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®å³äžé éšã峿ïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžéšé åã§ã¯å·ŠåŽïŒïŒïŒã®éšåãé²åºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å šç»é¢é åã®ãã¡çŽïŒïŒïŒã®é åã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã¯å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®ããããã«ããé ãããã   (B) has shown the display form in the state which the right door 171 opened and the left door 172 closed. In this state, the upper left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the left door 172, and the right 2/3 portion is exposed in the upper area of the display screen G. Further, (c) shows a display form in a state where the right door 171 is closed and the left door 172 is opened. In this state, the upper right corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the right door 171, and the left 2/3 portion is exposed in the upper area of the display screen G. In the states (b) and (c), about 1/9 of the entire screen area of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by either the right door 171 or the left door 172.
ããã«ãïŒïœïŒã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãå ±ã«éããç¶æ ã§ã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå³ç€ºããŠããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãé ãããããšãç¡ãããç»å衚瀺é åãæå€§ãšãªããå šç»é¢é åã䜿ã£ã衚瀺ãå¯èœãšãªãã   Further, (d) illustrates a display form in a state where both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened. In this state, since the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is not hidden, the image display area is maximized, and display using the entire screen area is possible.
äžèšã®éã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®ééã®ç¶æ ã«å¿ããŠãã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ã倿Žããããããããã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ã«ãããŠã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®çžŠæ¹ååã³æšªæ¹åã®æé·éšåã®è¡šç€ºé åãæ®ãããã«ãªã£ãŠãããå³ïŒã§èª¬æããã°ãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«æãŸããäžå€®éšåãé ãããããšãªã衚瀺é åãšããŠæ®ãããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã®å Žåã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«éãªã£ãŠå³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ãçž®å°åããããšããå°è±¡ã¯æ¯èŒçå°ãªããåŸã£ãŠã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãæå¹ã«çšãã€ã€å¥œé©ãªè¡šç€ºæŒåºãå¯èœãšãªãã   As described above, the display form of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is changed according to the open / closed state of the right door 171 and the left door 172, but the vertical direction of the display screen G in any display form. The longest display area in the horizontal direction is left. If it demonstrates in FIG. 7, as shown to (a), the center part pinched | interposed into the right door 171 and the left door 172 will remain as a display area, without being hidden. In this case, even if the right door 171 and the left door 172 are provided so as to overlap the display screen G, the impression that the display screen G is reduced is relatively small. Therefore, a suitable display effect can be achieved while effectively using the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41.
å³ïŒã®èª¬æã«æ»ããéæç€ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæççºå°è£ 眮ããçºå°ãããéæçãéæç€ïŒïŒäžéšãžæ¡å ããããã®ã¬ãŒã«éšæãšããŠã®ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã®ååæäœã«äŒŽãçºå°ãããéæçã¯ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒãéããŠæå®ã®éæé åã«æ¡å ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã¯ãªã³ã°ç¶ããªãæš¹èæååã«ãŠæ§æãããŠãããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãæ©æŠæµæãäœæžããã¹ãããçŽ é åã®ããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èãçšããããŠãããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã¯ãå å€äºéã«èšããããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšãæãããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã¯äžæ¹ã®çŽïŒïŒïŒã»ã©ãé€ããŠç¥åç°ç¶ã«åœ¢æãããå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã¯å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®äžæ¹éæŸé åãå²ãããã«ãã€å ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®å·ŠåŽéšãšäžŠè¡ããããã«ç¥ååç°ç¶ã«åœ¢æãããŠããã   Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the game board 30 is attached with a rail unit 50 as a rail member for guiding the game balls launched from the game ball launching device to the upper part of the game board 30. The game balls launched in accordance with the 18 rotation operations are guided to a predetermined game area through the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is composed of a ring-shaped resin molded product, and more specifically, a fluorine-containing polycarbonate resin is used to reduce frictional resistance. The rail unit 50 includes an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 that are provided in an inner and outer double. The inner rail portion 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 of the upper portion, and the outer rail portion 52 surrounds the upper open area of the inner rail portion 51 and is parallel to the left side portion of the inner rail 51. Are formed in a substantially semi-annular shape.
å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã¯ãä»ã®æš¹èéšåãšäžäœæåãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®é¢äžã«ã»ãŒåçŽã«èµ·ç«ããŠèšããããŠããããŸããå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã¯ãå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšåæ§ã«ä»ã®æš¹èéšåãšäžäœæåãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®é¢äžã«ã»ãŒåçŽã«èµ·ç«ããŠèšããããæ¯æéšïŒïŒïœãæãããã®æ¯æéšïŒïŒïœã®å åŽé¢ã«ãéæçã®é£ç¿ãããæ»ãããªãã®ãšããããã®æºåãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïœãåãä»ããããŠãããæºåãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïœã¯ãé·å°ºç¶ããªãã¹ãã³ã¬ã¹è£œã®éå±åž¯ãããªããè€æ°ç®æã§æ¯æéšïŒïŒïœã«æ¯æãããŠããããããå Žåãå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšã«ããèªå°ã¬ãŒã«ãæ§æããããããåã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãæå®ééãéãŠãŠå¯Ÿåããéšåã«ããçæ¡å éè·¯ã圢æãããŠããããªããå å€ã®ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã察åããéšäœã§ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒãšã®åœæ¥éšïŒïŒã«ããåã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãé£çµãããŠãããçæ¡å éè·¯ã¯æååŽã«éæŸããæºç¶ã«åœ¢æãããŠããã   The inner rail portion 51 is integrally formed with other resin portions, and is provided to stand substantially vertically on the surface of the game board 30. Further, the outer rail portion 52 has a support portion 52a that is integrally molded with other resin portions in the same manner as the inner rail portion 51, and is provided substantially upright on the surface of the game board 30. A sliding plate 52b is attached to the inner surface of 52a to make the flight of the game ball smoother. The sliding plate 52b is made of a long metal strip made of stainless steel, and is supported by the support portion 52a at a plurality of locations. In such a case, a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a ball guide passage is formed by a portion where these rail portions 51 and 52 face each other with a predetermined interval. In addition, in the site | part which the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 oppose, each rail part 51 and 52 is connected by the contact part 53 with the game board 30, and a ball | bowl guide path is formed in the groove shape open | released to the near side. Has been.
ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã«ãããŠãåèšçæ¡å éè·¯ããéæçãé£ã³åºãéšäœïŒå³ïŒã®å·ŠäžéšïŒã«ã¯æ»ãç鲿¢éšæïŒïŒãåçããã該é£ã³åºããéæçã®æå€§é£ç¿éšåã«å¯Ÿå¿ããéšäœïŒå³ïŒã®å³äžéšïŒã«ã¯è¿ããŽã ïŒïŒãåçãããŠãããæ»ãç鲿¢éšæïŒïŒã«ãããäžæŠçæ¡å éè·¯ããéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžéšãžãšé£ã³åºããéæçãçæ¡å éè·¯å ã«æ»ã£ãŠããŸããšãã£ãäºæ ã鲿¢ãããããŸããæå®ä»¥äžã®å¢ãã§çºå°ãããéæçã¯è¿ããŽã ïŒïŒã«åœãããéæé åã®äžå€®å¯ãã«è·³ãè¿ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the rail unit 50, a return ball prevention member 54 is attached to a portion (left upper portion in FIG. 4) from which the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage, and a portion corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the jumped game ball (FIG. 4). In the upper right part), a return rubber 55 is attached. The return ball preventing member 54 prevents a situation in which a game ball that has once jumped from the ball guide path to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the ball guide path. In addition, the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 55 and is rebounded toward the center of the game area.
ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®å€åšéšã«ã¯ã倿¹ãžåŒµãåºããå匧ç¶ã®ãã©ã³ãžïŒïŒã圢æãããŠããããã©ã³ãžïŒïŒã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããåä»é¢ãæ§æãããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããéã«ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒäžã«ãã©ã³ãžïŒïŒãåœæ¥ããããã®ç¶æ ã§ãåœè©²ãã©ã³ãžïŒïŒã«åœ¢æãããè€æ°ã®éåã«ããžçãæ¿éãããŠéæç€ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®ç· çµããªããããããã§ãã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®äžäžåã³å·Šå³ã®å端éšã¯ç¥çŽç·ç¶ã«åœ¢æãããŠãããã€ãŸããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®äžäžåã³å·Šå³ã®å端éšã«ãããŠã¯ãã©ã³ãžïŒïŒãåãèœãšãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ãããæéã®é åã«ãŠã¬ãŒã«åŸã®æ¡åŒµãããªãã¡éæç€ïŒïŒäžã®éæé åã®æ¡åŒµãå³ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒäžã®éæé åã®æå€§å¹ ãšãªãäœçœ®ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³ç«¯äœçœ®ã«è³ãããã«é èšãããŠããããªããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®çæ¡å éè·¯ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããéšäœã®ãªãã§ãç¹ã«éæçã®åãå ¥ãéšäœã«é¢ããŠã¯ãåœè©²ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã匷åºã«åãä»ããŠéæçã®é£ã³ãå®å®ãããã¹ãã該åœãããã©ã³ãžïŒïŒãä»ãããå€ãç®æïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒã«æãä»ã¯ïŒã«æïŒã§ããžæ¢ããããŠããã   An arc-shaped flange 56 projecting outward is formed on the outer periphery of the rail unit 50. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30, and in this state, screws or the like are inserted into the plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56 and the game board 30. The rail unit 50 is fastened to 30. Here, the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed in a substantially linear shape. That is, the flanges 56 are cut off at the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a limited area in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game area on the game board 30 can be expanded. It has become. The rail unit 50 is disposed such that the position of the gaming area on the gaming board 30 that is the maximum width reaches the left and right end positions of the gaming board 30. Note that, among the parts corresponding to the ball guide passages of the rail unit 50, in particular, with respect to the game ball receiving part, the corresponding flange 56 is provided from others in order to firmly attach the rail unit 50 and stabilize the flight of the game ball. There are also many screws (three in this embodiment, two in the other).
å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒåã³å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒéã®çæ¡å éè·¯ã®å ¥å£ã«ã¯ãåçæ¡å éè·¯ã®äžéšãééããããã«ããŠåžéšïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããåžéšïŒïŒã¯ãå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®å€åšéšããäžæ¹ãžå»¶ã³ãããã«åœ¢æãããéæé åãŸã§è³ããçæ¡å éè·¯å ãéæµããŠãããã¡ãŒã«çããã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«å°ãæ©èœãæãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®å³äžé éšåã³å·Šäžé éšã¯ã蚌çŽçã®ã·ãŒã«ããã¬ãŒãã貌çããããã®ã¹ããŒã¹ïŒå³ã®ïŒ³ïœïŒïŒ³ïœïŒãšãªã£ãŠããããã®è²Œçã¹ããŒã¹ã確ä¿ããããã«ããã©ã³ãžïŒïŒã«åæ¬ ïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïœã圢æãããŠããã蚌çŽçã®ã·ãŒã«ãéæç€ïŒïŒã«çŽæ¥è²Œãä»ããæ§æãšããããšã§ã蚌çŽçã®äžæ£ãªè²ŒãçŽãçãè¡ãã«ãããã®ãšãªã£ãŠããã   A convex portion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage between the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 so as to close a part of the ball guide passage. The convex portion 57 is formed so as to extend downward from the outer peripheral portion of the inner rail portion 51, and has a function of guiding a foul ball that does not reach the game area and flows backward in the ball guide passage to the foul ball passage 76 (see FIG. 3). Have The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces (Sa, Sb in the figure) for sticking seals and plates such as certificate stamps, and in order to secure this attachment space, the flange 56 Notches 58a and 58b are formed in the upper and lower portions. By adopting a configuration in which a sticker such as a stamp is directly pasted on the game board 30, it is difficult to improperly paste the stamp or the like.
éæç€ïŒïŒã«ãããŠã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒããã倿¹ã®å·Šäžéšã«ã¯ãååŸã«è²«éããäžç¶ç«¯ååïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®äžç¶ç«¯ååïŒïŒãéããŠãéæç€è£é¢ã«èšçœ®ããäžç¶ç«¯åæ¿ã®æ¥ç¶ã³ãã¯ã¿ïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåé¢åŽã«é²åºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the game board 30, a relay terminal hole 59 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in the upper left part outside the rail unit 50, and through this relay terminal hole 59, a connector for connecting a relay terminal plate installed on the back of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.
次ã«ãéæé åã«ã€ããŠèª¬æãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®ç€é¢ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒå å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ããå å€é åã«åºç»ãããç¥å圢ç¶ã«åºç»ãããå åŽé åãéæé åãšãããŠãããç¹ã«æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®ç€é¢äžã«åºç»ãããéæé åãåŸæ¥ãããã¯ããã«å€§ããæ§æãããŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æäžéšå°ç¹ããéæç€ïŒïŒäžéšãŸã§ã®éã®è·é¢ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒåŸæ¥åãããïŒïŒïœïœé·ãïŒãå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æ¥µå·Šäœçœ®ããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æ¥µå³äœçœ®ãŸã§ã®éã®è·é¢ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœïŒåŸæ¥åãããïŒïŒïœïœé·ãïŒãšãªã£ãŠããããŸããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æ¥µå·Šäœçœ®ããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æ¥µå³äœçœ®ãŸã§ã®éã®è·é¢ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœãšãªã£ãŠããã   Next, the game area will be described. The board surface of the game board 30 is divided into inner and outer areas by a rail unit 50 (inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52), and an inner area divided into a substantially circular shape is a game area. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game area divided on the board surface of the game board 30 is configured to be much larger than before. In the present embodiment, the distance from the uppermost point of the outer rail portion 52 to the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and the extreme left position of the inner rail portion 51 from the extreme left position of the outer rail portion 52. The distance between them is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail portion 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail portion 51 is 418 mm.
æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãéæé åããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢ããèŠãŠå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒåã³å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠå²ãŸããé åã®ãã¡ãå å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å¯Ÿåéšåã§ããçæ¡å éè·¯ã®é åãé€ããé åãšããŠèª¬æãããã€ãŸããéæé åã¯çæ¡å éè·¯éšåã¯å«ãŸãªããããéæé åã®åãã£ãŠå·ŠåŽéçäœçœ®ã¯å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠã§ã¯ãªãå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç¹å®ãããããŸããéæé åã®åãã£ãŠå³åŽéçäœçœ®ã¯å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç¹å®ãããéæé åã®äžåŽéçäœçœ®ã¯ã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒã圢æãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯äœçœ®ã«ãã£ãŠç¹å®ãããéæé åã®äžåŽéçäœçœ®ã¯å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç¹å®ããããåŸã£ãŠãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãéæé åã®å¹ ïŒå·Šå³æ¹åã®æå€§å¹ ïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïœïœã§ãããéæé åã®é«ãïŒäžäžæ¹åã®æå€§å¹ ïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïœïœã§ããã   In the present embodiment, the game area is an area of a ball guide passage that is an opposite part of the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 among the areas surrounded by the inner rail part 51 and the outer rail part 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It demonstrates as an area | region remove | excluding. That is, since the game area does not include the ball guide path portion, the left limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail portion 51, not by the outer rail portion 52. Further, the right limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail portion 51, the lower limit position of the game area is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30 in which the out port 36 is formed, and the upper limit position of the game area. Is specified by the outer rail portion 52. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the gaming area (maximum width in the left-right direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the gaming area (maximum width in the vertical direction) is 445 mm.
ããã§ãåèšéæé åã®å¹ ã¯ãå°ãªããšãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžããããšãæãŸããããã奜ãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãããã«ïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžã§ããããšãæãŸãããããªãã¡ãéæé åã®å¹ 寞æ³ã¯ãéæé 忡倧ãšãã芳ç¹ããã¯å€§ããçšå¥œãŸããããŸããéæé åã®é«ãã¯ãå°ãªããšãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžããããšãæãŸããããã奜ãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãããã«ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžã§ããããšãããæãŸããããã¡ãããïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžåã¯ïŒïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãšããŠããããããªãã¡ãéæé åã®é«ã寞æ³ã¯ãéæé 忡倧ãšãã芳ç¹ããã¯å€§ããçšå¥œãŸããããªããäžèšå¹ åã³é«ãã®çµåãã«ã€ããŠã¯ãäžèšæ°å€ãä»»æã«çµã¿åããããã®ãšããããšãã§ããããªããéæé åã®å¹ åã¯é«ããäžå®å€ä»¥äžãšãªããšãéæé åã®äžéšãéæç€ïŒïŒã®ç€é¢ãè¶ããããšãèãããããããã®è¶ããé åã«ã€ããŠã¯ä»ã®éšæãéæç€é¢ã«æ²¿ã£ãŠèšããããšçã«ãã£ãŠè£ãã°ããã   Here, the width of the gaming area is preferably at least 380 mm. More preferably, it is 400 mm or more, 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and further 460 mm or more. That is, the width dimension of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. The height of the game area is preferably at least 400 mm. More preferably, it is 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and more preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it is good also as 470 mm or more or 480 mm or more. In other words, the height of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. In addition, about the combination of the said width | variety and height, it can be set as what combined the said numerical value arbitrarily. If the width or height of the game area exceeds a certain value, a part of the game area may exceed the board surface of the game board 30, but other members may be placed along the game board surface in the area beyond the game area. What is necessary is just to supplement by providing.
æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒé¢ã«å¯Ÿããéæé åã®é¢ç©ã®æ¯çã¯çŽïŒïŒïŒ ãšãåŸæ¥ã«æ¯ã¹æ Œæ®µã«é¢ç©æ¯ã倧ãããã®ãšãªã£ãŠããããªããéæç€ïŒïŒé¢ã«å¯Ÿããéæé åã®é¢ç©æ¯ã¯ãåŸæ¥ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒ çšåºŠã«éããªãã£ãããšãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®ããã«åŸæ¥ãšåæ§ã®å€§ããã®éæç€ïŒïŒã䜿çšããŠããåæäžã§ã¯çžåœã«éæé åãæ¡å€§ããŠãããšãããããªããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®å€åœ¢ã¯éæããŒã«ãžã®èšçœ®ã®éœåäžè£œé è éã§ã»ãŒçµ±äžãããŠãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®å€§ãããåæ§ãšããããåŸãªãç¶æ³äžã«ãããŠãäžèšã®ããã«éæç€ïŒïŒé¢ã«å¯Ÿããéæé åã®é¢ç©ã®æ¯çãçŽïŒïŒïŒ ãé«ããããšã¯ãéæé 忡倧ã®èгç¹ã§éåžžã«ææçŸ©ã§ãããããã§ãåèšæ¯çã¯ãå°ãªããšãïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã§ããããšãæãŸãããããã«å¥œãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã§ããããã奜ãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã§ããããŸããæ¬å®æœåœ¢æ ã®å Žåãè¶ããŠïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã§ããã°ãäžå±€æãŸãããããã«ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã§ãã£ãŠãããããªããïŒïŒïŒ 以äžã確ä¿ããã«ã¯éæé åã®åœ¢ç¶ãç¥å圢ç¶ãšããããšã¯å°é£ãšãªããããé éšïŒäŸãã°å³äžé éšãå³äžé éšïŒãæ¡åŒµãããããªåœ¢ç¶ãšããããšã奜ãŸããã   In the present embodiment, the ratio of the area of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 is about 70%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. Note that the area ratio of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 has been only about 50% in the related art, so that the game board 30 having the same size as the conventional one is used as in the present embodiment. So, it can be said that the game area is considerably expanded. It should be noted that the external shape of the pachinko machine 10 is almost uniform among manufacturers for the convenience of installation in the game hall, and in the situation where the size of the game board 30 must be the same, the surface of the game board 30 as described above. Increasing the ratio of the area of the gaming area to about 20% is very significant from the viewpoint of expanding the gaming area. Here, the ratio is preferably at least 60% or more. More preferably, it is 65% or more, More preferably, it is 70% or more. Further, if it is 75% or more exceeding the case of this embodiment, it is more desirable. Furthermore, it may be 80% or more. In order to secure 80% or more, it is difficult to make the shape of the game area into a substantially circular shape. Therefore, it is preferable to have a shape in which the corner (for example, the lower right corner or the upper right corner) is expanded. .
ãŸããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå šäœã®æ£é¢åŽã®é¢ç©ã«å¯Ÿããéæé åã®é¢ç©ã®æ¯çã¯çŽïŒïŒïŒ ãšãåŸæ¥ã«æ¯ã¹æ Œæ®µã«é¢ç©æ¯ã倧ãããã®ãšãªã£ãŠããããªããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå šäœã®æ£é¢åŽã®é¢ç©ã«å¯Ÿããéæé åã®é¢ç©æ¯ã¯ãïŒïŒããŒã»ã³ã以äžã§ããã®ãæãŸããããã¡ãããïŒïŒããŒã»ã³ã以äžãšããŠãããããïŒïŒããŒã»ã³ã以äžãåã¯ïŒïŒããŒã»ã³ã以äžãšããŠãããã   Moreover, the ratio of the area of the game area to the area of the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is about 40%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. The area ratio of the game area to the area on the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is desirably 35% or more. Of course, it may be 40% or more, 45% or more, or 50% or more.
éæé åã®æ¡åŒµã«é¢é£ããŠãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã®äž¡åŽã«äœçœ®ããã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒã¯ã該ã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééããéæçãäžå€®ã®æ¹ãžå¯ãããããããªæ¡å æ©æ§ãæããŠãããããã«ãããéæé åãå·Šå³æ¹åã«æ¡åŒµãããŠããå Žåã§ãã£ãŠããéæçãäžå€®ã®äœåå£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã®æ¹ãžãšæ¡å ããããšãã§ããã²ããŠã¯ãéæé åãæ¡åŒµãããããšã«ããéæçãå ¥è³ãã«ãããªãããšã«ããèè¶£ã®äœäžãæå¶ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããŸããéæé åãå·Šå³æ¹åã«æ¡åŒµãããŠããããšã«ãã£ãŠãæ¯èŒç倧åã®å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãéæé åäžå€®ã«èšããŠããå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽã«ã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒã颚è»ïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®éïŒéæçãäžå€®ã«èªå°ããããã®äžè§éçã®èªå°éïŒãä»ã®åœ¹ç©ãªã©ãäœè£ããã£ãŠé èšããããšãã§ããå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽã®éæé åã§ã®éæçã®æµããå調ãšãªãããéæçã®æåãååã«æ¥œããŸããããšãã§ããã   In relation to the expansion of the game area, the through gates 34 located on both sides of the variable display unit 35 have a guide mechanism that allows the game balls that have passed through the gate 34 to be moved toward the center. As a result, even when the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be guided toward the central operation port 33 and the variable winning device 32, and thus the game area is expanded. As a result, a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of winning the game ball is suppressed. Further, since the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, even if a relatively large variable display unit 35 is provided at the center of the game area, the through-gate 34, the windmill 37, and a plurality of nails are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35. (Guide nails such as a triangular nail for guiding the game ball to the center) and other objects can be provided with a margin, and the flow of game balls in the game areas on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35 It is not monotonous, and you can fully enjoy the behavior of the game ball.
éæç€ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽéšã«åæ¬ ïŒïŒã圢æãããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽããã®åŒµåºé åãšã®å¹²æžãåé¿ãããŠããããšãã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã«ãããŠéæç€ïŒïŒäžã®éæé åã®æå€§å¹ ãšãªãäœçœ®ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³ç«¯äœçœ®ã«ãŸã§è³ãããã«ãªã£ãŠããããšã¯æ¢ã«è¿°ã¹ãããæŽã«åŸè¿°ããããã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äž¡åŽéšã«èšããããè£åŒ·éšæïŒè»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒåç §ïŒãšæœé è£ çœ®ïŒåºæ ïŒïŒïŒãé£åæïŒïŒïŒçïŒå³ïŒïŒåç §ïŒãšãé 眮ããããã®é åãæ®ããå¹ ãšãªãããã«ããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«éæç€ïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããããã®ããšããããéæé åã®æ¡åŒµãå³ãããŠããã   Notches 38 are formed on both the left and right sides of the game board 30 to avoid interference with the protruding areas from the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, and the maximum width of the game area on the game board 30 in the rail unit 50 It has already been described that the position reaches the left and right end positions of the game board 30, but as will be described later, reinforcing members (bearing brackets 235: FIG. 12) provided on the left and right sides of the main body frame 12. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for arranging the locking device (the base frame 247, the interlocking rod 248, etc .: see FIG. 12). For these reasons, the game area is being expanded.
å³ïŒã®èª¬æã«æ»ããåèšæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãçªåïŒïŒïŒéæç€ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ãéæççºå°è£ 眮ããçºå°ãããçŽåŸã«éæçãæ¡å ããããã®çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã¯ããã®åŸæ¹ã®é屿¿ïŒïŒãä»ããŠæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã«åä»åºå®ãããŠãããæå®ã®çºå°è§åºŠïŒæã¡åºãè§åºŠïŒã«ãŠçŽç·çã«å»¶ã³ãããæ§æãããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã®ååæäœã«äŒŽãçºå°ãããéæçã¯ããŸãã¯çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã«æ²¿ã£ãŠæãäžæ¹ã«æã¡åºããããã®åŸçæ¡å éè·¯ãéããŠéæé åã«æ¡å ããããåè¿°ã®ãšããéæé åãåŸæ¥ãããå€§å¹ ã«æ¡åŒµãããããšã«ãããçæ¡å éè·¯ã®æ²çã¯å°ãããªã£ãŠãããããæåºçãå®å®åãããããã®å·¥å€«ãå¿ èŠãšãªããããã§ãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãéæçã®çºå°äœçœ®ãäœãããŠçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®åŸæè§åºŠïŒçºå°è§åºŠïŒãæ¢åã®ãã®ããã幟å倧ãããïŒããªãã¡çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãç«ã¡äžããããã«ãïŒããŸãçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãéæççºå°è£ 眮ã®çºå°äœçœ®ããéæé åã®äžå€®äœçœ®ïŒã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒïŒãè¶ããäœçœ®ãŸã§å»¶ã³ããã圢æããããšã§çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®é·ããæ¢åã®ãã®ãããé·ãããŠååãªé·ãã®çèªå°è·é¢ã確ä¿ããããã«ããŠãããããã«ãããéæççºå°è£ 眮ããçºå°ãããéæçãããå®å®ããç¶æ ã§çæ¡å éè·¯ã«æ¡å ã§ããããã«ããŠãããããã«æåºçã®å®å®åãå³ãã¹ããçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãèšçœ®ããé屿¿ïŒïŒã倧ååãããšå ±ã«è©²é屿¿ïŒïŒã倿°ç®æïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒãïŒïŒã«æïŒã§ããžæ¢ãããŠãããããã«ããçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåŒ·åºã«äœçœ®æ±ºããããŠããã   Returning to the description of FIG. 3, in the resin base 25, below the window hole 26 (game board 30), a launch rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched from the game ball launcher is attached. Yes. The firing rail 61 is fixedly attached to the resin base 25 via a metal plate 62 behind the firing rail 61, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). Accordingly, the game ball that is launched in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 61 and then guided to the game area through the ball guide path. As described above, since the curvature of the ball guide passage is reduced by greatly expanding the game area as compared with the conventional game area, a device for stabilizing the launch ball is required. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch position of the game ball is lowered so that the inclination angle (launch angle) of the launch rail 61 is somewhat larger than the existing one (that is, the launch rail 61 is raised), and By forming the launch rail 61 so as to extend from the launch position of the game ball launcher to a position beyond the center position (out port 36) of the game area, the launch rail 61 is made longer than the existing one and sufficiently long. The ball guide distance is secured. Thereby, the game ball launched from the game ball launching device can be guided to the ball guide passage in a more stable state. Further, in order to stabilize the launch ball, the metal plate 62 provided with the launch rail 61 is enlarged, and the metal plate 62 is screwed at a number of locations (15 to 20 in this embodiment). Thus, the launch rail 61 is firmly positioned with respect to the game board 30.
çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒãšçæ¡å éè·¯ãšã®éã«ã¯æå®ééã®ééãããããã®ééããäžæ¹ã«ãã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãä»®ã«éæççºå°è£ 眮ããçºå°ãããéæçãæ»ãç鲿¢éšæïŒïŒãŸã§è³ãããã¡ãŒã«çãšããŠçæ¡å éè·¯å ãéæ»ãããå Žåã«ã¯ããã®ãã¡ãŒã«çããã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒãä»ããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«æåºããããå ã¿ã«ãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®å Žåãçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®é·ãã¯çŽïŒïŒïŒïœïœãçºå°ã¬ãŒã«å 端éšã®ãã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒã«éããééã®é·ãïŒçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®å»¶é·ç·äžã®é·ãïŒã¯çŽïŒïŒïœïœã§ããã   There is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 and the ball guide passage, and a foul ball passage 76 is provided below the gap. Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launching device does not reach the return ball prevention member 54 and returns as a foul ball in the ball guide passage, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 76 to the lower plate 16. To be discharged. Incidentally, in the case of the present embodiment, the length of the launch rail 61 is about 240 mm, and the length of the gap (the length on the extension line of the launch rail 61) leading to the foul ball passage 76 at the tip of the launch rail is about 40 mm. .
ãã¡ãŒã«çãçæ¡å éè·¯å ãéæµããŠããéããã®å€ãã¯å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«æ²¿ã£ãŠæµããå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®äžç«¯éšã«å°éããæç¹ã§äžæ¹ã«èœäžããããäžéšã®ãã¡ãŒã«çã¯çæ¡å éè·¯å ã§æŽããå ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒåŽãžè·³ãäžãããã®ãããããã®éãè·³ãäžãã£ããã¡ãŒã«çã¯ãçæ¡å éè·¯å ¥å£ã®åèšåžéšïŒïŒã«åœããããã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒã«èªå°ããããããã«ããããã¡ãŒã«çã®å šãŠããã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒã«ç¢ºå®ã«æ¡å ããããã¡ãŒã«çãšæ¬¡ã«çºå°ãããéæçãšã®å¹²æžãæå¶ãããã   When the foul balls flow backward in the ball guide passage, most of them flow along the outer rail portion 52 and fall downward when reaching the lower end portion of the outer rail portion 52. Some rampage in the ball guide passage and jump to the inner rail 51 side. At this time, the splashed foul ball hits the convex portion 57 at the entrance of the ball guide passage and is guided to the foul ball passage 76. Thereby, all of the foul balls are reliably guided to the foul ball passage 76, and interference between the foul balls and the game balls to be fired next is suppressed.
ãªãã詳ããå³é¢ã®é瀺ã¯çç¥ããããéæççºå°è£ 眮ã«ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒåŽã®çåºå£ïŒäžç¿ïŒïŒã®æäžæµéšããéããçåºå£ïŒããéæçãïŒã€ãã€äŸçµŠãããããã®éãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯éæçã®çºå°äœçœ®ãäœããããããåææ ïŒïŒåŽã®çåºå£ããåèšçºå°äœçœ®ãžã®èœå·®ã倧ãããªãããçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®çºå°åºç«¯éšä»è¿ã«ã¯ãã®å³åŽãšæååŽã«ããããã¬ã€ãéšæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšçœ®ããŠãããããã«ãããåææ ïŒïŒåŽã®çåºå£ããäŸçµŠãããéæçãåžžã«æå®ã®çºå°äœçœ®ã«ã»ãããããå®å®ããçºå°åäœãå®çŸã§ããããŸããéæççºå°è£ 眮ã«ã¯ãåºç«¯éšãäžå¿ã«ååå¯èœã«æ¯æãããæçæ§ãèšããããæçæ§ã®ååã«äŒŽãéæçãçºå°ãããããæçæ§ã«é¢ããŠè»œéåãæãŸããŠãããããæ ãã¢ã«ãããŠã çã®è»œéå±ãžã®ææå€æŽãæ§ã·ã£ããéšå¯žæ³ã®çž®å°åã«ããæçæ§ã®è»œéåãå³ãäžæ¹ã§ãååãªçºå°åã確ä¿ãã¹ããæçæ§ã®ãããéšïŒåºç«¯éšãšå察åŽã®å 端éšïŒã«éãéšãèšããŠãããããã«ãããååã§ãã€å®å®ããéæçã®çºå°ãå®çŸã§ãããæçæ§ã®éãéšãäžæ¹ã«çªåºããŠèšããããšã«ãããæçæ§ã容æã«æãã ãã²ã£ããããããããšãã§ããæ§å ã®æç匷ãã®èª¿æŽçããæããªããšãã广ãåŸãããã   Although detailed disclosure of the drawings is omitted, one game ball is supplied to the game ball launching device one by one from the ball outlet on the front door frame 13 side (ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23). At this time, since the launch position of the game ball is lowered in this embodiment, the drop from the exit of the ball on the front door frame 13 side to the launch position becomes large, Guide members 63 and 64 are installed on the front side. Thereby, the game ball supplied from the ball exit on the front door frame 13 side is always set at a predetermined launch position, and a stable launch operation can be realized. In addition, the game ball launching device is provided with a ball striking rod that is supported so as to be rotatable about the base end portion, and a game ball is launched along with the rotation of the ball striking ball. It is rare. Therefore, while aiming to reduce the weight of the hitting ball by changing the material to a light metal such as aluminum and reducing the size of the hitting shaft, the head portion of the hitting ball (opposite to the base end) is required to ensure sufficient firing force. A weight is provided at the tip of the side. Thereby, sufficient and stable launch of the game ball can be realized. By providing the weight portion of the hitting ball projecting upward, the hitting ball can be easily picked or caught, and the effect of facilitating adjustment of the hitting strength of the hitting tip can be obtained.
ãŸããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢ã«ãããŠçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®å·ŠåŽã«ã¯ãå·Šå³äžå¯Ÿã®æåºå£ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã圢æããããšå ±ã«ããã®åæ¹ã«ãæåºå£ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒããæåºãããéæçãäžç¿ïŒïŒåã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒã®äœããã«æ¡å ããããã®éæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããã䟿å®äžä»¥äžã®èª¬æã§ã¯ãæåºå£ïŒïŒãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ãæåºå£ïŒïŒãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ãšãããããããæåºå£ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®èé¢ã«èšããããéæçåé éšïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒåç §ïŒã«éããŠãããåºæ¬çã«ç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒããéæçã®æåºãè¡ããããã®ç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒãå«ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã«éããéè·¯ãéæçã§äžæ¯ã«ãªããšãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒã«ä»£ããŠç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒããéæçã®æåºãè¡ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In addition, a pair of left and right discharge ports 66 and 67 are formed on the left side of the launch rail 61 on the front surface of the main body frame 12, and the game balls discharged from the discharge ports 66 and 67 are placed in front of the upper plate 23 or A game ball guide unit 70 for guiding one of the lower dishes 16 is attached. For convenience, in the following description, the discharge port 66 is also referred to as a first discharge port, and the discharge port 67 is also referred to as a second discharge port. These discharge ports 66 and 67 communicate with a game ball distributing unit 245 (see FIG. 13) provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12, and game balls are basically discharged from the first discharge port 66. When the passage leading to the upper plate 23 including the first outlet 66 is filled with game balls, the game balls are discharged from the second outlet 67 instead of the first outlet 66.
éæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã¯ãããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èçã®éæãªæš¹èææã«ããå éšãèŠèªå¯èœã«æ§æãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãééããç¶æ ã§æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšåææ ïŒïŒãšã®éã«åãŸãããåã¿ãæ¯èŒçèããªãããã«åœ¢æãããŠãããéæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåè¿°ã®ãã¡ãŒã«çéè·¯ïŒïŒãäžäœçã«åœ¢æãããŠãããéæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåèšæåºå£ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãšäžç¿ïŒïŒãšãé£éããããã®çæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããéæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒã®æååŽã«ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã«é£éããé£éå£ïŒïŒã圢æãããé£éå£ïŒïŒãééããããã«ããŠééãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããééãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒã¯æ¯è»žïŒïŒã«ããååå¯èœã«æ¯æãããä»å¢ææ®µãšããŠã®ããïŒïŒã«ããé£éå£ïŒïŒãééããäœçœ®ã«åžžæä»å¢ãããŠããã   The game ball guide unit 70 is configured to be visible with a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate resin, and between the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 with the front door frame 13 closed with respect to the main body frame 12. It is formed so that the thickness is comparatively thin so that it can be accommodated. The game ball guide unit 70 is integrally formed with the foul ball passage 76 described above. The game ball guide unit 70 is formed with a ball discharge passage 71 for communicating the discharge ports 66 and 67 with the lower plate 16. In the game ball guide unit 70, a communication port 72 communicating with the upper plate 23 is formed on the front side of the first discharge port 66 of the main body frame 12, and an opening / closing plate 73 is attached so as to close the communication port 72. ing. The opening / closing plate 73 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 74 and is always urged to a position where the communication port 72 is closed by a spring 75 as urging means.
éæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã®äžèšæ§æã«ããã°ãåææ ïŒïŒãéæŸããç¶æ ã§ã¯ããïŒïŒã®ä»å¢åã«ããééãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒãå³ç€ºã®åŠãèµ·ãäžãããé£éå£ïŒïŒãééããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒããæåºãããéæçãçæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒãéããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«æ¡å ããããåŸã£ãŠãé£éå£ïŒïŒã®äžæµåŽã«éæçã貯çãããŠããç¶æ ã§åææ ïŒïŒãéæŸããå Žåããã®è²¯ççã¯é£éå£ïŒïŒããããŒãèœã¡ãããšãªããçæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒãéããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«æµäžãããã€ãŸããåé£Ÿãæ ãçç¥ããåææ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒãçŽæ¥èšããããæ§æãšããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠããåææ ïŒïŒã®éæŸã«éãé£éå£ïŒïŒã®äžæµåŽã«ããéæçãããŒãèœã¡ãŠããŸããšãã£ãäžéœåã鲿¢ã§ãããããã«å¯Ÿããåææ ïŒïŒãééããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«èšããããçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«ããããïŒïŒã®ä»å¢åã«æããŠééãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒãæŒãéããããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã¯ãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒããæåºãããéæçãé£éå£ïŒïŒãä»ããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«æ¡å ããããåŸã£ãŠãé£éå£ïŒïŒããäžæµåŽã®éæçã¯äžç¿ïŒïŒã«æãåºãããããªããéæçæ¡å ãŠãããïŒïŒã®çæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒäžæµåŽã«ã¯ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã«æåºãããéæçãäžæ¯ïŒæºã¿ã³ïŒã«ãªã£ãããšãæ€ç¥ããäžç¿æºã¿ã³ã¹ã€ãããåãä»ããããŠããã   According to the above configuration of the game ball guide unit 70, the open / close plate 73 rises as shown in the figure by the urging force of the spring 75 when the front door frame 13 is opened, and the communication port 72 is closed. In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is opened in a state where game balls are stored upstream of the communication port 72, the stored balls flow down to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71 without spilling from the communication port 72. To do. That is, even in the present pachinko machine 10 in which the front decorative frame is omitted and the upper plate 23 is directly provided on the front door frame 13, the game on the upstream side of the communication port 72 when the front door frame 13 is opened. The inconvenience of spilling a ball can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 13 is closed, the opening / closing plate 73 is pushed open against the biasing force of the spring 75 by the ball passage rod 138 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 13. . In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the upper plate 23 through the communication port 72. Accordingly, the game ball upstream of the communication port 72 is paid out to the upper plate 23. A lower plate full tank switch for detecting that the game ball discharged to the lower plate 16 is full (full tank) is attached to the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 71 of the game ball guide unit 70.
æš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãçªåïŒïŒã®å³äžéšã«ç¥åè§åœ¢ç¶ã®å°çªïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãéæç€ïŒïŒã®å³äžé éšã¹ããŒã¹ïŒå³ïŒã®ïŒ³ïœïŒã«è²Œããã蚌çŽçã¯ããã®å°çªïŒïŒãéããŠèŠèªã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã®å°çªïŒïŒããéæç€ïŒïŒäžã«èšŒçŽçãçŽæ¥è²Œãä»ããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   The resin base 25 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 78 at the lower right portion of the window hole 26. Accordingly, the stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner space (Sa in FIG. 4) of the game board 30 can be viewed through the small window 78. It is also possible to directly paste a stamp or the like on the game board 30 from the small window 78.
æš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãçªåïŒïŒã®å·Šäžéšã«ãå°çªïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®å°çªïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒã§èª¬æããéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžç¶ç«¯ååïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«ãããšã»ãŒåäžã®åœ¢ç¶ã§èšããããäžç¶ç«¯ååïŒïŒåã³å°çªïŒïŒãéããŠãéæç€è£é¢ã«èšçœ®ããäžç¶ç«¯åæ¿ã®æ¥ç¶ã³ãã¯ã¿ïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åé¢åŽã«é²åºãããããããæ§æã«ãããŠãåææ ïŒïŒåŽã«èšããåçš®ã©ã³ãã«å¯ŸããŠã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒïŒæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®å°çªïŒïŒããé²åºããæ¥ç¶ã³ãã¯ã¿ïŒïŒãä»ããŠé»æ°çãªæ¥ç¶ããªãããŠãããæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®äžéšã«ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã®éæŸã®ç¶æ ãæ€åºããããã®åææ éæŸã¹ã€ããïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåææ éæŸã¹ã€ããïŒïŒã¯ãæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®åé¢ã«åºæ²¡å¯èœãªãã³ãæããŠãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãã³ãæŒã蟌ãŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒã®ééãæ€ç¥ãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãã³ãçªåºäœçœ®ã«æ»ã£ãŠåææ ïŒïŒã®éæŸãæ€ç¥ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³ïŒã«æã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãéããéã«åææ ïŒïŒèé¢ã®éå ·é¡ïŒå³ïŒã«ç€ºãè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥è§Šããäžã€ãã®éå ·é¡ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã«å°éãããŠã¢ãŒã¹ïŒæ¥å°ïŒããããã®éå±çïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïœãåãä»ããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãéå±çïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïœãéããŠãåææ ïŒïŒèé¢ã®éå ·é¡ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã®æœé è£ çœ®ããã³ãžéå ·ã«å°éããããããæœé è£ çœ®ããã³ãžéå ·ãšå ±ã«ã¢ãŒã¹ãããã   A small window 79 is also provided in the resin base 25 at the upper left portion of the window hole 26. This small window 79 is provided in a position corresponding to the relay terminal hole 59 of the game board 30 described in FIG. 4 in substantially the same shape as that, and through the relay terminal hole 59 and the small window 79, the relay installed on the back of the game board. The connection connector 60 of the terminal board is exposed on the front side of the main body frame 12. In such a configuration, various lamps provided on the front door frame 13 side are electrically connected via the connection connector 60 exposed from the small window 79 of the main body frame 12 (resin base 25). A front door frame opening switch 27 for detecting the open state of the front door frame 13 is provided on the top of the resin base 25. The front door frame opening switch 27 has a pin that can be projected and retracted on the front surface of the resin base 25. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the pin is pushed in and the front door frame 13 is closed. When the front door frame 13 is opened with respect to the main body frame 12, the pin returns to the protruding position and the opening of the front door frame 13 is detected. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the resin base 25 comes into contact with the metal fittings (reinforcing plates 131 to 134 shown in FIG. 8) on the back of the front door frame 13, and Metal pieces 28a and 28b are attached to connect the metal fittings to the main body frame 12 side for grounding. Therefore, the metal fittings on the back of the front door frame 13 are conducted to the locking device and the hinge fitting on the main body frame 12 side through the metal pieces 28a and 28b, and are grounded together with the locking device and the hinge fitting.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šç«¯åŽïŒéé軞ç·åŽïŒã«ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒãééå¯èœã«æ¯æããããã®æ¯ææ©æ§ãšããŠãäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããäžåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒã«ã¯æååŽã«åæ¬ ãæããæ¯æåïŒïŒãèšããããäžåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒã«ã¯äžæ¹ãžçªåºããçªèµ·è»žïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããªããæ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ¯æãããåææ ïŒïŒã®å ·äœçæ§æã«ã€ããŠã¯åŸè¿°ããããŸããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å³ç«¯åŽïŒéé軞ç·ãšã¯å察åŽïŒã«ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒè£é¢åŽã®éæŸç«¯åŽã«èšããäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®é€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒãæ¿å ¥ããããã®æ¿å ¥åïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãããããèšããããŠãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãåææ ïŒïŒãæœé ç¶æ ãšããããã®æœé è£ çœ®ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®è£é¢åŽã«é ããŠé 眮ãããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããåŸã£ãŠãé€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãæ¿å ¥åïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠæœé è£ çœ®ã«ä¿æ¢ãããããšã«ãã£ãŠãåææ ïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠéæŸäžèœã«æœé ãããã   A pair of upper and lower support brackets 81 and 82 are attached to the left end side (opening / closing axis line side) of the main body frame 12 as a support mechanism for supporting the front door frame 13 so that it can be opened and closed. The upper support fitting 81 is provided with a support hole 83 having a notch on the front side, and the lower support fitting 82 is provided with a protruding shaft 84 protruding upward. The specific configuration of the front door frame 13 supported by the support fittings 81 and 82 will be described later. Further, a pair of upper and lower metal fittings 155 and 156 (see FIG. 2) provided on the open end side on the back side of the front door frame 13 is inserted into the right end side (the side opposite to the opening / closing axis) of the main body frame 12. Insertion holes 87 and 88 are provided, respectively. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device for locking the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 is hidden behind the main body frame 12. Therefore, the front door frame 13 is locked to the main body frame 12 so that it cannot be opened by locking the metal fittings 155 and 156 to the locking device via the insertion holes 87 and 88.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å³äžé éšã«ã¯ã倿 ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®æœé åã³è§£é ã䞊ã³ã«æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããåææ ïŒïŒã®æœé åã³è§£é ãè¡ãããã®éµéšæãšããŠã®ã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒãèšçœ®ãããŠãããã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã¯æœé è£ çœ®ã«äžäœåãããŠãããæœé è£ çœ®ã®ãã¡ã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã ããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åæ¹ã«çªåºããç¶æ ã§èšããããŠããããã®å Žåãã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã¯ãéæé åã®æå€§å¹ ãšãªãäœçœ®ãšã¯ç°ãªãäœçœ®ã«èšããããŠãããã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®æœè§£é ãšåææ ïŒïŒã®æœè§£é ãšãå ±ã«è³ãæ©èœãæããŠãããéµç©Žã«å·®ã蟌ãã ããŒãå·ŠïŒåæèšåãæ¹åïŒã«åããšæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®æœé ãè§£ãããéã«ããŒãå³ïŒæèšåãæ¹åïŒã«åããšåææ ïŒïŒã®æœé ãè§£ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   A cylinder lock 91 as a key member for locking and unlocking the main frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking and unlocking the front door frame 13 with respect to the main frame 12 is installed at the lower right corner of the main frame 12. Has been. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated with the locking device, and only the cylinder lock 91 of the locking device is provided in a state of protruding in front of the main body frame 12. In this case, the cylinder lock 91 is provided at a position different from the position that is the maximum width of the game area. The cylinder lock 91 has a function to cover both the locking and unlocking of the main body frame 12 and the locking and unlocking of the front door frame 13, and when the key inserted into the key hole is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise direction) When the key is unlocked and the key is turned to the right (clockwise direction), the front door frame 13 is unlocked.
å³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒãå²ãããã«ããŠçžŠé·ç¶ã®ã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããã詳现ãªå³ç€ºã¯çç¥ããããã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®äžç«¯éšåã³äžç«¯éšã«ä¿æ¢éšïŒããã¯ïŒã圢æãããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãäžåŽã®ä¿æ¢éšãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã«ä¿æ¢ããããšå ±ã«ãäžåŽã®ä¿æ¢éšãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšå颿¿ïŒïŒãšã®éã«æã¿èŸŒãããšã«ãããã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åãä»ãããããåææ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒã®åœ¢ç¶ã«åãããŠåæ¬ éšïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããåææ ïŒïŒãééããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãã®åææ ïŒïŒãšå ±ã«ã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©åé¢éšãæ§æããããªããåææ ïŒïŒãééãããšããã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒã«åœ¢æãããééšãåææ ïŒïŒã«ããæŒãããããã«ããŒéšæïŒïŒã®ããã€ãã鲿¢ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   As shown in FIG. 2, a vertically long cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to surround the cylinder lock 91. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the cover member 92 has locking portions (hooks) formed at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. Therefore, the cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 by locking the upper locking portion to the main body frame 12 side and sandwiching the lower locking portion between the main body frame 12 and the front plate 14. . The front door frame 13 is formed with a notch 145 corresponding to the shape of the cover member 92. When the front door frame 13 is closed, the cover member 92 together with the front door frame 13 constitutes the front portion of the pachinko machine. . When the front door frame 13 is closed, the flange formed on the cover member 92 is pressed by the front door frame 13 to prevent the cover member 92 from rattling.
次ã«ãåææ ïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒïŒå³ïŒãåç §ãã€ã€èª¬æããããªããå³ïŒã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã®èé¢å³ã§ããã   Next, the front door frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the front door frame 13.
åææ ïŒïŒã«ã¯éæé åã®ã»ãŒå šåãåæ¹ããèŠèªããããšãã§ããããã«ããèŠèªçªãšããŠã®çªéšïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããçªéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå圢ã«è¿ãç¥æ¥å圢ç¶ããªãããã詳ããã¯ããã®å·Šå³åŽã®ç¥äžå€®éšãäžäžåŽã«æ¯ã¹ãŠç·©ããã«æ¹Ÿæ²ãã圢ç¶ãšãªã£ãŠããããªããåèšç¥äžå€®éšãçŽç·ç¶ã«ãªã圢ç¶ã§ãã£ãŠããããåææ ïŒïŒã®çªéšïŒïŒïŒäžæ¹ã«ãããŠãæãçãéšäœã®ãã¬ãŒã å¹ ã¯çŽïŒïŒïœïœã§ãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã«ãããäžèšãã¬ãŒã å¹ å¯žæ³ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ãããŠå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®æäžéšïŒéæé åã®äžç«¯ïŒãšæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯ãšã®éã®è·é¢ãšã»ãŒäžèŽãããã®ã§ãã£ãŠãïŒïŒïœïœãïŒïŒïœïœçšåºŠã®äžèšãã¬ãŒã å¹ ãæããåŸæ¥æ©çš®ã«æ¯ã¹ãŠèããçããªã£ãŠãããããã«ãããéæé åã«ãããäžéšé åã®èŠèªæ§ã確ä¿ããããããªããšå ±ã«ã倧åã®å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãæ¯èŒçäžæ¹ã«é 眮ããããšãã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããçªéšïŒïŒïŒäžæ¹ã®ãã¬ãŒã å¹ ïŒæçéšäœïŒã®å¯žæ³ã¯ïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžã§ããããšãæãŸãããããæãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžã§ãããããã«æãŸããã¯ïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžã§ããããã¡ãããæå®ã®åŒ·åºŠã確ä¿ã§ããã®ã§ããã°ãïŒïŒïœïœä»¥äžãšããŠãå·®ãæ¯ããªãã   The front door frame 13 is formed with a window portion 101 as a viewing window so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 101 has a substantially oval shape that is nearly circular, and more specifically, a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the window portion 101 is gently curved as compared to the upper and lower sides. The substantially central portion may have a linear shape. Above the window part 101 of the front door frame 13, the frame width of the narrowest part is about 61 mm. The frame width dimension in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the distance between the uppermost part of the outer rail portion 52 (the upper end of the game area) and the upper end of the main body frame 12 in the main body frame 12, and is 85 mm to This is significantly shorter than the conventional model having the frame width of about 95 mm. Thereby, the visibility of the upper area in the game area can be easily ensured, and the large variable display unit 35 can also be arranged relatively upward. The dimension of the frame width (narrowest part) above the window portion 101 is desirably 80 mm or less, more desirably 70 mm or less, and further desirably 60 mm or less. Of course, as long as a predetermined strength can be secured, the thickness may be 50 mm or less.
åææ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³ã®ãã¬ãŒã éšåã¯ããã¬ãŒã å¹ ãå°ããããã«ã¯å¶çŽããããåææ ïŒïŒèªäœã®åŒ·åºŠåã³ã¬ã©ã¹æ¯æåŒ·åºŠã確ä¿ããã®ã«ååãªå¹ 寞æ³ãå¿ èŠãšãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå·Šå³ã®åãã¬ãŒã éšåã«ãããŠæãçãéšäœã®ãã¬ãŒã å¹ ãäœããçŽïŒïŒïœïœãšããŠããããã®å Žåãæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠã¯éæé åãå€§å¹ ã«æ¡åŒµããããšãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ£é¢ããèŠãŠå·ŠåŽããªãã¡éé軞ç·åŽã§ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã®ãã¬ãŒã å¹ ãäžèšã®éãçŽïŒïŒïœïœãšãªãã®ã«å¯Ÿããã¬ãŒã«ãŠãããïŒïŒã®å€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®å·Šç«¯äœçœ®ãšæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šç«¯äœçœ®ãšã®è·é¢ãçŽïŒïŒïœïœãšãªããåŸè ã®å¯žæ³ãããªãå°ãããã®ãšãªã£ãŠãããã€ãŸãæ¬æ§æã§ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒãééããç¶æ ã«ãããŠãçæ¡å éè·¯ã®äžéšããåææ ïŒïŒã®å·ŠåŽãã¬ãŒã éšåãšéè€ãèŠãé ãããããã«ãªããããããªãããçæ¡å éè·¯ã«ãããŠéæçãäžæçã«èŠèªå°é£ãšãªã£ããšããŠãããããçæ¡å éè·¯ã¯éæçãéæé åã«æ¡å ããããŸã§ã®ééé åã«éãããéæè ãäž»ãšããŠéæã楜ããéæé åã«ãããŠéæçãèŠèªå°é£ãšãªãããã§ã¯ãªãããã®ãããå®éã®éæã«éããŠã¯äœãæ¯éãçããªãã以äžã«ãããåææ ïŒïŒã®ååãªåŒ·åºŠåã³ã¬ã©ã¹æ¯æåŒ·åºŠã確ä¿ãã€ã€ããéæã«äœãæ¯éãåãŒãããšãªãéæé åã®æ¡åŒµãå¯èœãšãªãã   The left and right frame portions of the front door frame 13 are restricted in reducing the frame width, and need a width dimension sufficient to ensure the strength of the front door frame 13 itself and the glass support strength. In the present embodiment, the narrowest part of the left and right frame parts has a frame width of about 44 mm. In this case, since the game area is greatly expanded in the pachinko machine 10, the frame width of the front door frame 13 is about 44 mm as described above on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, on the opening / closing axis side. On the other hand, the distance between the left end position of the outer rail portion 52 of the rail unit 50 and the left end position of the main body frame 12 is about 21 mm, and the latter dimension is considerably small. That is, in this configuration, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed, a part of the ball guide passage overlaps and is covered with the left frame portion of the front door frame 13. However, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the ball guide passage, the ball guide passage is only a passing area until the game ball is guided to the game area, and the game where the player mainly enjoys the game. The game ball is not difficult to view in the area. Therefore, there is no trouble in actual game. As described above, it is possible to expand the game area without causing any trouble to the game, while ensuring sufficient strength and glass support strength of the front door frame 13.
åææ ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯éšã«ãããå·Šå³äž¡åŽã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒè¡šé¢ãéæç€ïŒïŒè¡šé¢çïŒèšŒçŽçãå«ãïŒã®äžéšãèŠèªã§ããããéææš¹èãåãä»ããå°çªïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããå°çªïŒïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããéææš¹èã¯ããã®å éšã®èšŒçŽçãå·¥å Žçã§å®¹æã«æ©æ¢°èªã¿åãã§ããããå¹³åŠç¶ã«æ§æããããäœããå°çªïŒïŒïŒã«ãå éšã®èšŒçŽçãããŒã«äœæ¥è çã容æã«ç®èŠã§ããããæ¡å€§ã¬ã³ãºéšãèšããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   Small windows 107 to which a transparent resin is attached are provided on both the left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door frame 13 so that a part of the surface of the main body frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 (including certificate paper) can be visually recognized. The transparent resin attached to the small window 107 is formed in a flat shape so that the internal certificate paper or the like can be easily machine-read in a factory or the like. However, the small window 107 can be provided with a magnifying lens portion so that the hall operator or the like can easily see the internal certificate paper or the like.
åææ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã®åšå²ïŒäŸãã°ã³ãŒããŒéšåïŒã«åçš®ã©ã³ãçã®çºå ææ®µãèšããããŠããããããçºå ææ®µã¯ã倧åœããæãæå®ã®ãªãŒãæçã«ãããéæç¶æ ã®å€åã«å¿ããŠç¹ç¯ãç¹æ» ã®ããã«çºå æ æ§ã倿Žå¶åŸ¡ãããããšã«ãããéæäžã®æŒåºå¹æãé«ãã圹å²ãæãããäŸãã°ãçªéšïŒïŒïŒã®åšçžã«æ²¿ã£ãŠïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€çã®çºå ææ®µãå èµããç°ç¶é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒãå·Šå³å¯Ÿç§°ã«èšããããç°ç¶é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒã®äžå€®ã§ãã£ãŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æäžéšã«ã¯ïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€çã®çºå ææ®µãå èµããäžå€®é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäžå€®é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒã倧åœããã©ã³ããšããŠæ©èœãã倧åœããç¶æ æã«ç¹ç¯ãç¹æ» ãè¡ãããšã«ãã倧åœããäžã§ããããšãå ±ç¥ããããŸããäžç¿ïŒïŒåšãã«ããåããçã®çºå ææ®µãå èµããäžç¿é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®ä»ãäžå€®é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒã®å·Šå³åŽæ¹ã«ã¯ãè³çæåºäžã«ç¹ç¯ããè³çã©ã³ãïŒïŒïŒãšæå®ã®ãšã©ãŒæã«ç¹ç¯ãããšã©ãŒè¡šç€ºã©ã³ãïŒïŒïŒãšãããããèšããããŠããããªããç°ç¶é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå å€äºéã®æš¹èã«ããŒå±€ãšãã®å åŽã«å容ãããçºå°æ¿ä»ãçºå äœïŒïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€ïŒãšãããªããæš¹èã«ããŒå±€ã®åã ã®å åŽé¢ã«ã¯åå±€ã§çžŠæšªã«äº€å·®ããåãã«çªæ¡ïŒåã¯æ³¢ç¶ã®çªèµ·ïŒãèšããããŠãããå€åŽã®æš¹èã«ããŒå±€ã¯éæã§ãããå åŽã®æš¹èã«ããŒå±€ã¯æè²ã§ãããåŸã£ãŠãç°ç¶é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒãçºå ãããã°ã倿°ã«åæ£åãããç¶æ ãåã¯ç«äœæã䌎ã£ãç¶æ ã®é»é£Ÿãå®çŸã§ããããã«ãªããæš¹èã«ããŒå±€ã«ã¯ãã¬ã©ã¹ç²æ«å ¥ãã®æš¹èææãçšãããšè¯ãããã®ãããªæš¹èã«ããŒå±€ã®æ§æã¯ãä»ã®é»é£ŸéšïŒäŸãã°äžå€®é»é£ŸéšïŒïŒïŒãè³çã©ã³ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é©çšããããšãã§ããã   The front door frame 13 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, an annular illumination part 102 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs is provided symmetrically along the periphery of the window part 101, and an LED or the like is provided at the center of the annular illumination part 102 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. There is provided a central illumination unit 103 incorporating the light emitting means. In the pachinko machine 10, the central lighting unit 103 functions as a jackpot lamp and notifies that the jackpot is being hit by performing lighting or blinking in the jackpot state. Further, around the upper plate 23, there is also provided an upper plate illumination unit 104 that also incorporates light emitting means such as LEDs. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103, there are respectively provided a prize ball lamp 105 that is lit during award ball payout and an error display lamp 106 that is lit when a predetermined error occurs. The annular illumination part 102 includes an inner and outer double resin cover layer and a light emitting body (LED) with a launch plate accommodated inside the resin cover layer. The inner surface of each resin cover layer intersects with each layer vertically and horizontally. A protrusion (or a wavy protrusion) is provided in the direction to be turned. The outer resin cover layer is transparent, and the inner resin cover layer is colored. Therefore, if the annular illumination part 102 is caused to emit light, it is possible to realize the illumination in a state of being dispersed in a large number or in a state accompanied with a stereoscopic effect. A resin material containing glass powder may be used for the resin cover layer. Such a configuration of the resin cover layer can also be applied to other electric decoration parts (for example, the central electric decoration part 103 and the prize ball lamp 105).
åææ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãçªéšïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹äœçœ®ã«ã貞çæäœéšïŒïŒïŒãé èšãããŠããã貞çæäœéšïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ç貞ããã¿ã³ïŒïŒïŒãšãè¿åŽãã¿ã³ïŒïŒïŒãšã床æ°è¡šç€ºéšïŒïŒïŒãšãèšããããŠãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®åŽæ¹ã«é 眮ãããã«ãŒããŠãããïŒç貞ããŠãããïŒã«çŽå¹£ãã«ãŒãçãæå ¥ããç¶æ ã§ã貞çæäœéšïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç貞ãæäœãã«ãŒãè¿åŽæäœåã³ã«ãŒã床æ°ã®ç¢ºèªãè¡ãããšãã§ãããããªãã¡ãç貞ããã¿ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã«ãŒãçïŒèšé²åªäœïŒã«èšé²ãããæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠè²žåºçãåŸãããã«æäœããããã®ã§ãããã«ãŒãçã«æ®é¡ãååšããéãã«ãããŠè²žåºçãæãåºããããè¿åŽãã¿ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã«ãŒããŠãããã«æ¿å ¥ãããã«ãŒãçã®è¿åŽãæ±ããéã«æäœãããã床æ°è¡šç€ºéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã«ãŒãçã®æ®é¡æ å ±ã衚瀺ãããã®ã§ããããªããã«ãŒããŠããããä»ããã«ç貞ãè£ çœ®çããäžç¿ã«éæçãçŽæ¥è²žãåºãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒããããçŸéæ©ïŒã§ã¯è²žçæäœéšïŒïŒïŒãäžèŠãšãªããããããå Žåã«ã¯ã貞çæäœéšïŒïŒïŒã®èšçœ®éšåã«é£Ÿãã·ãŒã«çãä»ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã«ããã貞çæäœéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®æ§æã«ãããŠãã«ãŒããŠããããçšããããã³ã³æ©ïŒããããæ©ïŒãšçŸéæ©ãšã®å ±çšãå¯èœãšãªãã   The front door frame 13 is provided with a ball rental operation portion 120 at a position below the window portion 101. The ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. A ball lending operation, a card return operation, and a card frequency check can be performed by the lending operation unit 120 in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (a ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. it can. That is, the ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as the remaining amount exists on the card or the like. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays remaining amount information such as a card. In a pachinko machine (so-called cash machine) in which game balls are rented directly from a ball lending device or the like to a top plate without using a card unit, the ball lending operation unit 120 is unnecessary. A decorative sticker or the like is attached to 120 installation portions. Thereby, in the configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 provided with the lending operation unit 120, the pachinko machine using a card unit (so-called CR machine) and the cash machine can be shared.
åææ ïŒïŒã®è£åŽã«ã¯ãçªéšïŒïŒïŒãå²ãããã«ããŠéå±è£œã®åçš®è£åŒ·éšæãèšããããŠããã詳ããã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãåææ ïŒïŒã®è£åŽã«ãã£ãŠçªéšïŒïŒïŒã®å·Šå³åã³äžäžã®å€åŽã«ã¯ããããè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããããè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã¯çžäºã«æ¥è§ŠããŠé£çµãããŠããããå³ã®å·ŠåŽåã³äžåŽã®è£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®é£çµéšã«ã¯çŽæ¥ã®æ¥è§Šãé¿ããããã®æš¹èããŒãïŒïŒïŒãä»åšãããŠãããããã«ãããè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã«ãã黿°çµè·¯ã®éããã«ãŒããåæããããã€ãºã®åå ãšãªãç£çã®çºççã鲿¢ãããŠããã   On the back side of the front door frame 13, various metal reinforcing members are provided so as to surround the window portion 101. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, reinforcing plates 131, 132, 133, and 134 are attached to the back side of the front door frame 13 and on the left and right and upper and lower outer sides of the window portion 101, respectively. These reinforcing plates 131 to 134 are connected in contact with each other, but resin parts 135 for avoiding direct contact are interposed at the connecting portions of the left and upper reinforcing plates 132 and 133 in the drawing. Thereby, the closed loop of the electric path by the reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is cut, and the generation of a magnetic field causing noise is prevented.
å³ïŒã®å³åŽãšãªãéé軞ç·åŽã®è£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã®äžç«¯éšåã³äžç«¯éšã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããçµä»æ©æ§ãšããŠãçµä»éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããããŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒåŽã®çµä»éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããããªãã¡ãäžåŽã®çµä»éå ·ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯äžé¢ã«éå£ãã軞穎ã圢æãããŠããããã®è»žç©Žã«äžåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒã®çªèµ·è»žïŒïŒãæ¿å ¥ãããäžæ¹ãäžåŽã®çµä»éå ·ïŒïŒïŒã®è»žéšãäžåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒïŒã®æ¯æåïŒïŒã«æ¿å ¥ãããããšã«ãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãééå¯èœã«æ¯æãããŠããããŸããåè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã®äžéäœçœ®ã«ããã¯ç¶ããªãä¿åçªïŒïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠããããã®ä¿åçªïŒïŒïŒïœã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®åéšïŒïŒïœïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«æ¿å ¥ãããããã«æ§æãããŠãããããã«ãããäžç¿ïŒïŒãå«ã圢æ ã§åææ ïŒïŒãæ§æãããã®äžäžã®è»žæ¯ééãé·ãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ãããŠããäžéäœçœ®ã«ãããåææ ïŒïŒã®æµ®ãäžããã鲿¢ã§ãããããæ ãåææ ïŒïŒãæµ®ãããŠã®äžæ£è¡çºçãæå¶ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   8 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing plate 131 on the opening / closing axis side on the right side of FIG. And the assembly | attachment metal fittings 151 and 152 by the side of the front door frame 13 are attached with respect to the support metal fittings 81 and 82 (refer FIG. 3) by the side of the main body frame 12. FIG. That is, a shaft hole that opens to the lower surface is formed in the lower mounting bracket 152, and the protruding shaft 84 of the lower support bracket 82 is inserted into the shaft hole, while the upper mounting bracket 151 By inserting the shaft portion into the support hole 83 of the upper support fitting 81, the front door frame 13 is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 12. Further, the reinforcing plate 131 is provided with an engaging claw 131a having a hook shape at an intermediate position thereof. The engaging claw 131a is formed in the hole 12a ( (See FIG. 3). Thereby, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front door frame 13 is configured in a form including the upper plate 23 and the upper and lower shaft support intervals are increased, the front door frame 13 can be prevented from being lifted at the intermediate position. Therefore, an illegal act or the like floating the front door frame 13 is suppressed.
å³ïŒã®å·ŠåŽãšãªãéé軞ç·ãšã¯å察åŽã®è£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯é€åœ¢ç¶ããªãäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®é€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããããé€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåŸæ¹ã«å»¶ã³ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«èšããæ¿å ¥åïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããããã«ããŠèšããããŠãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåææ ïŒïŒãééããéãé€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã®æ¿å ¥åïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ¿å ¥ãããŠæœé è£ çœ®ã«ããæœé ç¶æ ãšãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   A pair of upper and lower hook metal fittings 155 and 156 having a hook shape are attached to the reinforcing plate 132 opposite to the opening / closing axis line on the left side of FIG. These metal fittings 155 and 156 extend rearward and are provided so as to correspond to the insertion holes 87 and 88 (see FIG. 3) provided in the main body frame 12. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the metal fittings 155 and 156 are inserted into the insertion holes 87 and 88 on the main body frame 12 side, and are locked by the locking device.
äžåŽã®è£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåèšçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿåããäœçœ®ã«æš¹èã±ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããæš¹èã±ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåèšè²žçæäœéšïŒïŒïŒçšã®åè·¯åºæ¿ãå容ãããŠãããæš¹èã±ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®èé¢ïŒå³ïŒã«èŠããé¢ïŒã¯å¹³åŠç¶ããªããåææ ïŒïŒãéããéã«çºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒã®åŽå£ãæ§æããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæ ã«ãçºå°ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒããéæçãåæ¹ã«ããŒãèœã¡ãããšã鲿¢ãããã   A resin case 136 is attached to the lower reinforcing plate 134 at a position facing the firing rail 61. The resin case 136 accommodates a circuit board for the ball rental operation unit 120. The back surface of the resin case 136 (the surface visible in FIG. 8) is flat, and constitutes the side wall of the firing rail 61 when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from spilling forward from the launch rail 61.
äžåŽã®è£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšãåãæ¬ ããéšäœã«ã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ã«åããŠçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒãèšçœ®ãããŠãããçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒã®å°ãªããšãäžæ¹ã«ã¯ãåããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ã«åããŠå»¶ã³ãåºïŒã²ããïŒéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®å Žåãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã«åææ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒãšåºéšïŒïŒïŒãšã®éã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåŽã®é£éå£ïŒïŒäžèŸºã«æ²¿ã£ãŠå»¶ã³ãçªæ¡ãå ¥ã蟌ãããã«ããŠé 眮ããããæ ã«ãçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒããééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããŠäžæ£è¡çºãè¡ãããšããŠããéæé åã«ãŸã§ééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããããšãéåžžã«å°é£ãšãªããçµæãšããŠãééããã£ã«ã çãå©çšããŠè¡ãããäžæ£è¡çºã鲿¢ããããšãã§ããã   A ball passage rod 138 is installed at a part of the lower reinforcing plate 134 cut out toward the back of the pachinko machine 10, and at least above the ball passage rod 138, also at the back of the pachinko machine 10. An eaves portion 139 extending toward the surface is provided. In this case, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed on the main body frame 12 side, a ridge extending along the upper side of the communication port 72 on the main body frame 12 side enters between the ball passage rod 138 and the collar portion 139. Arranged. Therefore, even if a wire, a film, or the like is invaded from the ball passage rod 138 and an illegal act is attempted, it is very difficult to infiltrate the wire, the film, or the like into the game area. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.
äžè¿°ããè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã¯ã¬ã©ã¹æ¯æçšã®éæ ãšããŠã®æ©èœãå ŒãåããŠããããããè£åŒ·æ¿ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®å åŽãåŸæ¹ã«æãè¿ãããŠã¬ã©ã¹ä¿ææºã圢æãããŠãããã¬ã©ã¹ä¿ææºã¯ååŸã«ïŒå圢æãããŠãããç©åœ¢ç¶ããªãååŸäžå¯Ÿã®ã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåã¬ã©ã¹ä¿ææºã«ãŠä¿æããããããã«ãããïŒæã®ã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãååŸã«æå®ééãéãŠãŠåçãããŠããã   The reinforcing plates 131 to 134 described above also have a function as a metal frame for supporting the glass, and the inside of these reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is folded back to form a glass holding groove. Two rows of glass holding grooves are formed in the front and rear, and a pair of front and rear glasses 137 having a rectangular shape are held in each glass holding groove. Thereby, the two glass 137 is attached to the front and back at a predetermined interval.
åè¿°ããéãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯éæé åã®æ¡åŒµãå³ã£ãŠããããšãããåææ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã«ãã£ãŠã¯ãå å€ã®ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒéã«åœ¢æãããçæ¡å éè·¯ã®äžéšãåææ ïŒïŒã«ããèŠãé ãããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããããæ ãçæ¡å éè·¯ã§ã¯æååŽã®éæŸéšãã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã§èŠããªãéšåãã§ããŠããŸãããããå ŽåãäŸãã°ãéæççºå°è£ 眮ããçºå°ãããéæçãæ»ãç鲿¢éšæïŒïŒãŸã§è³ããæ»ã£ãŠãããšãéæçãçæ¡å éè·¯å€ã«é£ã³åºããããå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãšã®éã«ã§ããééã«æãŸã£ãŠããŸããããããããããã§æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã«ãçæ¡å éè·¯ã®æååŽéæŸéšã被èŠããããã®ã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããŠãããã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ç¥å匧ç¶ããªãæ¿äœã§ãã£ãŠãéæãªæš¹èã«ãã圢æãããŠãããã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®å匧圢ç¶ãåèšçæ¡å éè·¯ã®åœ¢ç¶ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããŠãããçªéšïŒïŒïŒã®åšçžéšã«æ²¿ã£ãŠãçæ¡å éè·¯ã®åºç«¯éšããå 端éšè¿åãŸã§ã®åºéãèŠãããã«ãªã£ãŠãããç¹ã«ã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®å åŸåŽã®å¯žæ³ã»åœ¢ç¶ã¯å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã®ããã«ã»ãŒäžèŽããããŸããã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®å³ç«¯éšïŒããªãã¡ãã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒãåææ ïŒïŒã«åçããå³ïŒã®ç¶æ ã§å³ç«¯ãšãªãéšäœïŒã«ã¯ãçæ¡å éè·¯ãã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®åŽçžéšããã¯ã¿åºããéšåã被èŠããããã®è¢«èŠéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã以äžã®ã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã«ãããåææ ïŒïŒãéããããç¶æ ã«ãããŠã¯ãã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢ãçæ¡å éè·¯ã®ã»ãŒå šåãèŠãããšãšãªã£ãŠãéæçãçæ¡å éè·¯å€ã«é£ã³åºããããå€ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒãšã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãšã®éã«ã§ããééã«æãŸã£ãŠããŸããšãã£ãäžå ·åã®çºçã鲿¢ããããšãã§ããã   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game area is expanded. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the ball guide formed between the inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52 is used. A part of the passage is covered by the front door frame 13. Therefore, in the ball guide passage, a portion where the opening portion on the near side cannot be covered with the glass 137 is formed. In such a case, for example, when the game ball launched from the game ball launching device returns without reaching the return ball prevention member 54, the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage or between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137. There is a risk of being caught in a gap that can be made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13 so as to cover the front side opening portion of the ball guide passage. The rail cover 140 is a plate having a substantially arc shape, and is formed of a transparent resin. The rail cover 140 has an arc shape corresponding to the shape of the spherical guide passage, and covers a section from the base end portion of the spherical guide passage to the vicinity of the distal end portion along the peripheral edge portion of the window portion 101. ing. In particular, the size and shape of the rail cover 140 on the inner diameter side substantially match those of the inner rail portion 51. Further, at the right end portion of the rail cover 140 (that is, the portion that becomes the right end in the state of FIG. 8 where the rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13), the portion where the ball guide passage protrudes from the side edge portion of the glass 137. A covering portion 141 for covering the surface is provided. With the above-described configuration of the rail cover 140, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the back surface of the rail cover 140 covers almost the entire area of the ball guide passage, so that the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as being caught in a gap formed between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137.
ãŸããã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšè£åŽã«ã¯ããã®å åŽçžã«æ²¿ã£ãŠå匧ç¶ã«å»¶ã³äžã€åŸæ¹ãžåããŠçªåºããçªæ¡ïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããçªæ¡ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒãéããããç¶æ ã«ãããŠãçæ¡å éè·¯å ã«å ¥ã蟌ãã ç¶æ ã§å ã¬ãŒã«éšïŒïŒã«éãªãåãããã«é 眮ããããåŸã£ãŠãäŸãã°åææ ïŒïŒãšæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšã®ééããééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããŠäžæ£è¡çºãè¡ãããšããŠããçæ¡å éè·¯ã®å åŽã«ããéæé åã«ãŸã§ééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããããšãéåžžã«å°é£ãšãªãããã®çµæãééããã£ã«ã çãå©çšããŠè¡ãããäžæ£è¡çºã鲿¢ããããšãã§ããããªããçªæ¡ïŒïŒïŒãããåºãç¯å²ã§ãäŸãã°ã¬ãŒã«ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®å åŽçžã®å šåã«æ²¿ã£ãŠåœ¢æããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ãããããæ§æã«ããã°ãããåºãç¯å²ã§ééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ããã«ãããªããééããã£ã«ã çãå©çšããŠè¡ãããäžæ£è¡çºããã確å®ã«é²æ¢ããããšãã§ããã   Further, on the lower back side of the rail cover 140, a ridge 142 extending in an arc shape along the inner edge and protruding rearward is formed. The protrusion 142 is disposed so as to overlap the inner rail portion 51 in a state of entering the ball guide passage when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, for example, even if a wire or a film is intruded through a gap between the front door frame 13 and the main body frame 12 to carry out an illegal act, the wire or the film is intruded into a game area inside the ball guide passage. Becomes very difficult. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented. The protrusion 142 may be formed in a wider range, for example, along the entire area of the inner edge of the rail cover 140. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, or the like in a wider range, It is possible to more reliably prevent fraudulent acts that are performed using wires or films.
次ã«ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢ã®æ§æã説æããããªããå³ïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢å³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®è颿§æãäž»èŠéšåæ¯ã«åè§£ããŠç€ºãåè§£æèŠå³ã§ããã   Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 for each major part.
ãŸããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®è颿§æã«ã€ããŠå šäœã®æŠèŠã説æãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢åŽã«ã¯ãåçš®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒåçš®å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒãäžäžå·Šå³ã«äžŠã¹ãããããã«ããŠåã¯ååŸã«éããããããã«ããŠé 眮ããããšãšãã«ãéæçãäŸçµŠããããã®éæçäŸçµŠè£ çœ®ïŒæåºæ©æ§ïŒãæš¹è補ã®ä¿è·ã«ããŒçãåãä»ããããŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåçš®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ãïŒã€ã®åä»å°ã«åããŠæèŒããŠïŒã€ã®å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠããããæ§æãããããå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠããããåå¥ã«æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåã¯éæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«è£ çããããã«ããŠããããã®å Žåãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒäž»åºæ¿ïŒãšé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒãšãäžæ¹ã®åä»å°ã«æèŒããŠãŠãããåãããšå ±ã«ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒæåºå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒçºå°å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒåã³é»æºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒé»æºåºæ¿ïŒã仿¹ã®åä»å°ã«æèŒããŠãŠãããåããŠããã以äžã«ãããŠã¯ã䟿å®äžãåè ã®ãŠããããã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒããšç§°ããåŸè ã®ãŠããããã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒããšç§°ããããšãšããããŸããæåºæ©æ§åã³ä¿è·ã«ããŒãïŒãŠããããšããŠäžäœåãããäžè¬ã«æš¹èéšåãè£ããã¯ãšç§°ããããšããããããããã§ã¯ãã®ãŠãããããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒããšç§°ãããåãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®è©³çŽ°ãªæ§æã«ã€ããŠã¯åŸè¿°ããã   First, an overall outline of the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10, various control devices (various control boards) are arranged so as to be lined up and down, left and right, or overlapped in the front and rear, and a game ball supply device for supplying game balls (Discharge mechanism), a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, the various control devices are separately mounted on two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the main body frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main controller 271 (main board) and the audio lamp controller 272 (audio lamp control board) are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout controller 311 (payout control board) and launch control. The apparatus 312 (launch control board) and the power supply apparatus 313 (power supply board) are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the former unit is referred to as a âfirst control board unit 201â, and the latter unit is referred to as a âsecond control board unit 202â. Further, since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a âback pack unit 203â here. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later.
第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒåã³è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããŠãããåäœã§äœãå·¥å ·çãçšããã«çè±ã§ããããæ§æããããšãšãã«ãäžéšã«æ¯è»žéšãèšããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåã¯éæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«å¯ŸããŠå±éã§ããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããããã¯ãåãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒããã®ä»æ§æãååŸã«éããŠé 眮ãããå Žåã«é ããéšäœã容æã«ç¢ºèªããããšãå¯èœãšããããã®å·¥å€«ã§ããããå®éã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã®æŠç¥å³ã«ç€ºãããã«ãç¥ïŒ¬åç¶ããªã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®ã»ãŒäžå€®ã«é 眮ããããã®äžæ¹ã«ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãé 眮ãããŠããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«äžéšéè€ããé åã«ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãé 眮ãããŠããã   The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured to be detachable without using any tools or the like in units of units, and are provided with a support shaft part in a part to form the main body frame 12. Or it has the composition which can be developed to the back of game board 30. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden portion when the units 201 to 203 and other components are arranged one behind the other. Actually, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 11, the first control board unit 201 having a substantially L-shape is arranged at substantially the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 is arranged therebelow. Yes. Further, the back pack unit 203 is disposed in a region partially overlapping with the first control board unit 201.
第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢ããèŠãŠå·Šç«¯éšã«æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒãèšãããããã®æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãã軞ç·ïŒ¡ãäžå¿ã«ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãååå¯èœãšãªã£ãŠããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®å³ç«¯éšããªãã¡æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã®å察åŽãšãªãéæŸç«¯åŽã«ããã€ã©ããïŒç»é²åæšïŒçãããªãç· çµéšïŒïŒãèšãããããšå ±ã«äžç«¯éšã«ä¿æ¢çªéšïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããããç· çµéšïŒïŒåã³ä¿æ¢çªéšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒæ¬äœã®è£é¢ã«æ²¿ã£ãç¶æ ã«ä¿æãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢ããèŠãŠå³ç«¯éšã«æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒãèšãããããã®æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãã軞ç·ïŒ¢ãäžå¿ã«ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãååå¯èœãšãªã£ãŠããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®å·Šç«¯éšããªãã¡æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã®å察åŽãšãªãéæŸç«¯åŽã«ããã€ã©ããçãããªãç· çµéšïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®ç· çµéšïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒæ¬äœã®è£é¢ã«æ²¿ã£ãç¶æ ã«ä¿æãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã«ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢ããèŠãŠå³ç«¯éšã«æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒãèšãããããã®æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãã軞ç·ïŒ£ãäžå¿ã«è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãååå¯èœãšãªã£ãŠããããŸããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®å·Šç«¯éšããªãã¡æ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã®å察åŽãšãªãéæŸç«¯åŽã«ãã€ã©ããçãããªãç· çµéšïŒïŒãèšãããããšãšãã«ãäžç«¯éšåã³äžç«¯éšã«ããããåååŒã®ä¿æ¢éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããããç· çµéšïŒïŒåã³ä¿æ¢éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒæ¬äœã®è£é¢ã«æ²¿ã£ãç¶æ ã«ä¿æãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The first control board unit 201 is provided with a support shaft part M1 at the left end as viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the first control board unit 201 can be rotated around the axis A by the support shaft part M1. ing. Further, the first control board unit 201 is provided with a fastening portion M2 made of Nylatch (registered trademark) on the right end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M1, and at the upper end portion with a locking claw. A portion M3 is provided, and the first control board unit 201 is held along the back surface of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 by the fastening portion M2 and the locking claw portion M3. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a support shaft part M4 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 can be rotated around the axis B by the support shaft part M4. It has become. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a fastening portion M5 made of a ny latch or the like on the left end portion thereof, that is, the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M4, and the second control board unit 202 performs the second control. The substrate unit 202 is held in a state along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a support shaft portion M6 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 203 is rotatable about an axis C by the support shaft portion M6. . Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a fastening portion M7 made of a ny latch or the like on the left end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M6, and at the upper end portion and the lower end portion, respectively, a rotating engagement member. Stop portions M8 and M9 are provided, and the back pack unit 203 is held along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body by the fastening portions M7 and the locking portions M8 and M9.
åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒãååå¯èœã«æ¯æããæ¯è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ããéããç¶æ ã§å®¹æã«åãå€ãå¯èœãªãã³ãžæ§é ãšãªã£ãŠãããç°¡åã«èª¬æãããšã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠã¯ãç· çµéšïŒïŒã®ç· çµåã³ä¿æ¢çªéšïŒïŒã®ä¿æ¢ãè§£é€ãããšå ±ã«ãåœè©²ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã軞ç·ïŒ¡ãäžå¿ã«ååãããŠå±éãããã®ç¶æ ã§æã¡äžãããããã«ãããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒããªãåæã§ããã°ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšãã§ããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠã¯ãç· çµéšïŒïŒã®ç· çµãè§£é€ãããšå ±ã«ãåœè©²ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã軞ç·ïŒ¢ãäžå¿ã«ååãããŠå±éãããã®ç¶æ ã§æã¡äžãããããã«ããã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšãã§ãããããã«ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠã¯ãç· çµéšïŒïŒã®ç· çµåã³ä¿æ¢éšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿æ¢ãè§£é€ãããšå ±ã«ãåœè©²ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã軞ç·ïŒ£ãäžå¿ã«ååãããŠå±éãããã®ç¶æ ã§æã¡äžãããããã«ãããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšãã§ããã   The support shaft portions M1, M4, and M6 that rotatably support the units 201 to 203 have a hinge structure that can be easily removed while the units 201 to 203 are opened from the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Briefly, the first control board unit 201 is developed by releasing the fastening of the fastening part M2 and the locking claw part M3, rotating the unit 201 around the axis A, and expanding the unit 201. Lift in condition. Thereby, if there is no backpack unit 203, the first control board unit 201 can be removed. Further, with respect to the second control board unit 202, the fastening of the fastening portion M5 is released, the unit 202 is rotated about the axis B, is unfolded, and is lifted in that state. Thereby, the 2nd control board unit 202 can be removed. Further, with respect to the back pack unit 203, the fastening portion M7 is fastened and the locking portions M8 and M9 are unlocked, the unit 203 is rotated about the axis C, and is unfolded, and lifted in that state. Thereby, the back pack unit 203 can be removed.
ããã§ãåãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®å±éæ¹åã¯åäžã§ãªãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®èé¢ããèŠãŠå·Šéãã«ãªãã®ã«å¯Ÿãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒåã³è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåå³éãã«ãªãããæ§æãããŠããããã®å Žåã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«äžéšéè€ããŠèšãããããããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéããªãããšã«ã¯ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšãäžå¯èœã§ãããããã«èšããšã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒåã³è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåã éæ¹åã«å±éããæ§æã§ãããããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæå®è§åºŠä»¥äžã«å€§ããéããç¶æ åã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ããç¶æ ã§ãªããã°ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšãäžå¯èœã§ãããåŸã£ãŠã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšã«çç®ãããšãä»ã®ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ¯ã¹ãŠåãå€ããå°é£ãªæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããããã«ãæœé è£ çœ®ãããŒæäœããŠå€æ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãéæŸããªããã°ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéãããšãã§ããªãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããããããäžå±€ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®åãå€ããå°é£ãªãã®ãšãªã£ãŠãããããå ·äœçãªæ§æã«ã€ããŠã¯åŸè¿°ããã   Here, the unfolding directions of the units 201 to 203 are not the same, and the first control board unit 201 opens to the left when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit. 203 is configured to open to the right. In this case, since the first control board unit 201 is partially overlapped with the back pack unit 203, it is impossible to remove the first control board unit 201 without opening the back pack unit 203. Furthermore, since the first control board unit 201 and the back pack unit 203 are configured to expand in opposite directions, the back pack unit 203 must be opened largely beyond a predetermined angle or the unit 203 must be removed. For example, the first control board unit 201 cannot be removed. Accordingly, when attention is paid to removing the first control board unit 201, it is difficult to remove compared to the other units 202 and 203. Furthermore, since the back pack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation of the locking device, the first control board unit 201 is further removed. Has become difficult. A more specific configuration will be described later.
次ã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒåã³éæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢æ§æã説æããããªããå³ïŒïŒã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«éæç€ïŒïŒãçµã¿ä»ããç¶æ ã§ãã€åèšåãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒçãåãå€ããç¶æ ã®æ§æã瀺ãèé¢å³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãåŸæ¹ããèŠãæèŠå³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯éæç€ïŒïŒãåŸæ¹ããèŠãæèŠå³ã§ããã   Next, the back surface structure of the main body frame 12 and the game board 30 is demonstrated. 12 is a rear view showing the configuration of the state in which the game board 30 is assembled to the main body frame 12 and the units 201 to 203 are removed, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the main body frame 12 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the game board 30 as viewed from the rear.
éæç€ïŒïŒã¯ãæš¹èããŒã¹ïŒïŒã«å²ãŸããåè§æ ç¶ã®èšçœ®é åã«è£é¢åŽããèšçœ®ãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«èšããããè€æ°ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒã«æïŒã®ä¿æ¢åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠåŸæ¹ãžè±èœããªãããã«åºå®ãããŠãããä¿æ¢åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯æåã§ååæäœããããšãã§ããåºå®äœçœ®ïŒããã¯äœçœ®ïŒãšåºå®è§£é€äœçœ®ïŒã¢ã³ããã¯äœçœ®ïŒãšã«åãæããããšãã§ããããæ§æãããŠãããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã¯ç¶æ ã瀺ããå·Šå³ïŒã«æã®ä¿æ¢åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒã¯éå±çãæãæ²ã圢æããåã®éå ·ã§ãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®åºå®ç¶æ ã§æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å€æ¹ãžåŒµãåºããªãããæ§æãããŠããããªããäžéšïŒã«æã®ä¿æ¢åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒã¯åææš¹è補ã®ïŒ©åã®çãå ·ã§ããã   The game board 30 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 25 from the back side, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) of locking fixtures 211 and 212 provided on the main body frame 12. It is fixed so as not to fall backward. The locking fixtures 211 and 212 can be manually rotated, and can be switched between a fixed position (lock position) and a fixed release position (unlock position). FIG. 12 shows a locked state. The left and right three locking fixtures 211 are L-shaped fittings formed by bending metal pieces, and are configured not to protrude outward from the main body frame 12 when the game board 30 is fixed. Note that the locking fixture 212 at one lower portion is an I-shaped fastener made of synthetic resin.
éæç€ïŒïŒã®äžå€®ã«é 眮ãããå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒãèåŸããèŠãåææš¹è補ã®ãã¬ãŒã ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒãåŸæ¹ã«çªåºããŠèšããããŠããããã®ãã¬ãŒã ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒã®åŸç«¯ã«ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšããŠã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšãååŸã«éããããç¶æ ã§çè±å¯èœã«åãä»ããããŠããããã¬ãŒã ã«ããŒïŒïŒïŒå ã«ã¯ãã»ã³ã¿ãŒãã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒã«å èµãããçãé§åããããã®ïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãªã©ãé èšãããŠããã   The variable display unit 35 disposed in the center of the game board 30 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 43 (see FIG. 4) from the back. At the rear end, the first symbol display device 41 and the display control device 214 as display control means are detachably attached in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 43 are disposed.
éæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«ã¯ãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãåãå²ãããã«ããŠéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãèæ¿ç¶ã®æ äœãšããŠäŸãã°ïŒ¡ïŒ¢ïŒ³æš¹èçã®åææš¹èã«ããæåœ¢ãããããŒã¹ãæãããã®ããŒã¹é¢ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«åœæ¥ãããããã«ããŠåãä»ããããŠãããéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåçš®å ¥è³å£ã«å ¥è³ããéæçãååããããã®éæçååæ©æ§ããåçš®å ¥è³å£çãžã®éæçã®å ¥è³ãæ€ç¥ããããã®å ¥è³æ€ç¥æ©æ§ãªã©ãèšããããŠããã   A collective board unit 215 is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 35. The collective board unit 215 has a base formed of a synthetic resin such as an ABS resin as a thin plate-like frame body, and is attached so that the base surface is in contact with the back surface of the game board 30. The collective board unit 215 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls in various winning ports, and the like. .
éæçååæ©æ§ã«ã€ããŠèª¬æãããšãéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ãåèšäžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãäœåå£ïŒïŒã®éæç€éå£éšã«å¯Ÿå¿ãäžã€äžæµåŽã§ïŒã«æã«éåããååéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠããããŸããéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èçã®åææš¹èè£œã®æåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯æåºçãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå€éšã®äŸãã°éæããŒã«ã®å³¶èšåçãžæ¡å ããããã®æåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãå³ïŒïŒã«ä»®æ³ç·ã§äŸç€ºããããã«ãäžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒçã«å ¥è³ããéæçã¯äœããéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®ååéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠéåããããã«æåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒã®æåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå€éšã«æåºãããããªããã¢ãŠãå£ïŒïŒãåæ§ã«æåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã«éããŠãããäœãã®å ¥è³å£ã«ãå ¥è³ããªãã£ãéæçãæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒå€éšã«æåºããããäžèšæ§æã§ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯é¢ãå¢çã«ããŠãäžæ¹ã«éåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒïŒååéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒããäžæ¹ã«æåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒïŒæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠååŸæ¹åã«éè€ããŠããªããåŸã£ãŠãéæç€ïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒããåãå€ãéã«ãããŠãæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒãéæç€åãå€ãã®åŠšãã«ãªããšãã£ãäžéœåãçããããšããªãã   The game ball collecting mechanism will be described below. A collecting passage corresponding to the game board opening of the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33 and gathered at one place downstream of the collecting plate unit 215. 216 is formed. In addition, a discharge passage board 217 made of synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin is attached to the main body frame 12 below the game board 30, and the discharge ball is placed on the discharge passage board 217, for example, in a game hall outside the pachinko machine 10. A discharge passage 218 is formed to guide the island facility or the like. Accordingly, as illustrated in phantom lines in FIG. 12, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 31 and the like are gathered through the collection passage 216 of the gathering plate unit 215, and the discharge passage 218 of the discharge passage board 217 is further collected. Through the pachinko machine 10. Similarly, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage 218, and the game balls that have not won any prize opening are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 218. In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 30 as a boundary, the collective plate unit 215 (collection passage 216) is provided on the upper side, and the discharge passage board 217 (discharge passage 218) is provided on the lower side. There is no overlap in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 30. Therefore, when the game board 30 is removed from the main body frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 17 prevents the game board from being removed.
ãªããæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåé¢ã®äžç¿ïŒïŒã®è£åŽã«é 眮ãããŠãããäžç¿ïŒïŒã«è³ãçæåºå£ïŒå³ïŒã®çéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒïŒããééããã£ã«ã çãå·®ã蟌ã¿ãããã«ãã®ééããã£ã«ã çãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒãšã®ééãéããŠéæé ååŽã«äŸµå ¥ããããšãã£ãäžæ£è¡çºãèãããããããã§ãæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãçéè·¯æšïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšäœçœ®ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããé«ãäœçœ®ã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«éãªãåãããã«ããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåæ¹ã«å»¶ã³ããã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒãèšãããåŸã£ãŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãšæåºéè·¯ç€ïŒïŒïŒãšã®ééããééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããããšããŠãããããã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒã«ãŠé»å®³ãããéæé åã«ãŸã§ééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããããšãéåžžã«å°é£ãšãªãããã®çµæãééããã£ã«ã çãå©çšããŠå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã匷å¶çã«éæŸããçã®äžæ£è¡çºã鲿¢ããããšãã§ããã   The discharge passage board 217 is disposed on the back side of the upper plate 23 in front of the pachinko machine 10, and a wire, a film, or the like is inserted from a ball discharge port (ball passage rod 138 in FIG. 2) leading to the upper plate 23. An illegal act such as allowing the wire, film or the like to enter the game area through the gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217 can be considered. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 13, the discharge passage board 217 is placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 so as to overlap the main body frame 12 at a height position corresponding to the upper position of the ball passage rod 138. An extending plate 219 was provided. Therefore, even if it tries to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. from the clearance gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217, it will be obstructed by the plate 219, and it will be very difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. to a game area. Become. As a result, an illegal act such as forcibly opening the variable winning device 32 using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.
å ¥è³æ€ç¥æ©æ§ã«ã€ããŠèª¬æãããšãéåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒè¡šåŽã®äžè¬å ¥è³å£ïŒïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«å ¥è³å£ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«ç¹å®é åã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒåã³ã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããç¹å®é åã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ã倧åœããäžã«å¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒãžå ¥è³ããéæçãç¹å®é åã«å ¥ã£ãããšãå€å®ããã¹ã€ããã§ãããç¹å®é åãšã¯ã©ãŠã³ãã®æŽæ°å¯åŠãå€å®ããããã®é åã§ããããŸãŒã³ãšãç§°ãããŠãããã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ããéæçã®æ°ãã«ãŠã³ãããã¹ã€ããã§ããããŸããäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«ã¯äœåå£ïŒïŒãžã®éæçã®å ¥è³ãæ€ç¥ããäœåå£ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«ã¯ã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒã®éæçã®ééãæ€ç¥ããã²ãŒãã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããå ¥è³å£ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒåã³ã²ãŒãã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯é»æ°é ç·ãéããŠç€é¢äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããç¹å®é åã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒåã³ã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯å€§å ¥è³å£äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠããããããŠãç€é¢äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å€§å ¥è³å£äžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠãããäœåå£ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯äžç¶åºæ¿ãä»ããã«çŽæ¥äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠããããã®ä»å³ç€ºã¯çç¥ããããå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãå€§å ¥è³å£ã®ééæãéæŸããããã®å€§å ¥è³å£ãœã¬ãã€ããšãå ¥è³çãç¹å®é åããã®ä»ã®é åã«æ¯ãåããããã®æ¯åæ¿ãé§åããå ¥è³çæ¯åæ¿ãœã¬ãã€ããšãèšããããäœåå£ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãããã«ä»éããé»å圹ç©ãéæŸããããã®äœåå£ãœã¬ãã€ããèšããããŠããã   Explaining the winning detection mechanism, the collective board unit 215 is provided with a winning port switch 221 at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a specific area switch 222 and a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32. A count switch 223 is provided. The specific area switch 222 is a switch that determines that a game ball that has won the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot has entered a specific area. The specific area is an area for determining whether or not a round can be updated, and is also referred to as a V zone. The count switch 223 is a switch that counts the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32. In addition, an operation port switch 224 that detects a winning of a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided at a position corresponding to the operation port 33, and a passage of the game ball of the through gate 34 is detected at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A gate switch 225 is provided. The prize opening switch 221 and the gate switch 225 are connected to the board relay board 226 through electric wiring, and the specific area switch 222 and the count switch 223 are connected to the big prize opening relay board 227. The board surface relay board 226 and the special winning opening relay board 227 are connected to the main controller 271. The operation port switch 224 is directly connected to the main controller 271 without using a relay board. Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is driven with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the opening / closing door of the large winning opening and a distribution plate for distributing the winning balls to a specific area or other areas. A winning ball sorting plate solenoid is provided, and the operating port 33 is provided with an operating port solenoid for opening an electric accessory attached thereto.
äžèšå ¥è³æ€ç¥æ©æ§ã«ãŠåã æ€åºãããæ€åºçµæã¯äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«åã蟌ãŸãã該䞻å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãããã®éœåºŠã®å ¥è³ç¶æ³ã«å¿ããæåºæä»€ïŒéæçã®æåºåæ°ïŒãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éä¿¡ãããããããŠãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åºåã«ããæå®æ°ã®éæçã®æåºãå®è¡ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã§ãåŸæ¥ã®ãããã蚌æ çæ¹åŒã§ã¯ãåçš®å ¥è³å£ã«å ¥è³ããéæçãå ¥è³çåŠçè£ çœ®ã«äžæŠéãããã®å ¥è³çåŠçè£ çœ®ã§å ¥è³çã®ååšãïŒã€ãã€é çªã«ç¢ºèªããäžã§æåºãè¡ãããã«ããŠããããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãåçš®å ¥è³å£æ¯ã«éæçã®å ¥è³ã黿°çã«æ€ç¥ããŠæåºãçŽã¡ã«è¡ãããããã«ããŠãããããæãåºãéæçãå€éã«ãã£ãŠããã®æåºããã¡æ©ã宿œããããšãå¯èœãšãªããšãšãã«ãå ¥è³çåŠçè£ çœ®ãäžèŠãšãªãã   The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control device 271, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is sent from the main control device 271 to the payout control device 311. Sent. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control device 311. Here, in the conventional so-called evidence ball system, the game balls won in various winning openings are once collected in a winning ball processing device, and the winning ball processing device confirms the presence of the winning balls one by one and then pays out. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a lot of game balls are paid out because the winning of the game balls is electrically detected for each prize opening and the payout is immediately performed. In this case, the payout can be performed promptly, and a winning ball processing apparatus is not required.
éåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®å³äžéšã«ç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®å€åã忢ïŒç¢ºå®ïŒããæ¯ã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãšã倧åœããäžåã¯ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€åæéççž®äžã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãšã倧åœããäžã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãšãèšããããŠããããããŠããããã®åºå端åãéããŠãéæããŒã«åŽã®ç®¡çå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«å¯ŸããŠéæïŒéæç€ïŒïŒåŽã®ç¶æ ïŒã«é¢ããä¿¡å·ãåºåããããç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåãå€ã容æãªç¶æ ã§éåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããŠããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒè£åŽã®å·Šäžéšã«ã¯ãæçæ§çãåããã»ãããã³ãã«ïŒïŒïŒåã³çºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã   The collective board unit 215 is provided with a board external terminal board 230 at the upper right part thereof. The panel external terminal board 230 has an output terminal for outputting a signal every time the variation of the first symbol is stopped (determined), and an output terminal for outputting a signal during a big hit or during the reduction of the variation time of the first symbol. And an output terminal for outputting a signal during the jackpot. And, through these output terminals, a signal relating to the game (the state on the game board 30 side) is output to the management control device on the game hall side. The board external terminal board 230 is attached to the assembly board unit 215 in an easily removable state. As shown in FIG. 12, a set handle 228 and a firing motor 229 including a hitting ball basket are provided on the lower left side on the back side of the main body frame 12.
éåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããã®å仿©æ§ãèšããããŠãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ããã®å仿©æ§ãšããŠãéæç€ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ããèŠãŠå·Šäžé éšã«ã¯äžäžæ¹åã«å»¶ã³ã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒãèšãããããã®è»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯åäžè»žç·äžã«äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®è»žåãåïŒïŒïŒïœã圢æãããŠããããŸããéæç€ïŒïŒã«ãããŠã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã®å³æ¹ã«ã¯äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®è¢«ç· çµåïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ãã€ã©ããã®åä»åïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšãããã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ä¿æ¢çªçïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã   The assembly plate unit 215 is provided with an attachment mechanism for attaching the first control board unit 201. Specifically, as this mounting mechanism, a bearing bracket 231 extending in the vertical direction is provided in the lower left corner portion when viewed from the back surface of the game board 30, and the bearing bracket 231 has a pair of upper and lower bearing holes 231 a on the same axis. Is formed. In the game board 30, a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, a mounting hole for a ny latch) 232 is provided on the right side of the bearing fitting 231, and a locking claw piece 233 is provided above the bearing fitting 231. It has been.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«ã¯ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããã®å仿©æ§ãèšããããŠãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã®å³ç«¯éšã«é·å°ºç¶ã®è»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããã®è»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã¯è£åŒ·éšæãšããŠãæ©èœãããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã¯éæç€ïŒïŒãããäžæ¹ãžå»¶ã³ãé·å°ºæ¿ç¶ã®éå ·æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒãæãããã®éå ·æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒããåŸæ¹ãžèµ·ç«ãããããã«ããŠãäžéšïŒã«æã«ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®è»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒã圢æããããšå ±ã«ãäžéšïŒã«æã«è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®è»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããããã軞åãéšïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããããå軞ã®è»žåãåã圢æãããŠããããªãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®è»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒãšè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®è»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒãšãåã åå¥ã®è»žåãéå ·ã§æ§æããããšãå¯èœã§ããããã®ä»ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®å仿©æ§ãšããŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒèšçœ®é åãããäžæ¹å·Šç«¯éšã«äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®è¢«ç· çµåïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ããã€ã©ããã®åä»åïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããŸããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒçšã®å仿©æ§ãšããŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒèšçœ®é åã®å·Šç«¯éšã«äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®è¢«ç· çµåïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ããã€ã©ããã®åä»åïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«ãããŠéæç€ïŒïŒã®å·Šäžæ¹ãå³å¯ãäžæ¹åã³å³å¯ãäžæ¹ã®åäœçœ®ã«ã¯ãéæç€ïŒïŒãšã®éã«è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæã¿èŸŒãã§æ¯æããããã®åååŒã®åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãããããèšããããŠããããªããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®äžéšã«å€§éã®éæçã貯çããããšãããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšãæ¯æããããã®åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é¢ããŠã¯ç¹ã«ååãªåŒ·åºŠãæã€æ§æãšããã®ãæãŸãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯åååŒã®åºå®å ·ãçšããŠããã   An attachment mechanism for attaching the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit 203 is provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12. Specifically, a long bearing fitting 235 is attached to the right end of the main body frame 12. The bearing fitting 235 also functions as a reinforcing member. As shown in FIG. 15, the bearing fitting 235 has a long plate-like fitting main body 236 that extends downward from the game board 30, and is raised to the rear from the fitting main body 236 so as to be second in two places. Bearing portions 237 for the control board unit 202 are formed, and bearing portions 238 for the back pack unit 203 are formed at two upper portions. Coaxial bearing holes are formed in the bearing portions 237 and 238, respectively. Note that the bearing portion 237 for the second control board unit 202 and the bearing portion 238 for the back pack unit 203 may be configured by individual bearing fittings. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the second control board unit 202, the main body frame 12 has a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for a ny latch) 239 at the left end below the game board 30 installation area. Is provided. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the back pack unit 203, the main body frame 12 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for a ny latch) 240 at the left end of the game board 30 installation area. . Rotating fixtures 241, 242 for sandwiching and supporting the back pack unit 203 with the game board 30 at positions on the upper left, upper right and lower right of the game board 30 in the main body frame 12. 243 is provided. Since the back pack unit 203 stores a large amount of game balls in its upper part, the fixtures 241 and 242 for supporting the upper part of the back pack unit 203 should have a particularly strong strength. Desirably, a rotating fixture is used in the present embodiment.
äžèšã®åŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³äžåŽéšïŒå³ïŒïŒã§ã¯å³åŽéšïŒã«ã¯é·å°ºç¶ã®è»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããäžæ¹ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³ä»åŽéšïŒå³ïŒïŒã§ã¯å·ŠåŽéšïŒã«ã¯æœé è£ çœ®ãèšããããŠãããæœé è£ çœ®ã¯ãäžäžæ¹åã«å»¶ã³æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããåºæ ïŒïŒïŒãšããã®åºæ ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžäžæ¹åã«ç§»åå¯èœã«çµã¿ä»ããããé·å°ºç¶ã®é£åæïŒïŒïŒãšãåããåºæ ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšã«åèšã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒãäžäœåãããŠãããé£åæïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã®æäœã«ããäžäžããããã®æ¹åã«ç§»åãããé£åæïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãé€åœ¢ç¶ããªãäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®é€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã倿 ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãééããéã«ã¯ãé€éå ·ïŒïŒïŒã倿 ïŒïŒåŽã®æ¯æéå ·ïŒå³ç€ºç¥ïŒã«ä¿æ¢ãããæœé è£ çœ®ã«ããæœé ç¶æ ãšãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã®å Žåãã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã®æäœã«ãã£ãŠé£åæïŒïŒïŒãäžæ¹åã«ç§»åãããšã倿 ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®æœé ãè§£é€ããããéã«ãã·ãªã³ãé ïŒïŒã®æäœã«ãã£ãŠé£åæïŒïŒïŒãäžæ¹åã«ç§»åãããšãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããåææ ïŒïŒã®æœé ãè§£é€ãããã   As described above, a long bearing fitting 235 is provided on one of the left and right sides (the right side in FIG. 12) of the main body frame 12, while the left and right other sides (the left side in FIG. 12) of the main body frame 12 are locked. A device is provided. The locking device includes a base frame 247 that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the main body frame 12, and a long interlocking rod 248 that is assembled to the base frame 247 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated with the lower part of the cylinder. The interlocking rod 248 moves in either the up or down direction by operating the cylinder lock 91. The interlocking bar 248 is provided with a pair of upper and lower bar brackets 249 having a hook shape. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the bar bracket 249 is supported by a support bracket (on the outer frame 11 side). (Not shown) and locked by a locking device. In this case, when the interlocking rod 248 moves upward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the main body frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released. On the contrary, when the interlocking rod 248 moves downward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the front door frame 13 with respect to the main body frame 12 is released.
ãªããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®å·Šå³åŽéšã«è»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒãšæœé è£ çœ®ïŒåºæ ïŒïŒïŒãé£åæïŒïŒïŒçïŒãšãæ¯ãåããããäžèšæ§æã«ãããŠãããã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒåã³æœé è£ çœ®ïŒåºæ ïŒïŒïŒãé£åæïŒïŒïŒçïŒãé 眮ããããã®é åãæ®ããå¹ ãšãªãããã«ããŠãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åèšéæç€ïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããããã«ãã£ãŠãéæé åã®æ¡åŒµãå³ãããŠããããšã¯åè¿°ããéãã§ããã   In the above configuration in which the bearing bracket 235 and the locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are distributed to the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, these bearing bracket 235 and locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are arranged. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for placing a). As described above, the game area is also expanded by this.
æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®èé¢ã«ãããéæç€ïŒïŒã®å³äžéšã«ã¯ãåŸè¿°ããæåºæ©æ§ããæãåºãããéæçãäžç¿ïŒïŒãäžç¿ïŒïŒåã¯æåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã®äœããã«æ¯ãåããããã®éæçåé éšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããéæçåé éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå·ŠåŽã®éå£éšïŒïŒïŒïœãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒãä»ããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«éããäžå€®ã®éå£éšïŒïŒïŒïœãç¬¬ïŒæåºå£ïŒïŒãä»ããŠäžç¿ïŒïŒã«éããå³åŽã®éå£éšïŒïŒïŒïœãæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã«éããããã«ãåéè·¯ã圢æãããŠãããéæçåé éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠããžçã«ãã匷åºã«åãä»ããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãéæçåé éšïŒïŒïŒã®èšçœ®éšäœã«ãããæµ®ãäžããã鲿¢ãããééããééããã£ã«ã çãäŸµå ¥ãããããšã«ããäžæ£è¡çºã鲿¢ã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®äžç«¯éšã«ã¯ã奥å£ããã«ïŒïŒã®è£åŽã«èšçœ®ãããã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒã®èåŸãå²ãããã®åææš¹è補ã®ã¹ããŒã«ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠãããã¹ããŒã«ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã¹ããŒã«é³ãåŸæ¹ãžéããªãããã«æ©èœããããšã§äœé³åã®é³è³ªæ¹åãå³ãããŠããã   In the lower right portion of the game board 30 on the back surface of the main body frame 12, a game ball distribution unit 245 for distributing game balls paid out by a payout mechanism, which will be described later, to any of the upper plate 23, the lower plate 16 or the discharge passage 218 is provided. It has been. The game ball distribution unit 245 has a left opening 245a that communicates with the upper plate 23 through the first discharge port 66, and a central opening 245b that communicates with the lower plate 16 through the second discharge port 67, and the right opening. Each passage is formed so that the portion 245c communicates with the discharge passage 218. The game ball distribution unit 245 is firmly attached to the main body frame 12 with screws or the like. Therefore, the floating at the installation site of the game ball distributing unit 245 is prevented, and an illegal act caused by entering a wire, a film, or the like from the gap can be prevented. Note that a synthetic resin speaker box 246 is attached to the lower end portion of the main body frame 12 to surround the back of the speaker 20 installed on the back side of the back wall panel 17, and the speaker box 246 transmits the speaker sound to the rear. The sound quality in the low frequency range is improved by functioning so as not to miss.
次ã«ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æãå³ïŒïŒãå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ£é¢å³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æèŠå³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®åè§£æèŠå³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãè£é¢ããèŠãåè§£æèŠå³ã§ããã   Next, the configuration of the first control board unit 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 is a front view of the first control board unit 201, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the unit 201, FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201 viewed from the back. .
第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ç¥ïŒ¬åç¶ããªãåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒãæããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã«äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšãæèŒãããŠãããäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»ããå¶åŸ¡ãåžããéæããã°ã©ã ãèšæ¶ããïŒãéæã®é²è¡ã«å¿ããå¿ èŠãªããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããïŒãåçš®æ©åšãšã®é£çµ¡ããšãããŒããåçš®æœéžã®éã«çšããããä¹±æ°çºçåšãæéèšæ°ãåæãå³ãå Žåãªã©ã«äœ¿çšãããã¯ããã¯ãã«ã¹çºçåè·¯çãå«ãäž»åºæ¿ãå ·åããŠãããäž»åºæ¿ãéææš¹èææçãããªãè¢«å ææ®µãšããŠã®åºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«å容ãããŠæ§æãããŠããããªããåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¥çŽæ¹äœåœ¢ç¶ã®ããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ãšè©²ããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ã®éå£éšãèŠãããã¯ã¹ã«ããŒãšãåããŠããããããããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ãšããã¯ã¹ã«ããŒãšã¯å°å°ææ®µãšããŠã®å°å°ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠéå°äžèœã«é£çµãããããã«ããåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãå°å°ãããŠããã   The first control board unit 201 has a mounting base 251 having a substantially L shape, and the main control device 271 and the sound lamp control device 272 are mounted on the mounting base 251. The main control device 271 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port for communicating with various devices, and a random number used in various lotteries. A main substrate including a generator, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. is provided, and the main substrate is accommodated in a substrate box 273 as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. Configured. The substrate box 273 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing unit 274 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 273 is sealed.
å°å°ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ãšããã¯ã¹ã«ããŒãšãéå°äžèœã«é£çµããæ§æã§ããã°ä»»æã®æ§æãé©çšã§ããããããã§ã¯å³ïŒïŒçã«ç€ºãããã«ãïŒã€ã®å°å°éšæãé£çµãããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããããã®å°å°éšæã®é·åã«ä¿æ¢çªãæ¿å ¥ããããšã§ããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ãšããã¯ã¹ã«ããŒãšãéå°äžèœã«é£çµãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããå°å°ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ããå°å°åŠçã¯ããã®å°å°åŸã®äžæ£ãªéå°ã鲿¢ãããŸãäžäžäžæ£éå°ãè¡ãããŠããã®ãããªäºæ ãæ©æã«äžã€å®¹æã«çºèŠå¯èœãšãããã®ã§ãã£ãŠãäžæŠéå°ããåŸã§ãå床å°å°åŠçãè¡ãããšèªäœã¯å¯èœã§ãããããªãã¡ãå°å°ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ§æããïŒã€ã®å°å°éšæã®ãã¡ãå°ãªããšãäžã€ã®å°å°éšæã®é·åã«ä¿æ¢çªãæ¿å ¥ããããšã«ããå°å°åŠçãè¡ãããããããŠãå容ããäž»åºæ¿ã®äžå ·åçºçã®éãäž»åºæ¿ã®æ€æ»ã®éãªã©åºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãéå°ããå Žåã«ã¯ãä¿æ¢çªãæ¿å ¥ãããå°å°éšæãšä»ã®å°å°éšæãšã®é£çµãåæããããã®åŸãå床å°å°åŠçããå Žåã¯ä»ã®å°å°éšæã®é·åã«ä¿æ¢çªãæ¿å ¥ãããåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®éå°ãè¡ã£ãæšã®å±¥æŽãåœè©²åºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«æ®ããŠããã°ãåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãèŠãããšã§äžæ£ãªéå°ãè¡ãããæšã容æã«çºèŠã§ããã   As long as the sealing unit 274 is configured to connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be unsealed, any configuration can be applied. Here, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. Sealing processing by the sealing unit 274 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been performed. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit 274. When the substrate box 273 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main substrate or when the main substrate is inspected, the connection between the sealing member into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing member is disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the substrate box 273 is left in the substrate box 273, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 273.
é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã¯è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããã®æç€ºã«åŸãé³å£°ãã©ã³ã衚瀺ã®å¶åŸ¡ãåžããããã®ä»ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒãïŒãåçš®ããŒãçãå«ãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãå ·åããŠãããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãéææš¹èææçãããªãåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«å容ãããŠæ§æãããŠãããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒäžã«ã¯é»æºäžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãæèŒãããŠããã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®é»æºã黿ºäžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããããäŸçµŠãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããã€ãŸãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯åã ç¬ç«ããŠé»æºãäŸçµŠãããã   The sound lamp control device 272 includes, for example, a CPU for controlling sound and lamp display in accordance with instructions from the main control device 271 or the display control device 214, and a sound lamp control board including ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. The sound lamp control board is housed in a board box 275 made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board 276 is mounted on the sound lamp control device 272, and the power of the power supply device 313 is supplied to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272 via the power relay board 276, respectively. Yes. That is, power is independently supplied to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272.
åä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èçã®åææš¹è補ã§ãããäŸãã°ç·ãéçã«çè²ãããŠäžéæãšãããŠãããäœããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã¯ç¡è²éæåã¯åéæã§ãã£ãŠããããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®è¡šé¢ã«ã¯å¹³åŠç¶ããªãïŒã€ã®åºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯çžŠæšªã«çŽäº€ããåãã«å»¶ã³ãååŸæ¹åã«æ®µå·®ããã£ãŠåœ¢æãããŠãããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®äžçžéšåã³äžçžéšã«ã¯ãããããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒããèµ·ç«ããèµ·ç«éšïŒïŒïŒãäžäœæåœ¢ãããŠããããããŠã暪é·ã®åºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒäžã«äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãé 眮ããããšå ±ã«ã瞊é·ã®åºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒäžã«é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãé 眮ãããããã®ãšããäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžäžã®åŽéšãèµ·ç«éšïŒïŒïŒã«ãŠæ¯ããããããŸããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè€æ°ç®æã§ããžçã«ããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããã   The mounting base 251 is made of a synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin, and is colored opaque, for example, green or blue. However, the mounting base 251 may be colorless and transparent or translucent. Two flat substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are provided on the surface of the mounting base 251. These substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 extend in a direction orthogonal to the length and breadth, and are formed with a step in the front-rear direction. Standing portions 254 erected from the substrate mounting surface 252 are integrally formed on the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the substrate mounting surface 252, respectively. The main controller 271 is disposed on the horizontally long substrate mounting surface 252 and the sound lamp controller 272 is disposed on the vertically long substrate mounting surface 253. At this time, the upper and lower sides of main controller 271 are supported by upright portions 254. The sound lamp control device 172 is fixed to the board mounting surface 253 with screws or the like at a plurality of locations.
ããã§ãå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ïŒã«æã«æšªé·åœ¢ç¶ã®è²«éåïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããäžæ¹ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®è£é¢ã®å·Šå³ïŒã«æã«ååæäœåŒã®åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã«æèŒããéã«ã¯ãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®è²«éåïŒïŒïŒã«åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãæ¿éãããããã«äž»å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèŒçœ®ãããã®ç¶æ ã§åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãååæäœããããšã§äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãããã¯ããããåŸã£ãŠãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢åŽããåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãããã¯è§£é€ããªããã°åãå€ãã§ããªããããåºæ¿åãå€ãçã®äžæ£è¡çºã«å¯ŸããŠææ¢å¹æãåŸãããã   Here, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the substrate mounting surface 252 is formed with horizontally elongated through holes 256 at two positions on the left and right. On the other hand, the substrate box 273 of the main control device 271 is provided with rotationally operable fixtures 277 at two places on the left and right sides of the back surface thereof. When the main controller 271 is mounted on the board mounting surface 252, the main control board 271 is placed so that the fixing tool 277 is inserted into the through hole 256 of the board mounting surface 252, and the fixing tool 277 is placed in this state. The main control device 271 is locked by the turning operation. Accordingly, since the main control device 271 cannot be removed unless the lock 277 is unlocked from the back side of the first control board unit 201, a deterrent effect such as board removal can be obtained.
ãŸããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäž»åºæ¿çšã®åºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢ç©ºéã«éããéå£ãé®èœããããã®é®èœéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«æãªã©ãå·®ãå ¥ããããšã黿¢ãããåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ç¶æ ãäžæ£ã«è§£é€ããããšãã§ããªãããã«ãªã£ãŠããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒè£é¢ã«æèŒããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãåœè©²ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ããèŠãããããããã¯ãåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«æãªã©ãå·®ãå ¥ããããšã黿¢ãããåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ç¶æ ãäžæ£ã«è§£é€ããããšãã§ããªãããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In addition, in the mounting base 251, a shielding portion 257 for shielding an opening leading to the back space of the substrate mounting surface 252 is provided below the substrate mounting surface 252 for the main substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a hand or the like from being inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251 from below the substrate mounting surface 252 so that the locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the upper portion of the unit 201 is covered with the back pack unit 203, so that it is also prevented that a hand or the like is inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251. The locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released.
åè¿°ããéãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæå®è§åºŠä»¥äžã«å€§ããéããç¶æ åã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ããç¶æ ã§ãªããã°åãå€ãããšãäžå¯èœã§ããããŸããæœé è£ çœ®ãæ£ããããŒæäœããŠå€æ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãéæŸããªããã°ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéãããšãã§ããªãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããã€ãŸããæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãéãããšãã§ããªããã°ãçµæçã«ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãååããããåãå€ãããšãã§ãããã²ããŠã¯äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åãå€ããäžå¯èœãšãªããããæ ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ£ãªèŒãæ¿ããçé£çã广çã«é²æ¢ããããšãã§ããã   As described above, the first control board unit 201 cannot be removed unless the back pack unit 203 is opened at a predetermined angle or larger, or the unit 203 is not removed. The backpack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation. That is, if the main body frame 12 cannot be opened, the first control board unit 201 cannot be rotated or removed as a result, and the main controller 271 cannot be removed. Therefore, unauthorized replacement or theft of the main controller 271 can be effectively prevented.
äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒè£é¢ããèŠãŠæååŽã«é 眮ãããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®å¥¥åŽã«é 眮ãããããã®å Žåãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãååŸæ¹åã«æ®µå·®ããã£ãŠåœ¢æãããŠããããããããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæèŒããç¶æ ã«ãããŠåå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®äžéšãååŸã«éããŠé 眮ããããã€ãŸããå³ïŒïŒçã«ãèŠãããããã«ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®äžéšïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒçšåºŠïŒãæµ®ããç¶æ ã§é 眮ããããæ ã«ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éãªãé åãŸã§é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæ¡åŒµããããšãå¯èœãšãªãããŸãå¥ã®èŠæ¹ãããã°é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éãªãé åãŸã§äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæ¡åŒµããããšãå¯èœãšãªããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒãšããéããã倧ããã®äžã«ãã£ãŠããåå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å€§ååã«è¯å¥œã«å¯ŸåŠã§ãããšãšãã«ãåå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãå¹çè¯ãèšçœ®ã§ããããŸãã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«è£ çããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®åŸæ¹ã«ã¹ããŒã¹ã確ä¿ãããå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒããã®é»æ°é ç·çãç¡çãªãèšçœ®ã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã®è£é¢ã«ã¯æ Œåç¶ã®ãªãïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããäž»å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã®æ¯æåŒ·åºŠãé«ããããŠããã   The main control device 271 is arranged on the front side when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the sound lamp control device 272 is arranged on the back side. In this case, since the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are formed with steps in the front-rear direction, the control devices 271 and 272 are mounted in a state where the main controller 271 and the sound lamp controller 272 are mounted on the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253. Are arranged with part of them stacked one after the other. That is, as can be seen in FIG. 17 and the like, the main controller 271 is arranged in a state where a part thereof (about 1/3 in this embodiment) is floated. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 272 can be extended to a region overlapping the main control device 271. From another viewpoint, the main control device 271 can be extended to a region overlapping the voice lamp control device 272. Even within the limited size of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to satisfactorily cope with the increase in size of the control boards 271 and 272, and the control devices 271 and 272 can be installed efficiently. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30, a space is secured behind the board mounting surface 252 so that the variable winning device 32 and its electric wiring can be installed without difficulty. Note that lattice-like ribs 258 are provided on the back surface of the substrate mounting surface 252 to enhance the support strength of the main control substrate 271.
åä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®å·Šç«¯é¢ã«ã¯äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã®ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšè»žåãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããšã§ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠååå¯èœã«çæã¡æ¯æããããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®å³ç«¯éšã«ã¯åèšè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã蟌ãŸããç· çµå ·ãšããŠäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®äžç«¯éšã«ã¯åèšä¿æ¢çªçïŒïŒïŒãä¿æ¢ãããé·åïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠããã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã蟌ããšå ±ã«ãé·åïŒïŒïŒã«ä¿æ¢çªçïŒïŒïŒãä¿æ¢ãããããšã§ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãéæç€ïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããããªãã軞åãéå ·ïŒïŒïŒåã³ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšæ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒåã³ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãåèšç· çµéšïŒïŒã«ãä¿æ¢çªçïŒïŒïŒåã³é·åïŒïŒïŒãåèšä¿æ¢çªéšïŒïŒã«ãããããçžåœããã   A pair of upper and lower retaining pins 261 are provided on the left end surface of the mounting base 251, and the first control board unit 201 is rotated with respect to the game board 30 by attaching the retaining pins 261 to the bearing fitting 231. Cantilevered so that it can move. A pair of upper and lower nai latches 262 are provided at the right end of the mounting base 251 as fasteners to be fitted into the fastening holes 232. A long hole 263 in which the locking claw piece 233 is locked is provided at the upper end of the mounting base 251. Therefore, the first control board unit 201 is fixed to the game board 30 by fitting the nai latch 262 into the fastening hole 232 and locking the locking claw piece 233 in the long hole 263. It should be noted that the bearing fitting 231 and the latch pin 261 are in the support shaft portion M1, the fastening hole 232 and the ny latch 262 are in the fastening portion M2, and the locking claw piece 233 and the long hole 263 are in the locking claw portion M3. Each corresponds.
次ã«ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æãå³ïŒïŒãå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ£é¢å³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æèŠå³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯åãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®åè§£æèŠå³ã§ããã   Next, the configuration of the second control board unit 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front view of the second control board unit 202, FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the unit 202, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 202.
第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯æšªé·åœ¢ç¶ããªãåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒãæããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã«æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³ã«ãŒããŠãããæ¥ç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãæèŒãããŠãããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³çºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯å¶åŸ¡ã®äžæ¢ããªããããã®ä»ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒãïŒãåçš®ããŒãçãå«ãå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãå ·åããŠãããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ã«ãããè³åçã貞åºçã®æåºãå¶åŸ¡ããããçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®çºå°å¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ã«ãããéæè ã«ããéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã®æäœã«åŸãçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ãè¡ãããããŸãã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®é»æºåºæ¿ã«ãããåçš®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮çã§èŠããæå®ã®é»æºé»å§ãçæããåºåããããã«ãŒããŠãããæ¥ç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©åé¢ã®è²žçæäœéšïŒïŒïŒåã³å³ç€ºããªãã«ãŒããŠãããã«é»æ°çã«æ¥ç¶ãããäž»ãšããŠéæè ã«ããç貞ãæäœã®æä»€ãåã蟌ãã§ãããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«åºåãããã®ã§ããããªããã«ãŒããŠããããä»ããã«ç貞ãè£ çœ®çããäžç¿ã«éæçãçŽæ¥è²žãåºãããçŸéæ©ã§ã¯ãã«ãŒããŠãããæ¥ç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯äžèŠã§ããã   The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base 301 on which a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board 314 are mounted. The payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312 are provided with a control board including a central control CPU, ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. The payout control board of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch motor 229 in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player. In addition, a predetermined power supply voltage required by various control devices or the like is generated and output by the power supply board of the power supply device 313. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown). It is. Note that the card unit connection board 314 is not necessary in a cash machine in which game balls are rented directly from the ball lending device or the like to the upper plate without using a card unit.
äžèšæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³ã«ãŒããŠãããæ¥ç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãéææš¹èææçãããªãåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ããããå容ãããŠæ§æãããŠãããç¹ã«ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ãè¢«å ææ®µãæ§æããåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãããã¯ã¹ããŒã¹ãšããã¯ã¹ã«ããŒãšãåããããããå°å°ææ®µãšããŠã®å°å°ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠéå°äžèœã«é£çµãããããã«ããåºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãå°å°ãããŠãããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¶æ 埩垰ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããäŸãã°ãåŸè¿°ããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ã®çè©°ãŸãçãæåºãšã©ãŒã®çºçæã«ãããŠç¶æ 埩垰ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒäžããããšãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ãæ£éå転ãããçè©°ãŸãã®è§£æ¶ïŒæ£åžžç¶æ ãžã®åŸ©åž°ïŒãå³ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã¯åçš®ããŒã¿ã®ããã¯ã¢ããæ©èœãæããŠãããäžäžåé»ãçºçããéã§ãå黿ã®ç¶æ ãä¿æããåé»ããã®åŸ©åž°ïŒåŸ©é»ïŒã®éã«ã¯å黿ã®ç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããåŸã£ãŠãäŸãã°éæããŒã«ã®å¶æ¥çµäºã®å Žåã®ããã«éåžžæé ã§é»æºã鮿ãããšé®æåã®ç¶æ ãèšæ¶ä¿æãããããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒããªãã黿ºãæå ¥ãããšãïŒããŒã¿ãåæåãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection substrate 314 are respectively configured to be accommodated in substrate boxes 315, 316, 317, and 318 made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, as with the main control device 271, the substrate box 315 constituting the enclosing means includes a box base and a box cover, and these are connected so as not to be opened by a sealing unit 319 as a sealing means, As a result, the substrate box 315 is sealed. The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of a payout motor, which will be described later, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). It has become. The power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutdown is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323, the RAM data is initialized. It is like that.
åä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã¯äŸãã°ç¡è²éæãªæš¹èæååãããªãããã®è¡šé¢ã«å¹³åŠç¶ããªãåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåºæ¿æèŒé¢ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³ã«ãŒããŠãããæ¥ç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã暪䞊ã³ãšãªã£ãç¶æ ã§æèŒãããããžçã§åºå®ãããŠããã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åºæ¿ããã¯ã¹ïŒïŒïŒäžã«ã¯ç¥å¹³æ¿ç¶ã®å°åº§ãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒãèŒçœ®ããããšãšãã«å°åº§ãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒäžã«æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæèŒãããããžçã§åºå®ãããŠãããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšé»æºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšã®éã«ã¯å°åº§ãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒãä»åšãããããäŸãã°ãã€ãºé€å»çšã®éå±ãã¬ãŒãçãèšçœ®ããã«ã¯å°åº§ãã¬ãŒãïŒïŒïŒã«éå±ãã¬ãŒãçãåãä»ããã°è¯ãããã€ãºå¯Ÿçãç°¡åã«å®çŸã§ããã   The mounting base 301 is made of, for example, a colorless and transparent resin molded product, and a flat board mounting surface 302 is provided on the surface thereof. On the board mounting surface 302, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted side by side and fixed with screws or the like. A substantially flat pedestal plate 303 is placed on the substrate box 317 of the power supply device 313, and a payout control device 311 is mounted on the pedestal plate 303 and fixed with screws or the like. Since the pedestal plate 303 is interposed between the payout control device 311 and the power supply device 313, for example, in order to install a metal plate for noise removal, the metal plate or the like may be attached to the pedestal plate 303, and noise countermeasures are simple. Can be realized.
åä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ããã¿ãŠå³ç«¯éšã«äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšè»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒã«äžæ¹ããæ¿éãããããšã§ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠååå¯èœã«çæã¡æ¯æããããåä»å°ïŒïŒïŒã®å·Šç«¯éšã«ã¯ç· çµå ·ãšããŠäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãåèšè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã蟌ãããšã§ã第ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããããªãã軞åãéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšæ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒåã³ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãåèšç· çµéšïŒïŒã«ãããããçžåœããã   The mounting base 301 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins 305 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit is inserted into the bearing 237 from above by inserting the latching pins 305 from above. 202 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body frame 12. A pair of upper and lower nail latches 306 are provided as fasteners at the left end of the mounting base 301, and the second control board unit 202 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by fitting the nail latch 306 into the tightened hole 239. The bearing portion 237 and the latch pin 305 correspond to the support shaft portion M4, and the fastened hole 239 and the ny latch 306 correspond to the fastening portion M5, respectively.
次ã«ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æãå³ïŒïŒãå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®æ£é¢å³ãå³ïŒïŒã¯è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã®åè§£æèŠå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ã®åè§£æèŠå³ã§ããã   Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the back pack unit 203, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 203. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail.
è£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒãšéæçã®æåºæ©æ§éšïŒïŒïŒãšãäžäœåãããããšã«ããæ§æãããŠãããè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯äŸãã°ïŒ¡ïŒ¢ïŒ³æš¹èçã®åææš¹èã«ããäžäœæåãããŠãããç¥å¹³åŠç¶ã®ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒïŒãšãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ã«çªåºã暪é·ã®ç¥çŽæ¹äœåœ¢ç¶ããªãä¿è·ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïŒãšãæãããä¿è·ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïŒã¯å·Šå³åŽé¢åã³äžé¢ãééããäžã€äžé¢ã®ã¿ãéæŸããã圢ç¶ããªããå°ãªããšãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒãå²ãã®ã«ååãªå€§ãããæãããäœããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåè¿°ã®é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã䜵ããŠå²ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããä¿è·ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïŒã®èé¢ã«ã¯å€æ°ã®éæ°åïŒïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠãããéæ°åïŒïŒïŒïœã¯åã ãé·åç¶ããªããããããã®éæ°åïŒïŒïŒïœãæ¯èŒçè¿ãäœçœ®ã§é£ãåãããèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãé£ãåãéæ°åïŒïŒïŒïœéã«ããæš¹èéšåãåæããããšã«ãããè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®èé¢ã容æã«éå£ãããããšãã§ãããã€ãŸããéæ°åïŒïŒïŒïœéã®æš¹èéšåãåæããŠãã®å éšã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒçãé²åºãããããšã§ãæå®ã®æ€å®çã容æã«å®æœããããšãã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The back pack unit 203 is configured by integrating a back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, a synthetic resin such as ABS resin, and includes a substantially flat base portion 353 and a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 35. However, in this embodiment, the above-described sound lamp control device 272 is also enclosed. A large number of ventilation holes 354 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 354. The vent holes 354a are each formed in a long hole shape, and are provided so that the respective vent holes 354a are adjacent to each other at relatively close positions. Therefore, the back surface of the back pack 351 can be easily opened by cutting the resin portion between the adjacent vent holes 354a. That is, a predetermined test or the like can be easily performed by cutting the resin portion between the air holes 354a and exposing the display control device 214 and the like inside the resin portion.
è£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®ããŒã¹éšïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãä¿è·ã«ããŒéšïŒïŒïŒãè¿åããããã«ããŠæåºæ©æ§éšïŒïŒïŒãé
èšãããŠãããããªãã¡ãè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®æäžéšã«ã¯äžæ¹ã«éå£ããã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯éæããŒã«ã®å³¶èšåããäŸçµŠãããéæçã鿬¡è£çµŠããããã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæ¹ã«ã¯ãäŸãã°æšªæ¹åïŒåïŒïŒæ¡ïŒã®çéè·¯ãæãäžæµåŽã«åããŠç·©ããã«åŸæããã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãé£çµãããã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæµåŽã«ã¯äžäžæ¹åã«å»¶ã³ãã±ãŒã¹ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãé£çµãããŠãããæåºè£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã±ãŒã¹ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã®æäžæµéšã«èšããããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ã«ããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠå¿
èŠåæ°ã®éæçã®æåºãé©å®è¡ããããæåºè£
眮ïŒïŒïŒããæãåºãããéæçã¯æåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒçãéããŠåèšäžç¿ïŒïŒçã«äŸçµŠãããããªããå³ç€ºã¯çç¥ããããã±ãŒã¹ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã®äžæµéšã«ã¯ãã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒãã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒããäŸçµŠãããéæçã®æç¡ãæ€åºããã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãã»ã³ãµãèšããããŠããããŸããæåºè£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ€åºããæåºå転ã»ã³ãµãšãæãåºãããéæçæ°ãã«ãŠã³ãããæåºã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ãããšãèšããããŠããã
ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåœè©²ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¯åãä»å ããããã®ãã€ãã¬ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããããã€ãã¬ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã€ãã¢ãŒã¿ãšãã®ãã€ãã¢ãŒã¿ãå容ããåææš¹è補ã®ã±ãŒã¹ãšã«ãããŠãããåãããŠãããïŒæ¬ã®èéšïŒïŒïŒïœã§ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãä»®ã«ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒä»è¿ã§çè©°ãŸããçããéããã€ãã¬ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒãé§åãããããšã§çè©°ãŸããè§£æ¶ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã
A payout mechanism portion 352 is disposed on the base portion 353 of the back pack 351 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 351, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows (two rows) of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and the tank rail 356 extends in the vertical direction on the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected. The payout device 358 is provided in the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the payout motor 358a is driven by the control of the payout control device 311 so that a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 23 and the like through the payout passage 359 and the like. Although not shown in the figure, a tank ball absence sensor that detects the presence or absence of a game ball supplied from the tank 355 or the tank rail 356 is provided upstream of the case rail 357. The payout device 358 is provided with a payout rotation sensor that detects the rotation of the payout motor 358a and a payout count switch that counts the number of game balls to be paid out.
A vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 is attached to the tank rail 356. Vibrator 360 is unitized by a vibrator motor and a synthetic resin case that accommodates the vibrator motor, and is attached to tank rail 356 by two legs 360a. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball clogging.
ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã€ããŠè©³è¿°ãããšãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯äžæ¹ã«éå£ããé·å°ºæšç¶ããªãã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒã®äžæµéšã«ã¯çé¢ç¶ã®çåéšïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããçåéšïŒïŒïŒã«ããã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒããèœäžããŠããéæçãåæ»ã«ã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒå ã«åã蟌ãŸããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯é·ææ¹åã«å»¶ã³ãä»åå£ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããä»åå£ïŒïŒïŒã«ããéæçãäºæã«åæµãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããä»åå£ïŒïŒïŒã«ããä»åãããïŒæ¡ã®çéè·¯ã¯éæçã®çŽåŸãããå ãã«å¹ åºãšãªã£ãŠãããä»åå£ïŒïŒïŒã«ããä»åãããåçéè·¯ã®åºé¢ã«ã¯ãïŒçåã¯ïŒçã®çªæ¡ïŒïŒïŒãèšãããããšå ±ã«ããã®çªæ¡ïŒïŒïŒã®åŽæ¹ã«å¡µåãèœäžãããããã®éå£éšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®äžæµåŽååçšåºŠã®å€©äºéšåãèŠãããã«ããŠæŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãé èšãããŠãããæŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžæµåŽã»ã©ã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒå ã®çéè·¯é«ããå¶éããããåŒãªãã«åã£ã圢ç¶ãããŠããããã®äžé¢ã«ã¯é·ææ¹åã«å»¶ã³ãåžéšïŒïŒïŒã圢æãããŠãããããã«ãããã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒå ãæµããåéæçã¯æçµçã«ã¯äžäžã«ç©ã¿éãªãããšãªãäžæµåŽã«æµåºãããåŸã£ãŠãã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã«å€éã®éæçãæµã蟌ãã§ããŠããéæçã®åã¿èŸŒã¿ã鲿¢ãããã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒå ã«ãããçè©°ãŸããçºçãé£ããªã£ãŠããããªããã¬ãŒã«æ¬äœïŒïŒïŒã垯é»é²æ¢ã®ããã«é»è²ã®å°é»æ§ããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èã«ããæåœ¢ãããã®ã«å¯ŸããæŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯çè©°ãŸãçãç®èŠã§ç¢ºèªã§ããããã«éæã®ããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èã«ããæåœ¢ãããŠãããæŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯çè±å¯èœã«èšããããŠãããåœè©²æŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãåãå€ãããšã«ããã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ã¡ã³ããã³ã¹ã容æã«å®æœã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæŽæµæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãéæçã®æµäžã黿¢ããããã®æååŒã®ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããŠããã   The configuration of the tank rail 356 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 25, the tank rail 356 has a rail body 361 having a long bowl shape opened upward. A spherical ball receiving portion 362 is formed in the upstream portion of the rail main body 361 so that the game ball dropped from the tank 355 by the ball receiving portion 362 is smoothly taken into the rail main body 361. The rail body 361 is provided with a partition wall 363 extending in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls are divided into two hands by the partition wall 363. The two ball passages partitioned by the partition wall 363 are slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. On the bottom surface of each spherical passage partitioned by the partition wall 363, one or two ridges 364 are provided, and an opening 365 for dropping dust is provided on the side of the ridge 364. Yes. The rail body 361 is provided with a rectifying plate 367 so as to cover the ceiling portion of the downstream half. The rectifying plate 367 has a bow shape so as to limit the height of the ball passage in the tank rail 356 toward the downstream side, and a convex portion 368 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed on the lower surface thereof. Thereby, each game ball flowing in the tank rail 356 finally flows out downstream without being stacked up and down. Therefore, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the tank rail 356, the game balls are prevented from being bitten and the ball clogging in the tank rail 356 is difficult to occur. The rail main body 361 is formed of a black conductive polycarbonate resin to prevent electrification, while the rectifying plate 367 is formed of a transparent polycarbonate resin so that a clogging of a ball can be visually confirmed. The rectifying plate 367 is detachably provided. By removing the rectifying plate 367, maintenance in the tank rail 356 can be easily performed. A manual stopper 369 for preventing the game ball from flowing down is attached to the current plate 367.
å³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒã®èª¬æã«æ»ããæåºæ©æ§éšïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããæåºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®æåºæä»€ã®ä¿¡å·ãäžç¶ããæåºäžç¶åºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšçœ®ããããšå ±ã«ãå€éšããäž»é»æºãåã蟌ãããã®é»æºã¹ã€ããåºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšçœ®ãããŠããã黿ºã¹ã€ããåºæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãé»å§å€æåšãä»ããŠäŸãã°äº€æµïŒïŒãã«ãã®äž»é»æºãäŸçµŠããã黿ºã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¿æäœã«ãã黿ºïŒ¯ïŒ®åã¯é»æºïŒ¯ïŒŠïŒŠãšãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   Returning to the description of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 and takes in the main power from the outside. A power switch board 382 is installed. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24 volt main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.
ã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒããæåºéè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã«è³ããŸã§ã®æåºæ©æ§éšïŒïŒïŒã¯äœããå°é»æ§ãæããåææš¹èææãäŸãã°å°é»æ§ããªã«ãŒãããŒãæš¹èã«ãŠæåœ¢ããããã®äžéšã«ãŠã¢ãŒã¹ãããŠãããããã«ãããéæçã®åž¯é»ã«ãããã€ãºã®çºçãæå¶ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The discharge mechanism 352 from the tank 355 to the discharge passage 359 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin material such as a conductive polycarbonate resin, and is grounded at a part thereof. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the noise by charging of a game ball is suppressed.
è£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ããã®å³äžéšã«æ çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããæ çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã¿ã³ã¯ïŒïŒïŒãã¿ã³ã¯ã¬ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã§éæçãäžè¶³ããå Žåã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãæå®åæ°ã®è³çãæãåºãæ¯ã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãæå®åæ°ã®éæçã貞ãåºãæ¯ã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®éæŸæã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãåã³åææ ïŒïŒã®éæŸæã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åãèšããããŠããããããŠããããã®åºå端åãéããŠãéæããŒã«åŽã®ç®¡çå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«å¯ŸããŠæ åŽã®ç¶æ ã«é¢ããä¿¡å·ãåºåãããããªããæå®åæ°ã®éæçã貞ãåºãæ¯ã«ä¿¡å·åºåããããã®åºå端åã¯ããããçŸéæ©ã«ãããŠã¯äžèŠã§ããã   The back pack 351 is provided with a frame external terminal plate 390 on the upper right portion thereof. The frame external terminal plate 390 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 355 or the tank rail 356, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a number of game balls are lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body frame 12 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 13 is opened are provided. . And the signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.
è£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæ çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã«é£æ¥ããŠç¥åè§åœ¢ç¶ã®çªéšïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããåŸã£ãŠãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åãä»ããç¶æ ã§ã¯ãçªéšïŒïŒïŒãéããŠéæç€ïŒïŒè£é¢ã®ç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãé²åºããè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãè£ çãããŸãŸã§ç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã®æäœãè¡ãããšãã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããåè¿°ã®ãšãããç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯åãå€ã容æãªç¶æ ã§éåæ¿ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«åãä»ããããŠããããšãããç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒã®é ç·ãæ¥ç¶ãããŸãŸã§ãçªéšïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠåœè©²ç€çšå€éšç«¯åæ¿ïŒïŒïŒãåãåºãããšãå¯èœãšãªããè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã®å³äžéšã«ã¯æ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®éæŸã®ç¶æ ãæ€åºããããã®æ¬äœæ éæŸã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããã倿 ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã¯åœè©²ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®é屿¥ç¹ãéããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®ééãæ€ç¥ããã倿 ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§ã¯é屿¥ç¹ãéããŠæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã®éæŸãæ€ç¥ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The back pack 351 is provided with a substantially rectangular window 391 adjacent to the frame external terminal plate 390. Therefore, in a state where the back pack unit 103 is attached to the main body frame 12, the board external terminal plate 230 on the back side of the game board 30 is exposed through the window portion 391, and the board external terminal plate 230 remains attached with the back pack unit 103 attached. Can be operated. As described above, since the board external terminal plate 230 is attached to the collective board unit 215 in an easily removable state, the board external terminal board 230 is connected to the board via the window portion 391 while being connected. The external terminal plate 230 can be taken out. A main body frame opening switch 392 for detecting the open state of the main body frame 12 is provided at the upper right portion of the back pack 351. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal of the switch 392 is provided. The contact is closed and the closing of the main body frame 12 is detected. When the main body frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11, the metal contact is opened and the opening of the main body frame 12 is detected.
è£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒåŸæ¹ããã¿ãŠå³ç«¯éšã«äžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠãããææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšè»žåãéšïŒïŒïŒã«äžæ¹ããæ¿éãããããšã§ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠååå¯èœã«çæã¡æ¯æããããè£ããã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã巊端éšã«ç· çµå ·ãšããŠäžäžäžå¯Ÿã®ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãèšãããããšå ±ã«ãäžç«¯éšã«ä¿æ¢åïŒïŒïŒãèšããããŠããããã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãåèšè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã蟌ããšå ±ã«ãä¿æ¢åïŒïŒïŒã«åèšåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãæ¿å ¥ããäžã§åœè©²åºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãååæäœããããšã§ãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããããŸããåèšåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãã£ãŠãè£ããã¯ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒãæ¬äœæ ïŒïŒã«åºå®ãããããªãã軞åãéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ææ¢ãã³ïŒïŒïŒãåèšæ¯è»žéšïŒïŒã«ãè¢«ç· çµåïŒïŒïŒåã³ãã€ã©ããïŒïŒïŒãåèšç· çµéšïŒïŒã«ãåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒåã³ä¿æ¢åïŒïŒïŒãåèšä¿æ¢éšïŒïŒã«ãããããçžåœããããŸããåºå®å ·ïŒïŒïŒãåèšä¿æ¢éšïŒïŒã«çžåœããã   The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 385 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the latch pins 385 into the bearing portion 238 from above, the back pack unit 203 is mounted. The body frame 12 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable. The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 386 as fasteners at the left end portion, and is provided with a locking hole 387 at the upper end portion. The nai latch 386 is fitted into the tightened hole 240 and the locking hole. The back pack unit 203 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by rotating the fixing tool 242 after inserting the fixing tool 242 into 387. Further, the back pack unit 203 is also fixed to the main body frame 12 by the fixing tools 241 and 243. The bearing portion 238 and the latch pin 385 correspond to the support shaft portion M6, the fastened hole 240 and the ny latch 386 correspond to the fastening portion M7, and the fixture 242 and the locking hole 387 correspond to the locking portion M8, respectively. To do. Further, the fixture 243 corresponds to the locking portion M9.
次ã«ãæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æ°çæ§æã«ã€ããŠãå³ïŒïŒã®ãããã¯å³ã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æããã   Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.
äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãæŒç®è£ 眮ã§ããïŒããããã€ã³ã³ãšããŠã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒãæèŒãããŠãããïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ã該ïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããåçš®ã®å¶åŸ¡ããã°ã©ã ãåºå®å€ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããïŒïŒïŒïŒãšããã®ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒå ã«èšæ¶ãããå¶åŸ¡ããã°ã©ã ã®å®è¡ã«éããŠåçš®ã®ããŒã¿çãäžæçã«èšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªã§ããïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãå²èŸŒåè·¯ãã¿ã€ãåè·¯ãããŒã¿éåä¿¡åè·¯ãªã©ã®åçš®åè·¯ãå èµãããŠããã   The main controller 271 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.
ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºã®é®æåŸã«ãããŠã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããããã¯ã¢ããé»å§ãäŸçµŠãããŠããŒã¿ãä¿æïŒããã¯ã¢ããïŒã§ããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåçš®ã®ããŒã¿çãäžæçã«èšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªããšãªã¢ã®ä»ã«ãããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠããã   The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. In addition to the memory and area for this purpose, a backup area 503a is provided.
ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã¯ãåé»ãªã©ã®çºçã«ãã黿ºã鮿ãããå Žåã«ãããŠã黿ºé®ææïŒåé»çºçæãå«ãã以äžåæ§ïŒã®ã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ããåã¬ãžã¹ã¿ãïŒïŒ¯çã®å€ãèšæ¶ããŠããããã®ãšãªã¢ã§ããã黿ºæå ¥æïŒåé»è§£æ¶ã«ãã黿ºæå ¥ãå«ãã以äžåæ§ïŒã«ã¯ãããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã®æ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ã黿ºé®æåã®ç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãžã®æžã蟌ã¿ã¯ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçïŒå³ïŒïŒåç §ïŒã«ãã£ãŠé»æºé®ææã«å®è¡ãããããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«æžã蟌ãŸããåå€ã®åŸ©åž°ã¯é»æºæå ¥æã®ã¡ã€ã³åŠçïŒå³ïŒïŒåç §ïŒã«ãããŠå®è¡ãããããªããïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©ç«¯åïŒãã³ãã¹ã«ãã«å²èŸŒç«¯åïŒã«ã¯ãåé»çã®çºçã«ãã黿ºé®ææã«ãåé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒããã®åé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãå ¥åãããããã«æ§æãããŠãããåé»ã®çºçã«ããå黿åŠçãšããŠã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãå³åº§ã«å®è¡ãããã   The backup area 503a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, I / O, etc. when the power is shut down (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The area of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power cut-off based on the information in the backup area 503a when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation). Yes. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 38), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process as a process is immediately executed.
äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã¢ãã¬ã¹ãã¹åã³ããŒã¿ãã¹ã§æ§æããããã¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠå ¥åºåããŒãïŒïŒïŒãæ¥ç¶ãããŠãããå ¥åºåããŒãïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåŸè¿°ããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãããã®ä»å³ç€ºããªãã¹ã€ãã矀ãªã©ãæ¥ç¶ãããŠããã   An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a display control device 214, and other switches not shown.
æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã«ããè³çã貞ãçã®æåºå¶åŸ¡ãè¡ããã®ã§ãããæŒç®è£ 眮ã§ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããå¶åŸ¡ããã°ã©ã ãåºå®å€ããŒã¿çãèšæ¶ããïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãã¯ãŒã¯ã¡ã¢ãªçãšããŠäœ¿çšãããïŒïŒïŒïŒãšãåããŠããã   The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by a payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.
æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ã«ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºã®é®æåŸã«ãããŠã黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããããã¯ã¢ããé»å§ãäŸçµŠãããŠããŒã¿ãä¿æïŒããã¯ã¢ããïŒã§ããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåçš®ã®ããŒã¿çãäžæçã«èšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªããšãªã¢ã®ä»ã«ãããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠããã   The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 271. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.
ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã¯ãåé»ãªã©ã®çºçã«ãã黿ºã鮿ãããå Žåã«ãããŠã黿ºé®ææã®ã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ããåã¬ãžã¹ã¿ãïŒïŒ¯çã®å€ãèšæ¶ããŠããããã®ãšãªã¢ã§ããã黿ºæå ¥æã«ã¯ããã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã®æ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ã黿ºé®æåã®ç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãžã®æžã蟌ã¿ã¯ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçã«ãã£ãŠé»æºé®ææã«å®è¡ãããããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«æžã蟌ãŸããåå€ã®åŸ©åž°ã¯é»æºæå ¥æã®ã¡ã€ã³åŠçã«ãããŠå®è¡ãããããªããäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ãïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©ç«¯åã«ããåé»çã®çºçã«ãã黿ºé®ææã«åé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒããåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãå ¥åãããããã«æ§æãããŠãããåé»ã®çºçã«ãããïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãå³åº§ã«å®è¡ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The backup area 513a is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, I / O, and the like when the power is shut down when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like. Based on the information in the backup area 513a, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is shut off. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt process, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 271, the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process is immediately executed.
æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã¢ãã¬ã¹ãã¹åã³ããŒã¿ãã¹ã§æ§æããããã¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠå ¥åºåããŒãïŒïŒïŒãæ¥ç¶ãããŠãããå ¥åºåããŒãïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãªã©ãããããæ¥ç¶ãããŠããã   An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 271, a firing control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.
çºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒã«ããéæçã®çºå°ãèš±å¯åã¯çŠæ¢ãããã®ã§ãããçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæå®æ¡ä»¶ãæŽã£ãŠããå Žåã«é§åãèš±å¯ããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããçºå°èš±å¯ä¿¡å·ãåºåãããŠããããšãéæè ãéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã«è§ŠããŠããããšãã»ã³ãµä¿¡å·ã«ããæ€åºããŠããããšãçºå°ã忢ãããããã®çºå°åæ¢ã¹ã€ãããæäœãããŠããªãããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãçºå°ã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒãé§åãããéæççºå°ãã³ãã«ïŒïŒã®æäœéã«å¿ãã匷ãã§éæçãçºå°ãããã   The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch motor 229, and the launch motor 229 is permitted to drive when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, it is detected by a sensor signal that a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the player is touching the game ball launch handle 18, and a launch for stopping the launch. On condition that the stop switch is not operated, the launch motor 229 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18.
衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããéä¿¡ãããå³æè¡šç€ºã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ããã第ïŒå³æïŒç¹å¥å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãåã³ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ããã第ïŒå³æïŒæ®é峿ïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãå¶åŸ¡ãããã®ã§ãããäœãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ã«ãããæ§æã¯åŸè¿°ããããŸããã®ä»ã«ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠå¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããåä¿¡ããå¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åŸã£ãŠåçš®ã©ã³ããã¹ããŒã«ã®å¶åŸ¡ãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã«èšãããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®é§åãå¶åŸ¡ããã   Based on the symbol display command transmitted from the main controller 271, the display control device 214 displays the variation of the first symbol (special symbol) on the first symbol display device 41 and the second symbol (second symbol on the second symbol display device 42). This is to control the variation display of normal symbols. However, the configuration related to the display control of the first symbol of the display control device 214 will be described later. In addition, the display control device 214 transmits a control command to the audio lamp control device 272. The audio lamp control device 272 controls various lamps and speakers according to the control command received from the display control device 214, 1 The drive of the right door 171 and the left door 172 provided on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is controlled.
黿ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®åéšã«é»æºãäŸçµŠããããã®é»æºéšïŒïŒïŒãšãåé»çã«ãã黿ºé®æãç£èŠããåé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãšãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠãªãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãšãåããŠããã黿ºéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ç€ºããªã黿ºçµè·¯ãéããŠãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒçã«å¯ŸããŠåã ã«å¿ èŠãªåäœé»æºãäŸçµŠããããã®æŠèŠãšããŠã¯ã黿ºéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå€éšããäŸçµŠããã亀æµïŒïŒãã«ã黿ºãåã蟌ã¿ãåçš®ã¹ã€ãããã¢ãŒã¿çãé§åããããã®ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºãããžãã¯çšã®ïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºãïŒããã¯ã¢ããçšã®ããã¯ã¢ãã黿ºãªã©ãçæãããããïŒïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºãïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºåã³ããã¯ã¢ãã黿ºãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒçã«å¯ŸããŠäŸçµŠããããªããçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠã¯æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠåäœé»æºïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºãïŒïŒïŒ¶é»æºçïŒãäŸçµŠãããã   The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside, and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.
åé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåé»çã®çºçã«ãã黿ºé®ææã«ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã®åïŒïŒ©ç«¯åãžåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåºåããããã®åè·¯ã§ãããåé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã黿ºéšïŒïŒïŒããåºåãããæå€§é»å§ã§ããçŽæµå®å®ïŒïŒãã«ãã®é»å§ãç£èŠãããã®é»å§ãïŒïŒãã«ãæªæºã«ãªã£ãå Žåã«åé»ïŒé»æºé®æïŒã®çºçãšå€æããŠãåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãžåºåãããåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒã®åºåã«ãã£ãŠãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåé»ã®çºçãèªèããïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãå®è¡ããããªãã黿ºéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãçŽæµå®å®ïŒïŒãã«ãã®é»å§ãïŒïŒãã«ãæªæºã«ãªã£ãåŸã«ãããŠããïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçã®å®è¡ã«å åãªæéã®éãå¶åŸ¡ç³»ã®é§åé»å§ã§ããïŒãã«ãã®åºåãæ£åžžå€ã«ç¶æããããã«æ§æãããŠããããã£ãŠãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãæ£åžžã«å®è¡ãå®äºããããšãã§ããã   The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs. The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 541 outputs the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, to a normal value for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.
ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®ã¹ã€ããä¿¡å·ãåã蟌ã¿ããã®ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ã«å¿ããŠäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ããããŒã¿ãã¯ãªã¢ããããã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåºåããåè·¯ã§ãããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒäžãããéãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåºåãããããã«ãããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããç¶æ ã§ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºãæå ¥ããããšãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠããããã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒïœã®ããŒã¿ãã¯ãªã¢ãããã   The RAM erase switch circuit 543 receives a switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323, and outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data of the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. It is. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the backup areas 503a and 513a is cleared in the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311.
次ã«ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æïŒç¹å¥å³æïŒã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ã«ãããæ§æãå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æããã   Next, the structure concerning the display control of the first symbol (special symbol) of the display control device 214 will be described with reference to FIG.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒãããã°ã©ã ïŒïŒïŒïŒãã¯ãŒã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããªãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ããã»ããµïŒïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããªïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒåã³å ¥åããŒãïŒïŒïŒãåããŠããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããéä¿¡ãããŠããå³æè¡šç€ºã³ãã³ãïŒåæ¢å³æã³ãã³ããå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã確å®ã³ãã³ãçïŒãå ¥åããŒãïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠåä¿¡ãããšãšãã«ãåä¿¡ã³ãã³ããè§£æãåã¯åä¿¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ãæå®ã®æŒç®åŠçãè¡ã£ãŠïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ïŒå ·äœçã«ã¯ïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããå éšã³ãã³ãã®çæïŒã宿œãããããã°ã©ã ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããåçš®ã®å¶åŸ¡ããã°ã©ã ãåºå®å€ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªã§ãããèæ¯ç»åçšã®ïŒªïŒ°ïŒ¥ïŒ§åœ¢åŒç»åããŒã¿ã䜵ããŠèšæ¶ä¿æãããŠãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒã«ããåçš®ããã°ã©ã ã®å®è¡æã«äœ¿çšãããã¯ãŒã¯ããŒã¿ããã©ã°çãäžæçã«èšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªã§ããã   As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 214 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video display processor (VDP) 524, a video RAM 525, a character ROM 526, and an input port 527. The CPU 521 of the display control device 214 receives the symbol display command (stop symbol command, variation pattern command, confirmation command, etc.) transmitted from the main control device 271 via the input port 527 and analyzes the received command or Based on the received command, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed to control the VDP 524 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 524). The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«çµã¿èŸŒãŸãããã©ã€ãïŒæ¶²æ¶é§ååè·¯ïŒãçŽæ¥æäœããäžçš®ã®æç»åè·¯ã§ãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ïŒ©ïŒ£ãããåãããŠãããããæç»ãããããšãåŒã°ãããã®å®äœã¯ãæç»åŠçå°çšã®ãã¡ãŒã ãŠã§ã¢ãå èµãããã€ã³ã³ããããšã§ãèšãã¹ããã®ã§ãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒããããªïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒçã®ããããã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããŠããŒã¿ã®èªã¿æžãã«ä»åšãããšãšãã«ããããªïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšæ¶ããã衚瀺ããŒã¿ãããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒããæå®ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§èªã¿åºããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããã   The VDP 524 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the first symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 524 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a âdrawing chipâ, and the substance of the VDP 524 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 524 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 525, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 525 from the character ROM 526 at a predetermined timing to the first symbol display device 41. Display.
ãããªïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºããã衚瀺ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããããã®ã¡ã¢ãªã§ããããããªïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å å®¹ãæžãæ¿ããããšã«ãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºå 容ã倿Žãããããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºããã峿ãªã©ã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããããã®ç»åããŒã¿ã©ã€ãã©ãªãšããŠã®åœ¹å²ãæ ããã®ã§ããããã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåçš®ã®è¡šç€ºå³æã®ãããããã圢åŒç»åããŒã¿ãããããããç»åã®åãããã§ã®è¡šçŸè²ã決å®ããéã«åç §ããè²ãã¬ããããŒãã«çãä¿æãããŠãããç¹ã«ããããããã圢åŒã®å³æç»åããŒã¿ã«ã¯ãããã峿ã³ãŒãïŒå³æçªå·ïŒãä»äžãããŠãããã³ãã³ãã¬ãã«ã§ã¯å峿ç»åã峿ã³ãŒãã ãã§ç®¡çå¯èœãšããŠããããªãããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°èšããåãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«åæ ããŠç»åããŒã¿çãèšæ¶ãããŠããããšãå¯èœã§ããããŸããåèšããã°ã©ã ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšæ¶ããèæ¯ç»åçšã®ïŒªïŒ°ïŒ¥ïŒ§åœ¢åŒç»åããŒã¿ããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšæ¶ããæ§æãšããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   The video RAM 525 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the first symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the first symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 525. The character ROM 526 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 41. The character ROM 526 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. In particular, a symbol code (symbol number) is assigned to each symbol image data in the bitmap format, and each symbol image can be managed only by the symbol code at the command level. Note that a plurality of character ROMs 526 may be provided, and image data and the like may be stored in each character ROM 526 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 522 in the character ROM 526.
ããã§ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºããã第ïŒå³æãšãå第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ããã衚瀺ç»é¢äžã®è¡šç€ºå 容ãšã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æããè€æ°ã®å³æãåã ã«ç€ºãå³é¢ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã瀺ãå³é¢ã§ãããïŒïœïŒã«ã¯è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§å ã®é ååºåèšå®ãšæå¹ã©ã€ã³èšå®ãšããïŒïœïŒã«ã¯å®éã®å³æãã¯ã蟌ãã 衚瀺å 容ã瀺ãã   Here, the 1st symbol displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 and the display content on the display screen in the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 are demonstrated based on FIG. 28, FIG. FIG. 28 is a drawing individually showing a plurality of symbols as the first symbol. FIG. 29 is a drawing showing the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41, where (a) shows the area division setting and effective line setting in the display screen G, and (b) shows the actual symbol. Show the display contents.
å³ïŒïŒã®ïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã第ïŒå³æã¯ããïŒãããïŒãã®æ°åãåã ä»ããïŒïŒçš®é¡ã®äž»å³æãšãè±ã³ã圢ç¶ã®çµµå³æãããªãïŒçš®é¡ã®å¯å³æãšã«ããæ§æãããŠããã詳ããã¯ãåäž»å³æã§ã¯ãæšç®±ãããªãåŸæ¹å³æã®äžã«ãïŒãããïŒãã®æ°åãä»ãããŠããããã®ãã¡å¥æ°çªå·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äž»å³æã§ã¯ãæšç®±ã®ååŽé¢ã»ãŒäžæ¯ã«åã ã®æ°åçªå·ã倧ããä»ãããŠãããããã«å¯Ÿããå¶æ°çªå·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äž»å³æã§ã¯ãæšç®±ã®ååŽé¢ã»ãŒäžæ¯ã«æããããå®ããé¢šåæ·ããã«ã¡ãããéãããããšãã£ãä»å±å³æã®æšªã«åã ã®æ°åçªå·ãæ¯èŒçå°ããä»ãããŠããããã®å Žåã奿°çªå·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãä»ãããäž»å³æã¯ãé«ç¢ºç峿ãã«çžåœããåœè©²é«ç¢ºç峿ãæãããšã§ç¹å¥éæç¶æ ãã倧åœããç¶æ ã«çªå ¥ããããã«ãã®åŸãé«ç¢ºçç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ããããŸããå¶æ°çªå·ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãä»ãããäž»å³æã¯ãäœç¢ºç峿ãã«çžåœããåœè©²äœç¢ºç峿ãæãããšã§å€§åœããç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ãããããããå Žåã«ã¯é«ç¢ºçç¶æ ã«ã¯ç§»è¡ããªãããªããé«ç¢ºçç¶æ ãšã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®çµã¿åãããäºãå®ãããã確çå€å峿ã®çµã¿åããã«ãã£ãŠå€§åœããã«ãªãä»å 䟡å€ãšããŠãã®åŸã®å€§åœãã確çãã¢ããããç¶æ ããããã確å€ã®æããããéåžžç¶æ ïŒäœç¢ºçç¶æ ïŒãšã¯ãã®ãããªç¢ºå€ç¶æ ã§ãªãæãããã   As shown in (a) to (k) of FIG. 28, the first symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers â0â to â9â and one type of petal-shaped symbols. It consists of sub-designs. Specifically, in each main symbol, numbers â0â to â9â are attached on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the odd symbols (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) Each numerical number is assigned to the front side of the wooden box. On the other hand, in the main symbols of even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), each of the main symbols beside the attached symbols such as amulet, furoshiki, helmet, bag, kettle drawn on the front side of the wooden box. Numeric numbers are relatively small. In this case, the main symbol to which the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is attached corresponds to the âhigh probability symbolâ, and when the high probability symbol is aligned, the big game state that is a special gaming state is entered, After that, it shifts to a high probability state. In addition, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a âlow probability symbolâ, and when the low probability symbol is aligned, it shifts to a jackpot state. It does not transition to a high probability state. The high probability state refers to a state in which the combination of the first symbol is a big hit by a predetermined combination of probability variation symbols, and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value, that is, a so-called probable change. (Probability state) refers to a time when such a probability variation state is not present.
éæè ã¯ãé«ç¢ºç峿ã§ç¬¬ïŒå³æãæãããšãããªãã¡ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å忢æã«äž»å³æã«ä»ãããæ°åãé«ç¢ºççªå·ïŒå¥æ°çªå·ïŒã§ããããšãæåŸ ããŠéæãè¡ãããåœè©²é«ç¢ºç峿ã§ã¯æ°å峿ã倧ããæãããŠããé«ç¢ºçã§ããããšã匷調ãããŠãããããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããã   The player plays the game with the expectation that the first symbol is aligned with a high probability symbol, that is, the number attached to the main symbol when the fluctuation of the first symbol is stopped is a high probability number (odd number). In the high-probability symbol, the numerical symbol is drawn large and it is emphasized that the probability is high. Therefore, the interest of the game is enhanced.
次ã«ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ã€ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã¯ã倧ããã¯äžäžã«ïŒåå²ãããäžïŒïŒïŒã第ïŒå³æãå€å衚瀺ãã䞻衚瀺é åïœããã以å€ïŒäžïŒïŒïŒïŒãäºåæŒåºããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã衚瀺ããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãªã£ãŠããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãã第ïŒã®è¡šç€ºé åãã«çžåœããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãã第ïŒã®è¡šç€ºé åãã«çžåœããã   Next, the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display region Rm in which the first symbol is variably displayed. (Upper 1/3) is a sub display area Rs for displaying a notice effect and a character. The main display area Rm corresponds to the âfirst display areaâ, and the sub display area Rs corresponds to the âsecond display areaâ.
䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ã¯ãå·Šã»äžã»å³ã®ïŒã€ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒïŒïŒºïŒãèšå®ãããŠãããå峿åïŒãïŒã«ãåè¿°ãã第ïŒå³æãèŠå®ã®é åºã§è¡šç€ºããããããªãã¡ãå峿åïŒãïŒã§ã¯ãæ°åã®æé åã¯éé ã«äž»å³æãé åããããšå ±ã«åäž»å³æã®éã«å¯å³æãïŒã€ãã€é ãããŠããããã®ãšããå峿åïŒãïŒã«ã¯ãïŒïŒåã®äž»å³æåã³ïŒïŒåã®å¯å³æãããªãèšïŒïŒåã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãèšå®ãããŠããããããŠã䞻衚瀺é åïœã§ã¯ãå峿åïŒãïŒã«ïŒïŒåã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãåšææ§ããã£ãŠäžããäžãžãšã¹ã¯ããŒã«ããããã«å€å衚瀺ããããç¹ã«ãå·Šå³æåïŒã«ãããŠã¯äž»å³æã®æ°åãéé ã«çŸããäžå³æåïŒåã³å³å³æåïŒã«ãããŠã¯äž»å³æã®æ°åãæé ã«çŸããããã«é åãããŠããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ã¯ãå峿åïŒãïŒºïŒæ¯ã«äžã»äžã»äžã®ïŒæ®µã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããçµæãšããŠïŒæ®µÃïŒåã®èšïŒåã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the main display area Rm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are set, and the above-described first symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. At this time, a total of 20 first symbols including 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the main display region Rm, 20 first symbols are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 so as to scroll from top to bottom with periodicity. In particular, the numbers of main symbols appear in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3. In the main display area Rm, the first symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, a total of nine first symbols in three rows à three rows are displayed. It has come to be.
䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ã¯ãïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãããªãã¡äžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãå³äžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãå·Šäžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãèšå®ãããŠããããããŠãæ¯åã®éæã«éããŠã¯ãå·Šå³æåïŒâå³å³æåïŒâäžå³æåïŒã®é ã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ã忢ãããå³æç¢ºå®ããæã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æãããããã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«å€§åœãã峿ã®çµåãïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåäžã®äž»å³æã®çµåãïŒã§æãã°å€§åœãããšããŠå€§åœããåç»ã衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the main display area Rm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display of the first symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol column Z1 â the right symbol column Z3 â the middle symbol column Z2, and when the symbol is confirmed, the first symbol is a big hit on any active line. If a combination of symbols (in this embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.
ãŸããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãããäžæ¹ã«ãããŠæšªé·ã«èšããããŠãããããã«ïŒé åã«çåºåãããŠããããã®å Žåãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®ïŒé åã®ãã¡ãå³åŽã®é åã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãå·ŠåŽã®é åã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãäžå€®ã®é åã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãšãªã£ãŠããã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒåã³ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã¯ãåè¿°ãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒåç §ïŒã«éãªãåãé åã§ãã£ãŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãé èšãããç¶æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã¯å³æïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ããã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã¯å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã«å¯ŸããŠã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«éãªãåãããšããªããåžžã«éæè ã«ããèŠèªã§ãã衚瀺é åãšãªã£ãŠããã   The sub display area Rs is horizontally long above the main display area Rm, and is further equally divided into three areas. In this case, of the three areas of the sub display area Rs, the right area is the first notice area Rs1, the left area is the second notice area Rs2, and the center area is the third notice area Rs3. The first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are areas that overlap the right door 171 and the left door 172 (see FIG. 5) described above, and in the state where the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed, The first warning area Rs1 is hidden by the right door 171 and the second warning area Rs2 is hidden by the left door 172. On the other hand, the third notice area Rs3 does not overlap the right door 171 and the left door 172, and is a display area that can always be viewed by the player.
å®éã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ã§ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®äž»å³æãšå¯å³æãšãåèšïŒå衚瀺ãããããªããåå³ã«ã¯ä»»æã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ ã瀺ãããŸããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãé èšãããç¶æ ã§ã¯ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒåã³ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãé ããããã®è¡šç€ºå 容ã¯èŠèªã§ããªãããããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããšã§ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãçŸåºããåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã«ãããŠæå®ã®äºåæŒåºãè¡ãããããŸããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããšã§ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãçŸåºããåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã«ãããŠæå®ã®äºåæŒåºãè¡ãããã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã§ã¯ãéåžžã¯æå®ã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯ãããããä»ããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãæå®åäœãããããªè¡šç€ºãè¡ãããããããŠãå¿ èŠã«å¿ããŠåœè©²ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿çã«ããäºåæŒåºãè¡ãããã   On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the first symbol are displayed in the main display area Rm. The figure shows an arbitrary display state. Further, in the sub display area Rs, when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed, the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are hidden, and the display contents cannot be visually recognized. When the right door 171 is opened, the first notice area Rs1 appears, and a predetermined notice effect is performed in the first notice area Rs1. In addition, the second notice area Rs2 appears when the left door 172 is opened, and a predetermined notice effect is performed in the second notice area Rs2. In the third warning area Rs3, a display is normally performed so that a predetermined character (a boy character with a bee stick in the figure) performs a predetermined operation. And the notice effect by the said character etc. is performed as needed.
äžèšã®éãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£
眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã¯ãååãšããŠã¯äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšã«é ååºåãããŠããããå衚瀺é åïœïŒïŒ²ïœãè·šãããã«ããŠãæãã¯äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å°ãªããšãäžéšãšãäžã€ã«çµ±åããããã«ããŠè¡šç€ºæŒåºãè¡ãããšãã§ããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããäŸãã°ãæå®ã®ãªãŒãçºçåŸã«ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšã®é ååºåããªãããŠå衚瀺é åïœïŒïŒ²ïœãåãããŠïŒã€ã®è¡šç€ºé åãšããåœè©²è¡šç€ºé åãçšããŠã®è¡šç€ºæŒåºãè¡ããããäœãããªãŒãçºçåŸã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ
çã«ã€ããŠã¯åŸã§è©³è¿°ããã
å ã¿ã«ãæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®èåŸãéèŠã§ããªãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããããäŸãã°å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãåéæçŽ æã§æ§æããåœè©²å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããŠãã®èåŸã®ç»åããŒãããåã¯åŸ®ãã«éèŠã§ããããã«ããŠãããããã®å Žåã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«é ããç¶æ
ã§ã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒåã³ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã§è¡šç€ºæŒåºãè¡ãããã«ããããããšã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒåã³ç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒãé ãããŠããŠãããã®èåŸã®æŒåºã埮ãã«éèŠã§ãã倧åœããç¶æ
ã«ç§»è¡ããããšãžã®æåŸ
ãéæè
ã«äžããããšãªã©ãã§ããã
As described above, the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is divided into the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs in principle, but it straddles each display region Rm, Rs, or A display effect can also be performed by integrating at least a part of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. For example, after a predetermined reach occurs, the display area Rm and Rs are combined into one display area by eliminating the area division between the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, and a display effect using the display area is achieved. Done. However, the display form after the occurrence of reach will be described in detail later.
Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the right door 171 and the left door 172 cannot be seen through the back, but for example, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are made of a translucent material, and the right door 171 and the left door 172 The image behind the door 172 may be blurred or slightly transparent. In this case, display effects are performed in the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 even in a state where the right door 171 and the left door 172 are hidden. Then, even if the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are concealed by the right door 171 and the left door 172, the player can expect the expectation to shift to the big hit state by slightly seeing the effects behind them. Can be given to
次ã«ãäžèšã®åŠãæ§æãããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®åäœã«ã€ããŠèª¬æããã   Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.
æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãéæã«éãåçš®ã«ãŠã³ã¿æ å ±ãçšããŠã倧åœããæœéžã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å³æè¡šç€ºã®èšå®ãªã©ãè¡ãããšãšããŠãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã倧åœããã®æœéžã«äœ¿çšãã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãšã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å€§åœãã峿ã®éžæã«äœ¿çšãã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãšã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãå€ãå€åããéã®ãªãŒãæœéžã«äœ¿çšãããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãšã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®åæå€èšå®ã«äœ¿çšããä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ãšã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³éžæã«äœ¿çšããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒãšãå·Šåãäžååã³å³åã®åå€ã峿ã®èšå®ã«äœ¿çšããå·Šã»äžã»å³ã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ãšãçšããããšãšããŠããã   In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 271 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot lottery, setting the symbol display of the first symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, As shown in FIG. 30, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot symbol counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 41, and the first symbol display device 41 are fluctuated and fluctuated. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for variation pattern selection of the first symbol display device 41, , Left, middle and right out symbol counters CL, CM, CR used to set each out symbol in the left, middle and right columns It is set to be there.
ãã®ãã¡ãã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã¯ããã®æŽæ°ã®éœåºŠååå€ã«ïŒãå ç®ãããæå€§å€ã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãã«ãŒãã«ãŠã³ã¿ãšãªã£ãŠããããŸããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ²ã¬ãžã¹ã¿ïŒãªãã¬ãã·ã¥ã¬ãžã¹ã¿ïŒãçšããŠã¬ãžã¹ã¿å€ãå ç®ãããçµæçã«æ°å€ãã©ã³ãã ã«å€åããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããåã«ãŠã³ã¿ã¯çæéééã§æŽæ°ããããã®æŽæ°å€ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®æå®é åã«èšå®ãããã«ãŠã³ã¿çšãããã¡ã«é©å®æ ŒçŽããããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãïŒã€ã®å®è¡ãšãªã¢ãšïŒã€ã®ä¿çãšãªã¢ïŒä¿ç第ïŒã第ïŒãšãªã¢ïŒãšãããªãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ãèšããããŠããããããã®åãšãªã¢ã«ã¯ãäœåå£ïŒïŒãžã®éæçã®å ¥è³å±¥æŽã«åãããŠã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒåã³ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®åå€ãæç³»åçã«æ ŒçŽãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   Among these, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 501, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. The RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided. According to the winning history, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series.
åã«ãŠã³ã¿ã«ã€ããŠè©³ããã¯ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å
ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããç¹ã«å€§åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãïŒåšããå Žåããã®æç¹ã®ä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®å€ãåœè©²å€§åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®åæå€ãšããŠèªã¿èŸŒãŸããããªããä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã¯ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãšåæ§ã®ã«ãŒãã«ãŠã³ã¿ã§ããïŒå€ïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒãã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿æ¯ã«ïŒåæŽæ°ããããšå
±ã«éåžžåŠçã®æ®äœæéå
ã§ç¹°ãè¿ãæŽæ°ãããã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯å®æçã«ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿æ¯ã«1
åïŒæŽæ°ãããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å
¥è³ããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããã倧åœãããšãªãä¹±æ°ã®å€ã®æ°ã¯ãäœç¢ºçæãšé«ç¢ºçæãšã§ïŒçš®é¡èšå®ãããŠãããäœç¢ºçæã«å€§åœãããšãªãä¹±æ°ã®å€ã®æ°ã¯ïŒã§ããã®å€ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãã§ãããé«ç¢ºçæã«å€§åœãããšãªãä¹±æ°ã®å€ã®æ°ã¯ïŒïŒã§ããã®å€ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãã§ããã
For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically (in this embodiment, 1 per timer interrupt).
Updated) and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33. The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is â337,673â. There are 10 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are â67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661â.
倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯ã倧åœããã®éã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å€å忢æã®å³æã決å®ãããã®ã§ãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãããŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãïŒã©ã€ã³ã§ãããç¹å®å³æïŒäž»å³æïŒãïŒïŒéãèšå®ãããŠããããšãããïŒïŒåïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãçšæãããŠãããããªãã¡ã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯ãïŒãïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯å®æçã«ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿æ¯ã«ïŒåïŒæŽæ°ãããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããã   The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines the symbol at the time of fluctuation stop of the first symbol display device 41 in the case of a jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 41 has five effective lines, Since ten specific symbols (main symbols) are set, 50 counter values (0 to 49) are prepared. That is, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.
ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã«ãã£ãŠããªãŒãçºçããåŸæçµåæ¢å³æããªãŒã峿ã®ååŸã«ïŒã€ã ããããŠåæ¢ãããååŸå€ããªãŒãããšãåãããªãŒãçºçããåŸæçµåæ¢å³æããªãŒã峿ã®ååŸä»¥å€ã§åæ¢ãããååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒãããšããªãŒãçºçããªããå®å šå€ãããšãæœéžããããšãšããŠãããäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãååŸå€ããªãŒãã«è©²åœããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒãã«è©²åœããïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒãå®å šå€ãã«è©²åœããããªãããªãŒãã®æœéžã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®æœéžç¢ºçã®ç¶æ ãå€åéå§æã®äœåä¿ççæ°çã«å¿ããŠåã åå¥ã«èšå®ããããã®ã§ãã£ãŠãè¯ãããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯å®æçã«ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿æ¯ã«ïŒåïŒæŽæ°ãããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããã   For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes the last stop symbol to stop after the reach has occurred by shifting the last stop symbol by one before and after the reach symbol, and the last stop symbol after the reach has also occurred. âReach other than front / rear outâ and stop âcompletely outâ where no reach occurs, for example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear reach, and C3 = 2-21 It corresponds to the reach other than the front and rear deviation, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the complete deviation. The reach lottery may be set individually according to the state of the lottery probability of the first symbol display device 41, the number of suspended balls at the start of change, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.
ïŒã€ã®å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®ãã¡ãäžæ¹ã®å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããã仿¹ã®å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããã以äžã®èª¬æã§ã¯ãïŒãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ããïŒãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ããšãããã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã«ãã£ãŠãããããããŒãã«ãªãŒããã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããã¬ãã¢ã ãªãŒãçã第ïŒå³æã®ãªãŒãçš®å¥ããã®ä»å€§ãŸããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ããã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã«ãã£ãŠããªãŒãçºçåŸã«æçµåæ¢å³æïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯äžå³æïŒã忢ãããŸã§ã®çµéæéïŒèšãæããã°ãå€å峿æ°ïŒãªã©ãã现ããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ããããåŸã£ãŠããããã®å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒãçµã¿åãããããšã§ãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã®å€çš®å€æ§åã容æã«å®çŸã§ããããŸãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã ãã§å³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ãããã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒãšåæ¢å³æãšã®çµã¿åããã§åãã峿å€åæ æ§ã決å®ãããããããšãå¯èœã§ãããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã¯ãåŸè¿°ããéåžžåŠçãïŒåå®è¡ãããæ¯ã«ïŒåæŽæ°ãããåœè©²éåžžåŠçå ã®æ®äœæéå ã§ãç¹°ãè¿ãæŽæ°ãããããããŠã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€åéå§æã«ãããå€åãã¿ãŒã³æ±ºå®ã«éããŠå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®ãããã¡å€ãååŸãããã   Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as âfirst variation type counterâ, and CS2 is also referred to as âsecond variation type counterâ. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of the first symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol ( In the present embodiment, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined when the first symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the first symbol.
å·Šã»äžã»å³ã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã¯ã倧åœããæœéžãå€ããšãªã£ãæã«å·Šå第ïŒå³æãäžå第ïŒå³æãå³å第ïŒå³æã®å€ãåæ¢å³æãæ±ºå®ããããã®ãã®ã§ãããååã§ã¯äž»å³æåã³å¯å³æã®åãããŠïŒïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®äœããã衚瀺ãããããšãããåã ã«ïŒïŒåïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãçšæãããŠãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ã«ããå·Šå³æåã®äžã»äžã»äžæ®µã®åå³æãæ±ºå®ãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã«ããäžå³æåã®äžã»äžã»äžæ®µã®åå³æãæ±ºå®ãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ²ã«ããå³å³æåã®äžã»äžã»äžæ®µã®åå³æãæ±ºå®ãããã   The left, middle and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stop symbol of the left row 1st symbol, the middle row 1st symbol, the right row 1st symbol when the big hit lottery is missed. In each column, any one of the 20 first symbols in total including the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed, so 20 counter values (0 to 19) are prepared for each. The left, upper, middle, and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CL, the upper, middle, and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CM, and the right symbol column is determined by the out symbol counter CR. The top, middle and bottom symbols are determined.
æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒã«å èµã®ïŒ²ã¬ãžã¹ã¿ã®æ°å€ãçšããããšã«ããåã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®å€ãã©ã³ãã ã«æŽæ°ããæ§æãšããŠãããããªãã¡ãåå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°æã«ã¯ãååå€ã«ïŒ²ã¬ãžã¹ã¿ã®äžäœïŒãããã®å€ãå ç®ããããã®å ç®çµæãæå€§å€ãè¶ ããå Žåã«ïŒïŒæžç®ãããŠä»åå€ã決å®ããããåå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã¯æŽæ°ææãéãªããªãããã«ããŠéåžžåŠçå ã§æŽæ°ããããããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åããããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ååŸå€ããªãŒã峿ãããã¡ãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã峿ãããã¡åã³å®å šå€ã峿ãããã¡ã®äœããã«æ ŒçŽãããããããŠã第ïŒå³æã®å€åéå§æã«ãããå€åãã¿ãŒã³æ±ºå®ã«éãããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«å¿ããŠååŸå€ããªãŒã峿ãããã¡ãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã峿ãããã¡åã³å®å šå€ã峿ãããã¡ã®äœããã®ãããã¡å€ãååŸãããã   In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 501. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, 20 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated within the normal process so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach of the RAM 503 front / rear reach symbol buffer, reach other than front / rear out It is stored in either the symbol buffer or the completely off symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the first symbol, the buffer value of any one of the front and rear outreach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear outlier, and the completely out symbol symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3. The
ãªããåã«ãŠã³ã¿ã®å€§ãããç¯å²ã¯äžäŸã«ãããä»»æã«å€æŽã§ãããäœããäžèŠåæ§ãéèŠããã°ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€§ããã¯äœããç°ãªãçŽ æ°ãšãããããªãå Žåã«ãåæããªãæ°å€ãšããŠããã®ãæãŸããããŸããå³ç€ºã¯çç¥ãããã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®æœéžã«ã¯ç¬¬ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãçšããããã第ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ç¯å²å ã§é ã«ïŒãã€å ç®ãããæå€§å€ïŒã€ãŸãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããåŸïŒã«æ»ãã«ãŒãã«ãŠã³ã¿ãšããŠæ§æãããŠããã第ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã¯å®æçã«ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿æ¯ã«ïŒåïŒæŽæ°ãããéæçãå·Šå³äœããã®ã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééããããšãæ€ç¥ãããæã«ååŸããããåœéžããããšãšãªãä¹±æ°ã®å€ã®æ°ã¯ïŒïŒïŒããããã®ç¯å²ã¯ãïŒãïŒïŒïŒãã§ããã   In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, if importance is attached to irregularity, it is desirable that the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case. Although not shown, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 42. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is â5 to 153â.
次ãã§ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããåå¶åŸ¡åŠçãå³ïŒïŒãå³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒããåç §ããªãã説æããããããïŒïŒïŒã®åŠçãšããŠã¯å€§å¥ããŠã黿ºæå ¥ã«äŒŽãèµ·åãããã¡ã€ã³åŠçãšã宿çã«ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïœïœïœ ïœåšæã§ïŒèµ·åãããã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿åŠçãšãïŒïŒ©ç«¯åïŒãã³ãã¹ã«ãã«ç«¯åïŒãžã®åé»ä¿¡å·ã®å ¥åã«ããèµ·åãããïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãšãããã説æã®äŸ¿å®äžãã¯ããã«ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿åŠçãšïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãšã説æãããã®åŸã¡ã€ã³åŠçã説æããã   Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is NMI interrupt processing activated by signal input. For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then main processing will be described.
å³ïŒïŒã¯ãã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿åŠçã瀺ããããŒãã£ãŒãã§ãããæ¬åŠçã¯äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããäŸãã°ïŒïœïœïœ ïœæ¯ã«å®è¡ãããã   FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 every 2 msec, for example.
å³ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãåçš®å ¥è³ã¹ã€ããã®èªã¿èŸŒã¿åŠçãå®è¡ãããããªãã¡ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠããåçš®ã¹ã€ããïŒäœããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãé€ãïŒã®ç¶æ ãèªã¿èŸŒããšå ±ã«ãåœè©²ã¹ã€ããã®ç¶æ ãå€å®ããŠæ€åºæ å ±ïŒå ¥è³æ€ç¥æ å ±ïŒãä¿åããã   In FIG. 36, in step S601, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 271 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ãïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããšå ±ã«ããã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãæå€§å€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããéïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããããããŠãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®æŽæ°å€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è©²åœãããããã¡é åã«æ ŒçŽãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒåã³ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒåã³ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãããããïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããšå ±ã«ããããã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãæå€§å€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãããããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããéããããïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããããããŠãåã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãïŒã®æŽæ°å€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è©²åœãããããã¡é åã«æ ŒçŽããã   Thereafter, in step S602, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In the subsequent step S603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values reach the maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 49, and 238, respectively). Each time it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäœåå£ïŒïŒãžã®å ¥è³ã«äŒŽãå§åå ¥è³åŠçãå®è¡ããããã®å§åå ¥è³åŠçãå³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒãã«ãã説æãããšãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ïŒå§åå ¥è³ïŒãããåŠããäœåå£ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®æ€åºæ å ±ã«ããå€å¥ãããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ãããšå€å¥ããããšãç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®äœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ãäžéå€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒæªæºã§ãããåŠããå€å¥ãããäœåå£ïŒïŒãžã®å ¥è³ããããäžã€äœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ïŒïŒã§ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãäœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ãïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãåèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§æŽæ°ãã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒåã³ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®åå€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã®ç©ºãèšæ¶ãšãªã¢ã®ãã¡æåã®ãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽããããããŠãå§åå ¥è³åŠçã®åŸãïŒïŒïŒã¯æ¬ã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿åŠçãäžæŠçµäºããã   Thereafter, in step S604, a start winning process associated with winning in the operating port 33 is executed. The start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In step S701, whether or not the game ball has won the start opening 33 (start winning) is determined based on the detection information of the operation opening switch 224. When it is determined that the game ball has won the operating port 33, in the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the number N of active reserved balls of the first symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S703 on the condition that there is a winning at the operation port 33 and the number N of activated balls is <4, and the number N of activated balls is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S704, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S603 are stored in the first area in the free storage area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Then, after the start winning process, the CPU 501 once ends the timer interrupt process.
ãªããéæçãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«å ¥è³ïŒå§åå ¥è³ïŒããå Žåãããã«äŒŽã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéå§ãããããšãšãªãããå§åå ¥è³åŸã第ïŒå³æãå€åã峿忢ã«è³ããŸã§ã«ã¯æå®æéïŒäŸãã°ïŒç§ïŒãçµéããŠããªããã°ãªããªããšããå¶çŽããããããã§ãäžèšå§åå ¥è³åŠçã§ã¯ãå§åå ¥è³ã確èªãããå Žåãåã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ã®æ ŒçŽåŠçïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åŸã«ãå§åå ¥è³åŸã®çµéæéãèšãããã®ã¿ã€ããã»ããããããšãšããŠãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäžèšå§åå ¥è³åŠçã¯ïŒïœïœïœ ïœåšæã§å®è¡ããããããäŸãã°ïŒç§ã®çµéæéãèšæž¬ããã«ã¯ã¿ã€ãã«æ°å€ãïŒïŒïŒïŒããã»ããããå§åå ¥è³åŠçã®éœåºŠãã¿ã€ãå€ãïŒãã€æžç®ããããã®ã¿ã€ãå€ã¯ããã®æã ã®åã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãïŒã®å€ãšå ±ã«ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãã管çãããããããŠãåŸè¿°ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³èšå®ã«éããŠã¯ãäžèšã¿ã€ãå€ãåç §ãããæ®ãæéã«å¿ããŠïŒæå®æéçµéåŸã«å³æå€åã忢ãããããïŒå€åãã¿ãŒã³ãèšå®ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In addition, when the game ball wins the operating port 33 (start winning prize), the first symbol display display on the first symbol display device 41 is started accordingly, but after the start winning, the first symbol changes. However, there is a restriction that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) must elapse before the symbol is stopped. Therefore, in the start winning process, when the start winning is confirmed, a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start winning is set after each counter value storing process (step S704). Specifically, since the start winning process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, in order to measure an elapsed time of 5 seconds, a numerical value â2500â is set in the timer, and the timer value is incremented by 1 for each start winning process. Subtract. This timer value is stored and managed in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 together with the values of the respective counters C1 to C3. Then, when setting the variation pattern of the first symbol, which will be described later, the timer value is referred to, and a variation pattern is set according to the remaining time (so that the symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined time elapses). .
å³ïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçã瀺ããããŒãã£ãŒãã§ãããæ¬åŠçã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããåé»ã®çºççã«ããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºé®ææã«å®è¡ãããããã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿ã«ããã黿ºé®ææã®äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«èšæ¶ããããããªãã¡ãåé»ã®çºççã«ããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºã鮿ããããšãåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒããäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©ç«¯åã«åºåãããïŒïŒïŒã¯å®è¡äžã®å¶åŸ¡ãäžæããŠïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãéå§ãããå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçããã°ã©ã ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšæ¶ãããŠãããåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåºåãããåŸæå®æéã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åŠçãå®è¡å¯èœãšãªãããã«é»æºéšïŒïŒïŒãã黿ºäŸçµŠããªãããŠããããã®æå®æéå ã«ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãå®è¡ãããã   FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 271 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 and the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed. To start NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt processing program in FIG. 38 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 271. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 271 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.
ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯äœ¿çšã¬ãžã¹ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«éé¿ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ã®å€ãåããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«èšæ¶ãããããã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«èšå®ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºã鮿ãããããšã瀺ã黿ºé®æéç¥ã³ãã³ããä»ã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«å¯ŸããŠéä¿¡ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ãç®åºããããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«ä¿åãããïŒå€å®å€ã¯ãäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœæ¥é åã¢ãã¬ã¹ã«ããããã§ãã¯ãµã å€ã§ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãïŒã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ãçŠæ¢ããããã®åŸã¯ã黿ºãå®å šã«é®æããŠåŠçãå®è¡ã§ããªããªãã®ã«åããç¡éã«ãŒãã«å ¥ãã   In the NMI interrupt processing, in step S801, the used register is saved in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and in the subsequent step S802, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Further, in step S803, the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a, and in step S804, a power interruption notification command indicating that the power has been interrupted is transmitted to another control device. In step S805, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. In step S806, RAM access is prohibited. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power supply being completely shut down and the processing being impossible.
ãªããäžèšã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçã¯æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ãåæ§ã«å®è¡ããããããïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿ã«ãããåé»ã®çºççã«ãã黿ºé®ææã®æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«èšæ¶ããããåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåºåãããåŸæå®æéã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åŠçãå®è¡å¯èœãšãªãããã«é»æºéšïŒïŒïŒãã黿ºäŸçµŠããªãããã®ãåæ§ã§ãããããªãã¡ãåé»ã®çºççã«ããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã®é»æºã鮿ããããšãåé»ä¿¡å·ïŒ³ïŒ§ïŒãåé»ç£èŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒããæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©ç«¯åã«åºåãããïŒïŒïŒã¯å®è¡äžã®å¶åŸ¡ãäžæããŠå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒ®ïŒïŒ©å²èŸŒã¿åŠçãéå§ããããã®å 容ã¯ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã®é»æºé®æéç¥ã³ãã³ãã®éä¿¡ãè¡ããªãç¹ãé€ãäžèšèª¬æãšåæ§ã§ããã   The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout controller 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started. The contents are the same as described above, except that the power-off notification command is not transmitted in step S804.
å³ïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããã¡ã€ã³åŠçã®äžäŸã瀺ããããŒãã£ãŒãã§ããããã®ã¡ã€ã³åŠçã¯é»æºæå ¥æã®ãªã»ããã«äŒŽãèµ·åãããã   FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 271, and this main process is started upon a reset at power-on.
ã¡ã€ã³åŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã黿ºæå ¥ã«äŒŽãåæèšå®åŠçãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ã«äºã決ããããæå®å€ãèšå®ãããšå ±ã«ããµãåŽã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒçïŒãåäœå¯èœãªç¶æ ã«ãªãã®ãåŸ ã€ããã«äŸãã°ïŒç§çšåºŠããŠã§ã€ãåŠçãå®è¡ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠæåºèš±å¯ã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãïŒã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ãèš±å¯ããã   In the main process, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (audio lamp control device 272, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, Wait processing is performed for about 1 second. In step S102, a payout permission command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.
ãã®åŸãïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é¢ããŠããŒã¿ããã¯ã¢ããã®åŠçãå®è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«èšããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠãããåŠããå€å¥ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«é»æºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠãããåŠããå€å¥ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ãç®åºããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ããã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ã黿ºé®ææã«ä¿åããïŒå€å®å€ãšäžèŽãããåŠããããªãã¡ããã¯ã¢ããã®æå¹æ§ãå€å¥ãããïŒå€å®å€ã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœæ¥é åã¢ãã¬ã¹ã«ããããã§ãã¯ãµã å€ã§ããããªããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®æå®ã®ãšãªã¢ã«æžã蟌ãŸããããŒã¯ãŒããæ£ããä¿åãããŠãããåŠãã«ããããã¯ã¢ããã®æå¹æ§ã倿ããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in subsequent step S105, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power shutdown is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. To do. In step S106, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.
äžè¿°ããããã«ãæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäŸãã°ããŒã«ã®å¶æ¥éå§æãªã©ã黿ºæå ¥æã«ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒããŒã¿ãåæåããå Žåã«ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒããªãã黿ºãæå ¥ããããåŸã£ãŠãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠããã°ãïŒã®åæååŠçïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ç§»è¡ããããŸãã黿ºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠããªãå ŽåããïŒå€å®å€ïŒãã§ãã¯ãµã å€çïŒã«ããããã¯ã¢ããã®ç°åžžã確èªãããå Žåãåæ§ã«ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åæååŠçïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ç§»è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœ¿çšé åãïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åæååŠçãå®è¡ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯å²èŸŒã¿èš±å¯ãèšå®ããåŸè¿°ããéåžžåŠçã«ç§»è¡ããã   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (steps S114 to S116). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing (steps S114 to S116) of the RAM 503 in the same manner. . That is, in step S114, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, initialization processing of the RAM 503 is executed. In step S116, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.
äžæ¹ãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠããªãå Žåã«ã¯ã黿ºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠããããšãåã³ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ïŒãã§ãã¯ãµã å€çïŒãæ£åžžã§ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãåŸ©é»æã®åŠçïŒé»æºé®æåŸ©æ§æã®åŠçïŒãå®è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºé®æåã®ã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ã埩垰ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãã¯ãªã¢ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãµãåŽã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã黿ºé®ææã®éæç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ãããããã®ã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯äœ¿çšã¬ãžã¹ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãã埩垰ãããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå²èŸŒã¿èš±å¯ïŒäžèš±å¯ã黿ºé®æåã®ç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ãããåŸã黿ºé®æåã®çªå°ãžæ»ãã   On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when power is restored). That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S109, information on occurrence of power-off is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. In steps S112 and S113, the interrupt permission / non-permission is returned to the state before the power shutdown, and then the address before the power shutdown is returned.
次ã«ãéåžžåŠçã®æµããå³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒããåç §ããªãã説æããããã®éåžžåŠçã§ã¯éæã®äž»èŠãªåŠçãå®è¡ãããããã®æŠèŠãšããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®åŠçãïŒïœïœïœ ïœåšæã®å®æåŠçãšããŠå®è¡ããããã®æ®äœæéã§ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿æŽæ°åŠçãå®è¡ãããæ§æãšãªã£ãŠããã   Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.
éåžžåŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãååã®åŠçã§æŽæ°ãããã³ãã³ãçã®åºåããŒã¿ããµãåŽã®åå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«éä¿¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå ¥è³æ€ç¥æ å ±ã®æç¡ãå€å¥ããå ¥è³æ€ç¥æ å ±ãããã°æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠç²åŸéæçæ°ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããè³çæåºã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ããããŸãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ã«éããŠåæ¢å³æã³ãã³ããå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã確å®ã³ãã³ãçã®è¡šç€ºã³ãã³ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éä¿¡ããããªãã第ïŒå³æã®å€åéå§åŸã«ãããŠãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãâå·Šå³æåã®åæ¢å³æã³ãã³ãâäžå³æåã®åæ¢å³æã³ãã³ãâå³å³æåã®åæ¢å³æã³ãã³ãã®é ã§éåžžåŠçã®éœåºŠïŒã€ãã€ïŒããªãã¡ãïŒïœïœïœ ïœæ¯ã«ïŒã€ãã€ïŒã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ãããå€åæéçµéã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ç¢ºå®ã³ãã³ããéä¿¡ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In addition, when the first symbol display device 41 displays the variation of the first symbol, a display command such as a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, and a confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 214. In addition, after the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, one each time in the normal process in order of the fluctuation pattern command â the left symbol row stop symbol command â the middle symbol row stop symbol command â the right symbol row stop symbol command The command is transmitted once every 4 msec), and the confirmation command is transmitted at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.
次ã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒãïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããšå ±ã«ããããã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãæå€§å€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããéããããïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããããããŠãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æŽæ°å€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è©²åœãããããã¡é åã«æ ŒçŽãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå·Šå³æåãäžå³æååã³å³å³æåã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ããã   Next, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In subsequent step S203, updating of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR of the left symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the right symbol row is executed.
åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°åŠçã説æãããšãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå·Šå³æåã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ã®æŽæ°ææãåŠããå€å¥ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäžå³æåã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®æŽæ°ææãåŠããå€å¥ããããããŠãå·Šå³æåã®æŽæ°ææïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒã§ããã°ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãå·Šå³æåã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ãæŽæ°ããããŸããäžå³æåã®æŽæ°ææïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒã§ããã°ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãäžå³æåã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãæŽæ°ãããããã«ãå³å³æåã®æŽæ°ææïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒãå ±ã«ïŒ®ïŒ¯ïŒã§ããã°ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãå³å³æåã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ²ãæŽæ°ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°ã§ã¯ãååã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ã«ïŒ²ã¬ãžã¹ã¿ã®äžäœïŒãããã®å€ãå ç®ãããšå ±ã«ãã®å ç®çµæãæå€§å€ãè¶ ããå Žåã«ïŒïŒãæžç®ãããã®æŒç®çµæãå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®ä»åå€ãšãããäžèšïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°åŠçã«ããã°ãå·Šå³æåãäžå³æååã³å³å³æåã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ãïŒåã®éåžžåŠçã§ïŒã€ãã€é ã«æŽæ°ãããåã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ã®æŽæ°ææãéãªãããšã¯ãªããããã«ãããéåžžåŠçãïŒåå®è¡ããæ¯ã«å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®ïŒã»ããåãæŽæ°ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   The update process of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in step S301, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the outlier symbol counter CL in the left symbol row. It is determined whether or not it is time to update the symbol counter CM symbol symbol CM. If the update timing of the left symbol row (YES in step S301), the process proceeds to step S303, and the outlier symbol counter CL of the left symbol row is updated. On the other hand, if it is time to update the middle symbol sequence (YES in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304 to update the out-of-middle symbol counter CM. Further, if the update timing of the right symbol sequence (both NO in steps S301 and S302), the process proceeds to step S305, and the outlier symbol counter CR of the right symbol sequence is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S303 to S305, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 20 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, The result of the calculation is out of sync and is used as the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR. According to the CL, CM, and CR update processing, the left symbol row, middle symbol row, and right symbol row outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one normal process. The update times of the values do not overlap. As a result, every time the normal process is executed three times, one set of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäžèšæŽæ°ããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åããã倧åœãã峿ã®çµã¿åããã«ãªã£ãŠãããåŠããå€å¥ãã倧åœãã峿ã®çµã¿åããã§ããå Žåããã®ãŸãŸæ¬åŠçãçµäºããã倧åœãã峿ã®çµã¿åããã§ãªãå Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ããªãŒã峿ã®çµã¿åããã«ãªã£ãŠãããåŠããå€å¥ãããªãŒã峿ã®çµã¿åããã§ããå Žåãããã«ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ããããååŸå€ããªãŒãã§ãããåŠããå€å¥ãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ãååŸå€ããªãŒãã®çµã¿åããã§ããå Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ããã®æã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ååŸå€ããªãŒã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒãã®çµã¿åããã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ããã®æã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åããã倧åœãã峿ã®çµã¿åããã§ãªããäžã€ãªãŒã峿ã®çµã¿åããã§ããªãå ŽåïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒãå ±ã«ïŒ®ïŒ¯ã®å ŽåïŒãããã¯å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åãããå€ã峿ã®çµã¿åããã«ãªã£ãŠããããšã«çžåœãããããå Žåã«ã¯ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ããã®æã®å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®çµã¿åãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å®å šå€ã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽããã   Thereafter, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a jackpot symbol combination. If the symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination, the process is terminated. If it is not a jackpot symbol combination, it is determined in step S307 whether or not it is a reach symbol combination, and if it is a reach symbol combination, in step S308 it is further determined whether or not it is a front-rear reach. To do. If the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear outreach, the process proceeds to step S309, and the combination of out symbol symbols CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / back off, the process proceeds to step S310, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / back out of RAM 503. . If the combination of outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is not a jackpot symbol combination and not a reach symbol combination (when both S306 and S307 are NO), this is a combination of outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR In this case, the process proceeds to step S 311, and the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the complete off symbol buffer of the RAM 503.
å€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®æŽæ°åŠçã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããåä¿¡ããè³çèšæ°ä¿¡å·ãæåºç°åžžä¿¡å·ãèªã¿èŸŒãããã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ãããã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æå€ååŠçãå®è¡ããããã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æå€ååŠçã«ããã倧åœããå€å®ã第ïŒå³æã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã®èšå®ãªã©ãè¡ããããäœãã第ïŒå³æå€ååŠçã®è©³çްã¯åŸè¿°ããã   After update processing of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, in step S204 in FIG. 32, a prize ball count signal and a payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read. Thereafter, in step S205, a first symbol variation process for performing variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 41 is executed. By this first symbol variation process, jackpot determination, setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol, and the like are performed. The details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã倧åœããç¶æ ã§ããå Žåã«ãããŠå¯å€å ¥è³è£ 眮ïŒïŒã®å€§å ¥è³å£ãéæŸåã¯ééããããã®å€§å ¥è³å£ééåŠçãå®è¡ãããããªãã¡ã倧åœããç¶æ ã®ã©ãŠã³ãæ¯ã«å€§å ¥è³å£ãéæŸããå€§å ¥è³å£ã®æå€§éæŸæéãçµéããããåã¯å€§å ¥è³å£ã«éæçãèŠå®æ°ã ãå ¥è³ããããå€å®ããããããŠããããäœããã®æ¡ä»¶ãæç«ãããšå€§å ¥è³å£ãééããããã®ãšããéæçãç¹å®é åãééããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«å€§å ¥è³å£ã®é£ç¶éæŸã蚱容ãããããæå®ã©ãŠã³ãæ°ç¹°ãè¿ãå®è¡ããã   Thereafter, in step S206, a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 35 in the case of the big win state is executed. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round in the big win state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has passed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed. At this time, the continuous winning opening is allowed on condition that the game ball has passed the specific area, and this is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.
ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æïŒäŸãã°ãâãåã¯ãÃãã®æ®é峿ïŒã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ãå®è¡ãããç°¡åã«èª¬æãããšãéæçãã¹ã«ãŒã²ãŒãïŒïŒãééããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ããã®éœåºŠã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ãååŸããããšå ±ã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºéšïŒïŒã«ãŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ã宿œãããããããŠã第ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®æœéžã宿œããã第ïŒå³æã®åœããç¶æ ã«ãªããšãäœåå£ïŒïŒã«ä»éããé»å圹ç©ãæå®æééæŸãããããªã説æã¯çç¥ãããã第ïŒå³æä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒåã³ãªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒãšåæ§ã«ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãã¿ã€ãå²èŸŒã¿åŠçã«ããæŽæ°ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   In step S207, display control of the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol of ââ¯â or âxâ) by the second symbol display device 42 is executed. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time and the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 45 of the second symbol display device 42. Is displayed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the operating port 33 is released for a predetermined time. Although the description is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 36, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã次ã®éåžžåŠçã®å®è¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«è³ã£ããåŠããããªãã¡ååã®éåžžåŠçã®éå§ããæå®æéïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïœïœïœ ïœïŒãçµéãããåŠããå€å¥ããããããŠã次ã®éåžžåŠçã®å®è¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«è³ããŸã§ã®æ®äœæéå ã«ãããŠãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©åã³å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æŽæ°ãç¹°ãè¿ãå®è¡ããïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ãïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããšå ±ã«ããã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãæå€§å€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããéïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããããããŠãä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®æŽæ°å€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è©²åœãããããã¡é åã«æ ŒçŽããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æŽæ°ãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒãïŒã€ã³ã¯ãªã¡ã³ããããšå ±ã«ããããã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãæå€§å€ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«éããéããããïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããããããŠãå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æŽæ°å€ããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è©²åœãããããã¡é åã«æ ŒçŽããã   Thereafter, in step S208, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S209 and S210). That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In step S210, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.
ããã§ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ååŠçã®å®è¡æéã¯éæã®ç¶æ ã«å¿ããŠå€åãããããæ¬¡ã®éåžžåŠçã®å®è¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«è³ããŸã§ã®æ®äœæéã¯äžå®ã§ãªãå€åãããæ ã«ããããæ®äœæéã䜿çšããŠä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ã®æŽæ°ãç¹°ãè¿ãå®è¡ããããšã«ãããä¹±æ°åæå€ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ©ïŒ®ïŒ©ïŒããªãã¡ã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®åæå€ïŒãã©ã³ãã ã«æŽæ°ããããšãã§ããåæ§ã«å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã«ã€ããŠãã©ã³ãã ã«æŽæ°ããããšãã§ããã   Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.
次ã«ãåèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æå€ååŠçãå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒããåç §ããŠèª¬æããã   Next, the first symbol variation process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.
第ïŒå³æå€ååŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä»çŸåšå€§åœããäžã§ãããåŠããå€å¥ããããªãã倧åœããäžã«ã¯ã倧åœããã®éã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã§è¡šç€ºããã倧åœããéæã®æäžãšå€§åœããéæçµäºåŸã®æå®æéã®æäžãšãå«ãŸãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺äžã§ãããåŠããå€å¥ããããããŠã倧åœããäžã§ãªãããã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺äžã§ããªãå Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®äœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ãïŒããã倧ãããåŠããå€å¥ããããããŠã倧åœããäžã§ããããåã¯äœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ãïŒã§ããå Žåããã®ãŸãŸæ¬åŠçãçµäºããã   In the first symbol variation process, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. Note that the jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the first symbol display device 41 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the first symbol display device 41 is displaying the variation of the first symbol. Then, when it is not a big hit and is not displaying the variation of the first symbol, the process proceeds to step S403, and it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls of the first symbol display device 41 is larger than zero. Then, when the jackpot is being hit or the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.
倧åœããäžåã¯ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺äžã®äœãã§ããªãäžã€äœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ïŒïŒã§ããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäœåä¿ççæ°ïŒ®ãïŒæžç®ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããããŒã¿ãã·ãããããåŠçãå®è¡ããããã®ããŒã¿ã·ããåŠçã¯ãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã®ä¿ç第ïŒã第ïŒãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããããŒã¿ãå®è¡ãšãªã¢åŽã«é ã«ã·ãããããåŠçã§ãã£ãŠãä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢âå®è¡ãšãªã¢ãä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢âä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢ãä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢âä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢ãä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢âä¿ç第ïŒãšãªã¢ãšãã£ãå ·åã«åãšãªã¢å ã®ããŒã¿ãã·ãããããã   If neither the big hit or the change in the first symbol is being displayed and if the number N of activated balls is> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, 1 is subtracted from the number N of active suspension balls. In step S405, a process for shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The reserved first area â the execution area, the reserved second area â The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area â the second hold area, the fourth hold area â the third hold area.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®å€åéå§åŠçãå®è¡ãããããã§ãå³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒããçšããŠå€åéå§åŠçã®è©³çްã説æãããšãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã®å®è¡ãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠãã倧åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠå€§åœãããåŠããå€å¥ããã倧åœãããåŠãã¯å€§åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿å€ãšãã®æã ã®ã¢ãŒããšã®é¢ä¿ã«åºã¥ããŠå€å¥ããããåè¿°ããéãéåžžã®äœç¢ºçæã«ã¯å€§åœããä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®æ°å€ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®ãã¡ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒããåœããå€ã§ãããé«ç¢ºçæã«ã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒããåœããå€ã§ããã   Thereafter, in step S406, the first symbol variation start process is executed. Here, the details of the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. In step S501, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. To do. Whether or not the jackpot is determined is based on the relationship between the jackpot random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, â337,673â is a winning value among the numerical values 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and â67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523â at the high probability. "601, 661" is the winning value.
倧åœããã§ãããšå€å¥ãããå Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã®å®è¡ãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠãã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«å¯Ÿå¿ãã峿ãããªãã¡å€§åœãã峿ãå³ç€ºããªãããŒãã«ïŒå€§åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ãšå³æãšã®å¯Ÿå¿é¢ä¿ã衚ãããŒãã«ïŒã«åºã¥ããŠæ±ãããã®å³æã忢峿ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããã®ãšãã倧åœãã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®æ°å€ïŒãïŒïŒã¯ãå šïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãããïŒïŒéãã®å€§åœãã峿ã®äœããã«å¯Ÿå¿ããŠããã忢峿ã³ãã³ãã«ã¯ïŒïŒéãã®å€§åœãã峿ã®äœãããèšå®ãããããããã®å€§åœãã峿ã®ãã¡äºãå®ããããç¹å®å³æã§æã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ä»¥åŸç¢ºå€ç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ããããç¹å®å³æã§ãªã峿ïŒéç¹å®å³æïŒã§æã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ç¢ºå€ç¶æ ã«ç§»è¡ããªãã   If it is determined that the game is a jackpot, in step S502, a table corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, a table not showing the jackpot symbol (value of the jackpot symbol counter C2). And a symbol representing the corresponding relationship between the symbol and the symbol, and the symbol is set as a stop symbol command. At this time, the numbers 0 to 49 of the jackpot symbol counter C2 correspond to any of the 50 jackpot symbols on all five active lines, and any one of the 50 jackpot symbols is set in the stop symbol command. Is done. When these jackpot symbols are gathered with a predetermined specific symbol, the state changes to a probability variation state. However, when the symbols are not specific symbols (non-specific symbols), the probability variation state is not entered.
次ã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã倧åœãã峿ã§åæ¢ãããŸã§ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ããåœè©²å€åãã¿ãŒã³ãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããã®ãšããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿çšãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã確èªãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠããŒãã«ãªãŒããã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããã¬ãã¢ã ãªãŒãçã®ãªãŒãçš®å¥ããã®ä»å€§ãŸããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ãããšå ±ã«ã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠãªãŒãçºçåŸã«æçµåæ¢å³æïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯äžå³æïŒã忢ãããŸã§ã®çµéæéïŒèšãæããã°ãå€å峿æ°ïŒãªã©ãã现ããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ããããªãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æ°å€ãšãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãšã®é¢ä¿ã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®æ°å€ãšåæ¢å³ææéãšã®é¢ä¿ã¯ãããããã«ããŒãã«çã«ããäºãèŠå®ãããŠãããäœããäžèšå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã¯ã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã䜿ããã«ç¬¬ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã ããçšããŠèšå®ããããšãå¯èœã§ããã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã ãã§ãã¿ãŒã³èšå®ãããåã¯äž¡å€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®äž¡å€ã§ãã¿ãŒã³èšå®ãããã¯ããã®éœåºŠã®ç¬¬ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ãéææ¡ä»¶ãªã©ã«å¿ããŠé©å®æ±ºããããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããããã¯ãåŸè¿°ããååŸå€ããªãŒã衚瀺ãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã衚瀺ãå®å šå€ã衚瀺ãè¡ãå Žåã«ãããå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã®èšå®ã§ãåæ§ã§ããã   Next, in step S503, the variation pattern of the first symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed, and the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough types are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. And the elapsed time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (in other words, the number of variable symbols) More detailed pattern variation modes are determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the variation pattern can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Whether to set or to set a pattern with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. The same applies to the setting of the fluctuation pattern in the case of performing front / rear out of reach display, reach display other than front / rear out, and complete out of display described later.
ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§å€§åœããã§ã¯ãªããšå€å¥ãããå Žåã«ã¯ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ãä¿ççæ ŒçŽãšãªã¢ã®å®è¡ãšãªã¢ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠãããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠãªãŒãçºçãåŠããå€å¥ãããªãŒãçºçã®å Žåãããã«ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ãåãããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠååŸå€ããªãŒãã§ãããåŠããå€å¥ãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ããªãŒãä¹±æ°ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒã®å€ã¯ïŒãïŒïŒïŒã®äœããã§ããããã®ãã¡ãïŒïŒïŒããååŸå€ããªãŒãã«è©²åœãããïŒãïŒïŒããååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒãã«è©²åœãããïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒãããªãŒããªãïŒå®å šå€ãïŒã«è©²åœããã   If it is determined in step S501 that the game is not a big hit, it is determined in step S504 whether or not reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In this case, in step S505, it is determined whether the reach is out of front or back based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 0 to 238, of which â0, 1â corresponds to the out-of-front reach and â2-21â corresponds to the reach other than the back-and-forth out- â22 to 238â corresponds to no reach (complete detachment).
ååŸå€ããªãŒãçºçã®å Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ååŸå€ããªãŒã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå·Šã»äžã»å³ã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®åå€ã忢峿ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãååŸå€ããªãŒã衚瀺ã®ããã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ããåœè©²å€åãã¿ãŒã³ãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããã®ãšããåèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ã«ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿çšãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã確èªãã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠããŒãã«ãªãŒããã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããã¬ãã¢ã ãªãŒãçã®ãªãŒãçš®å¥ããã®ä»å€§ãŸããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ãããšå ±ã«ã第ïŒå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠãªãŒãçºçåŸã«æçµåæ¢å³æïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯äžå³æïŒã忢ãããŸã§ã®çµéæéïŒèšãæããã°ãå€å峿æ°ïŒãªã©ãã现ããªå³æå€åæ æ§ã決å®ããã   If front / rear out of reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S506, and the left, middle, and right out of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the front / rear out of reach design buffer of the RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. Also, in step S507, a variation pattern for front / rear out of reach display is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, as in step S503, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The reach type (such as the middle symbol in the present embodiment) is stopped after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 In other words, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as the number of variation symbols) is determined.
ååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒãçºçã®å Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå·Šã»äžã»å³ã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®åå€ã忢峿ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãååŸå€ã以å€ãªãŒã衚瀺ã®ããã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ããåœè©²å€åãã¿ãŒã³ãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããã®ãšããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿çšãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ãããã®ã¯åèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒçãšåæ§ã§ããã   If a reach other than front / rear out occurs, the process proceeds to step S508, and the left, middle, and right outreach counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. To do. In step S509, a variation pattern for reach display other than front / rear deviation is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, as in step S503 and the like.
倧åœããã§ãªããªãŒãã§ããªãå Žåãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å®å šå€ã峿ãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå·Šã»äžã»å³ã®åå€ã峿ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ£ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ²ã®åå€ã忢峿ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå®å šå€ã衚瀺ã®ããã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ããåœè©²å€åãã¿ãŒã³ãå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã«èšå®ããããã®ãšããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ã«ãŠã³ã¿çšãããã¡ã«æ ŒçŽãããŠããå€åçš®å¥ã«ãŠã³ã¿ïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒ£ïŒ³ïŒã®å€ã«åºã¥ããŠå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã決å®ãããã®ã¯åèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒçãšåæ§ã§ãããäžèšã®éã倧åœããæããªãŒãçºçæããªãŒãéçºçæã®ããããã§å³æåæ¢ã³ãã³ãåã³å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãã®èšå®ãå®äºãããšãæ¬åŠçãçµäºããã   If it is neither big hit nor reach, the process proceeds to step S510, and the left, middle, and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the complete off symbol buffer of the RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. In step S511, a variation pattern for complete out-of-range display is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, as in step S503 and the like. As described above, when the setting of the symbol stop command and the variation pattern command is completed at the time of jackpot, at the time of reach occurrence, or at the time of no reach occurrence, this processing is terminated.
å³ïŒïŒã®èª¬æã«æ»ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒããããªãã¡ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺äžã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãå€åæéãçµéãããåŠããå€å¥ããããã®ãšãã第ïŒå³æã®å€åãã¿ãŒã³ã«å¿ããŠåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®å€åæéãæ±ºããããŠããããã®å€åæéãçµéããæã«ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãè¯å®å€å¥ãããããããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã忢峿ã®ç¢ºå®ã®ããã«èšå®ãããŠãã確å®ã³ãã³ããèšå®ãããã®åŸæ¬åŠçãçµäºããã   Returning to the description of FIG. 34, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the variation of the first symbol is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not the variation time has elapsed. At this time, the variation time of the first symbol is determined according to the variation pattern of the first symbol, and when this variation time has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S407. In step S408, a confirmation command set for confirming the stop symbol is set, and then this process is terminated.
次ã«ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããæåºå¶åŸ¡ã«ã€ããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ã¡ã€ã³åŠçã瀺ããããŒãã£ãŒãã§ããããã®ã¡ã€ã³åŠçã¯é»æºæå ¥æã®ãªã»ããã«äŒŽãèµ·åãããã   Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.
ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã黿ºæå ¥ã«äŒŽãåæèšå®åŠçãå®è¡ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ã«äºã決ããããæå®å€ãèšå®ãããšå ±ã«ãå²èŸŒã¿ã¢ãŒããèšå®ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããéä¿¡ãããæåºèš±å¯ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããŸã§åŸ æ©ããããããŠãæåºèš±å¯ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ããæç¹ã§ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã«é²ãã§ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ãèš±å¯ãããšå ±ã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§å€éšå²èŸŒã¿ãã¯ã¿ã®èšå®ãè¡ãã   First, in step S901, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S902, the process waits until a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 271 is received. When the payout permission command is received, the process advances to step S903 to permit RAM access, and in step S904, an external interrupt vector is set.
ãã®åŸãïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é¢ããŠããŒã¿ããã¯ã¢ããã®åŠçãå®è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºè£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«èšããïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠãããåŠããå€å¥ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœã«é»æºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠãããåŠããå€å¥ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ãç®åºããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ããã®ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ã黿ºé®ææã«ä¿åããïŒå€å®å€ãšäžèŽãããåŠããããªãã¡ããã¯ã¢ããã®æå¹æ§ãå€å¥ãããïŒå€å®å€ã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœæ¥é åã¢ãã¬ã¹ã«ããããã§ãã¯ãµã å€ã§ããããªããïŒïŒïŒïŒã®æå®ã®ãšãªã¢ã«æžã蟌ãŸããããŒã¯ãŒããæ£ããä¿åãããŠãããåŠãã«ããããã¯ã¢ããã®æå¹æ§ã倿ããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 513 in the CPU 511. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in the subsequent step S906, it is determined whether or not the power shutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. To do. In step S907, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S908, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.
ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠããã°ãïŒã®åæååŠçïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ç§»è¡ããããŸãã黿ºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠããªãå ŽåããïŒå€å®å€ïŒãã§ãã¯ãµã å€çïŒã«ããããã¯ã¢ããã®ç°åžžã確èªãããå Žåãåæ§ã«ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åæååŠçïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ç§»è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®å šé åãïŒã«ã¯ãªã¢ããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åæååŠçãå®è¡ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµåšèŸºããã€ã¹ã®åæèšå®ãè¡ããšå ±ã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯å²èŸŒã¿èš±å¯ãèšå®ããåŸè¿°ããæåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«ç§»è¡ããã   If the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (steps S915 to S918). Similarly, when the occurrence information of the power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 513 (steps S915 to S918). . That is, in step S915, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S916, initialization processing of the RAM 513 is executed. In step S917, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S918, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.
äžæ¹ãïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒæ¶å»ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãæŒãããŠããªãå Žåã«ã¯ã黿ºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãèšå®ãããŠããããšãåã³ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒå€å®å€ïŒãã§ãã¯ãµã å€çïŒãæ£åžžã§ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãåŸ©é»æã®åŠçïŒé»æºé®æåŸ©æ§æã®åŠçïŒãå®è¡ãããã€ãŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºé®æåã®ã¹ã¿ãã¯ãã€ã³ã¿ã埩垰ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯é»æºé®æã®çºçæ å ±ãã¯ãªã¢ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµåšèŸºããã€ã¹ã®åæèšå®ãè¡ããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯äœ¿çšã¬ãžã¹ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããã¯ã¢ãããšãªã¢ïŒïŒïŒïœãã埩垰ããããããã«ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå²èŸŒã¿èš±å¯ïŒäžèš±å¯ã黿ºé®æåã®ç¶æ ã«åŸ©åž°ãããåŸã黿ºé®æåã®çªå°ãžæ»ãã   On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when power is restored). That is, in step S909, the stack pointer prior to power shutdown is restored, and in step S910, the information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared. In step S911, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S912, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in steps S913 and S914, the interrupt permission / non-permission is returned to the state before the power shutdown, and then the address before the power shutdown is returned.
次ã«ãæåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã®æµããå³ïŒïŒã®ãããŒãã£ãŒããåç §ããªãã説æããã   Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
å³ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããã®ã³ãã³ããååŸããè³çã®ç·è³çåæ°ãèšæ¶ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãçºå°å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠçºå°èš±å¯ã®èšå®ãè¡ãããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãç¶æ 埩垰ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒããã§ãã¯ããŠãç¶æ 埩垰åäœéå§ãšå€å®ããå Žåã«ç¶æ 埩垰åäœãå®è¡ããã   In FIG. 40, in step S1001, a command from the main controller 271 is acquired, and the total number of prize balls is stored. In step S1002, the launch control apparatus 312 is set for launch permission. In step S1003, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäžç¿ïŒïŒã®ç¶æ ã®å€åã«å¿ããŠäžç¿æºã¿ã³ç¶æ åã¯äžç¿æºã¿ã³è§£é€ç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ãããããªãã¡ãäžç¿æºã¿ã³ã¹ã€ããã®æ€åºä¿¡å·ã«ããäžç¿ïŒïŒã®æºã¿ã³ç¶æ ãå€å¥ããäžç¿æºã¿ã³ã«ãªã£ãæãäžç¿æºã¿ã³ç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ããäžç¿æºã¿ã³ã§ãªããªã£ãæãäžç¿æºã¿ã³è§£é€ç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ããããŸããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãã¿ã³ã¯çã®ç¶æ ã®å€åã«å¿ããŠã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãç¶æ åã¯ã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãè§£é€ç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ãããããªãã¡ãã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãã¹ã€ããã®æ€åºä¿¡å·ã«ããã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãç¶æ ãå€å¥ããã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãã«ãªã£ãæãã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ããã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãã§ãªããªã£ãæãã¿ã³ã¯çç¡ãè§£é€ç¶æ ã®èšå®ãå®è¡ããã   Thereafter, in step S1004, setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower pan 16. That is, when the lower pan 16 is determined to be full based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan is full , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S1005, setting of a tank ball absence state or a tank ball absence release state is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch. When there is no tank ball, the tank ball no state setting is executed. Perform configuration.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå ±ç¥ããç¶æ ã®æç¡ãå€å¥ããå ±ç¥ããç¶æ ãæãå Žåã«ã¯æåºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«èšããïŒã»ã°ã¡ã³ãã«ããå ±ç¥ããã   Thereafter, in step S1006, the presence / absence of the state to be notified is determined. If there is a state to be notified, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 is notified.
ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãè³çæåºã®åŠçãå®è¡ããããã®å Žåãè³çã®æåºäžå¯ç¶æ ã§ãªãäžã€åèšã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§èšæ¶ããç·è³çåæ°ãïŒã§ãªããã°ïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå ±ã«ïŒ®ïŒ¯ïŒãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããåŸè¿°ããè³çå¶åŸ¡åŠçãéå§ããããŸããè³çã®æåºäžå¯ç¶æ åã¯ç·è³çåæ°ãïŒã§ããã°ïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã®äœãããïŒãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è²žçæåºã®åŠçã«ç§»è¡ããã   In steps S1007 to S1009, prize ball payout processing is executed. In this case, if the prize ball is not in a payout disabled state and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not 0 (both NO in steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to step S1009 and a prize to be described later shown in FIG. Start the ball control process. If the prize ball is not paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the lending / paying process in steps S1010 to S1012.
貞çæåºã®åŠçã«ãããŠã貞çã®æåºäžå¯ç¶æ ã§ãªãäžã€ã«ãŒããŠãããããã®è²žçæåºèŠæ±ãåä¿¡ããŠããã°ïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒããïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããåŸè¿°ãã貞çå¶åŸ¡åŠçãéå§ããããŸãã貞çã®æåºäžå¯ç¶æ åã¯è²žçæåºèŠæ±ãåä¿¡ããŠããªããã°ïŒã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒãåã¯ïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒãåŸç¶ã®çæãã®åŠçãå®è¡ããã   In the lending process, if the lending is not disabled and a lending request is received from the card unit (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and is shown in FIG. The ball rental control process described later is started. Further, if a rental ball cannot be paid out or a rental ball payout request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), subsequent ball removal processing is executed.
ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãç¶æ 埩垰ã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒããã§ãã¯ããŠçæãäžå¯ç¶æ ã§ãªãããšãåã³çæãåäœéå§ã§ãªãããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åããçæãåŠçãå®è¡ãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãçè©°ãŸãç¶æ ã§ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãã€ãã¬ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ïŒãã€ãã¢ãŒã¿å¶åŸ¡ïŒãå®è¡ããããã®åŸãæ¬æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã®å é ã«æ»ãã   In step S1013, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In subsequent step S1014, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process.
ããã§ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãè³çå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠè³çã®æåºãå®è¡ãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ããããæåºå転ã»ã³ãµã®æ€åºçµæã«ããå€å¥ãããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ãªããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠãªãã©ã€åŠçãå®è¡ãããšå ±ã«æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 41, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the prize ball payout. In subsequent step S1102, whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.
ãŸããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã«è¡ãããŠãããåŠããæåºã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããã®æ€åºçµæã«ããå€å¥ãããéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã§ãªããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠãªãã©ã€åŠçãå®è¡ãããšå ±ã«æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1105 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process of FIG.
ããã«ãéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã§ããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããã«ããéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ãæ°ãç·è³çåæ°ã«éããŠæåºãå®äºãããåŠããå€å¥ãããæåºãå®äºããŠããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   If the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout has been completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.
ãŸããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºã貞çå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«ãããŠãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠè²žçã®æåºãå®è¡ãããç¶ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ããããæåºå転ã»ã³ãµã®æ€åºçµæã«ããå€å¥ãããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ãªããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠãªãã©ã€åŠçãå®è¡ãããšå ±ã«æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   In the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 42, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the lending ball. In the subsequent step S1202, it is determined from the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1203 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.
ãŸããæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åè»¢ãæ£åžžã§ããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã«è¡ãããŠãããåŠããæåºã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããã®æ€åºçµæã«ããå€å¥ãããéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã§ãªããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœãé§åãããŠãªãã©ã€åŠçãå®è¡ãããšå ±ã«æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the game ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1205 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.
ããã«ãéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ããæ£åžžã§ããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãæåºã«ãŠã³ãã¹ã€ããã«ããéæçã®ã«ãŠã³ãæ°ãæå®ã®è²žçåæ°ïŒïŒïŒåïŒã«éããŠæåºãå®äºãããåŠããå€å¥ãããæåºãå®äºããŠããã°ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§æåºã¢ãŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïœã®åæ¢åŠçãå®è¡ãããã®åŸãå³ïŒïŒã®æåºå¶åŸ¡åŠçã«æ»ãã   Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.
次ã«ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ã®å ·äœçæé ã«ã€ããŠæŠèª¬ãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡åŠçã瀺ããããŒãã£ãŒãã§ãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãæé ã«åŸã£ãŠäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããæäŸãããåçš®ã³ãã³ããåŠçãã€ã€ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ãå®è¡ããã   Next, a specific procedure of display control by the display control device 214 will be outlined. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the CPU 521 in the display control device 214. The CPU 521 executes display control of the first symbol display device 41 while processing various commands provided from the main control device 271 according to the procedure shown in FIG.
å³ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå ãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãã衚瀺ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããåŠããå€å¥ãããã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒãã®å Žåãäœããã®ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããŸã§åŸ æ©ããããããŠã衚瀺ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããšãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ããã®è¡šç€ºã³ãã³ãã®å 容ãã¯ãŒã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ ŒçŽãããç¶ããŠã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãã¯ãŒã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ ŒçŽãããæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããïŒïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿããå éšã³ãã³ããçæããçã®åçš®ã®æŒç®åŠçãéå§ãããå éšã³ãã³ãã¯ãå€å衚瀺ã®éå§ããçµäºãŸã§ã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæŒåºãæå®ããããã®ã³ãã³ãã§ãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«æ ŒçŽãããæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãã®éœåºŠå¿ èŠãªå éšã³ãã³ããçæããããããã«ãããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒããã®æä»€ïŒå éšã³ãã³ãïŒã«å¿ããŠæç»åŠçãè¡ãã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã§ã®å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéå§ããããŸããã®ãšããïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã®éœåºŠã®è¡šç€ºæŒåºã«åæãããªãããé³å£°é¡ãã©ã³ãé¡ãé§åããããã®å¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãåäœãããããã®å¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠéä¿¡ãããããã«ãããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒããã®å¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åŸã£ãŠé³å£°é¡ãã©ã³ãé¡ã«å ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãé§åãããããªãã衚瀺ã³ãã³ããäžæŠåä¿¡ãããšãã®åŸã«ç¢ºå®ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããŸã§ã®éãïŒïŒïŒãšïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒãšã®ååã®ããšã«å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãç¶ç¶ãããããã®éãïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ãšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãã³ãã³ãåä¿¡åŠçãšã䞊è¡ããŠè¡ããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããå¶åŸ¡ãåæ§ã§ããã   In FIG. 43, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether a display command has been received from the main controller 271 or not. When step S1301 is NO, it waits until it receives some command. When the display command is received, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the contents of the display command are stored in the work RAM 523. In step S1303, various arithmetic processes such as generating an internal command for the VDP 524 are started based on the information stored in the work RAM 523. The internal command is a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, and a necessary internal command is generated each time based on information stored in the work RAM 523. As a result, the VDP 524 performs a drawing process in response to a command (internal command) from the CPU 521 and starts the variable display of symbols on the first symbol display device 41. At this time, the CPU 521 outputs a control command for driving voices and lamps and a control command for operating the right door 171 and the left door 172 while synchronizing with the display effects at each time. Send to. As a result, the sound lamp control device 272 drives the right door 171 and the left door 172 in addition to the sounds and lamps in accordance with the control command from the CPU 521. It should be noted that the symbol variation display is continued under the cooperation of the CPU 521 and the VDP 524 until the display command is received once until the confirmation command is received thereafter. Meanwhile, the CPU 521 performs the control of the VDP 524 and the command reception process shown in FIG. 43 in parallel. The control in the sound lamp control device 272 is the same.
ãã®åŸãã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãã確å®ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ãããåŠããå€å¥ããããããŠã確å®ã³ãã³ããåä¿¡ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ã¹ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒã«é²ã¿ãïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåæ¢å³æã§ã®ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºãæç€ºãããããã«ãããïŒïŒïŒã¯å€åããŠãã峿ã忢峿ã§ç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºããããããããŠã峿ã®å€åéå§ããå€å忢ïŒç¢ºå®è¡šç€ºïŒãŸã§ã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºåŠçãè¡ãããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã峿ã®å€åéå§æåã³å€å忢æã«äž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããã³ã³ãããŒã«ãåãããããã®éã®å³æã®ç¶ç¶çãªå€åã«ã€ããŠã¯ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒå ã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒã«ããèªç«çãªç»åå¶åŸ¡ã«ãã£ãŠæ ä¿ãããã   Thereafter, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from main controller 271. Then, the process proceeds to step S1305 on the condition that the confirmation command has been received, and instructs the VDP 524 to confirm the display with the stop symbol. As a result, the VDP 524 confirms and displays the changed symbol as a stop symbol. In this way, a series of display processes from the start of pattern change to the stop of change (determined display) are performed. The display control device 214 is controlled by the main control device 271 at the time of starting and stopping the change of the symbol, but the continuous change of the symbol during that time is a self-supporting image by the CPU 521 and the VDP 524 in the display control device 214. Secured by control.
ããã§ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãŠçæãããå éšã³ãã³ãã®æŠç¥ã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒïŒãçšããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ãããã°ã©ã ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšæ¶ãããŠããå éšã³ãã³ãã®åºæ¬æ§é ãç€ºãæŠç¥å³ã§ããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãã衚瀺ã³ãã³ãïŒå€åãã¿ãŒã³ã³ãã³ãïŒãåä¿¡ãããšããã®è¡šç€ºã³ãã³ãã«å¿ããŠå éšã³ãã³ããæ±ºå®ããåœè©²å éšã³ãã³ãã«å«ãŸããå€åå¶åŸ¡ããŒã¿ãé æ¬¡åºåããã   Here, an outline of an internal command generated by the display control device 214 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram showing the basic structure of internal commands stored in the program ROM 522. As shown in FIG. When the CPU 521 of the display control device 214 receives a display command (variation pattern command) from the main control device 271, the CPU 521 determines an internal command according to the display command and sequentially outputs variation control data included in the internal command.
å³ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå éšã³ãã³ãã®å€åå¶åŸ¡ããŒã¿ã¯ã倧å¥ããŠéåžžå€åããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒãšãããŒãã«ãªãŒãããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒãšãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒãšãæããŠãªããå€åéå§åŸã¯ãå ãéåžžå€åããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒã®åããŒã¿ãé æ¬¡åºåããããã®åŸãããŒãã«ãªãŒãçºçæã«ã¯ããŒãã«ãªãŒãããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒã®åããŒã¿ãé æ¬¡åºåãããã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãçºçæã«ã¯ã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããŒã¿çŸ€ïŒ€ïŒã®åããŒã¿ãé æ¬¡åºåãããã詳ããã¯ã峿ã®éåžžå€åã«éããéåžžå€åèæ¯è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ããã£ã©ã¯ã¿è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ãéåžžå€å广é³ããŒã¿ãéåžžå€åããŒã¿ãéåžžå€åããŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïŒã»ã»ã»ïœãèŠå®ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§é 次åºåããããããŒãã«ãªãŒãçºçæã«ã¯ãããŒãã«ãªãŒãèæ¯è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ãããŒãã«ãªãŒã广é³ããŒã¿ãããŒãã«ãªãŒãããŒã¿ãããŒãã«ãªãŒãããŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒïŒã»ã»ã»ïœãèŠå®ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§é 次åºåããããã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãçºçæã«ã¯ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãèæ¯è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒã广é³ããŒã¿ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããŒã¿ã圹ç©ããŒã¿ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããŒã¿ïŒïŒïŒãäºåéžæããŒã¿ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãããŒã¿ïŒïŒã»ã»ã»ïœãèŠå®ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§é 次åºåããããäžèšåããŒã¿ã®åºåã¯ãçµäºããŒã¿ãåºåããããŸã§ç¶ç¶ãããããªããäºåéžæããŒã¿ã¯ãäºåçšä¹±æ°ã«ããæœéžçµæã«åºã¥ããŠåºåãããã   In FIG. 44, the fluctuation control data of the internal command is roughly divided into a normal fluctuation data group D1, a normal reach data group D2, and a super reach data group D3. Then, each data of the normal reach data group D2 is sequentially output when a normal reach occurs, and each data of the super reach data group D3 is sequentially output when a super reach occurs. Specifically, during normal variation of a symbol, normal variation background display data, character display data, normal variation sound effect data, normal variation LED data, normal variation data 1, 2,... N are sequentially output at a specified timing. . When normal reach occurs, normal reach background display data, normal reach sound effect data, normal reach LED data, normal reach data 1, 2,... N are sequentially output at a prescribed timing. When super reach occurs, super reach background display data, super reach sound effect data, super reach LED data, accessory data, super reach data 1 and 2, notice selection data, super reach data 3,. Are output sequentially. The output of each data is continued until end data is output. The notice selection data is output based on a lottery result based on a notice random number.
ãããå Žåãèæ¯è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ããã£ã©ã¯ã¿è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ãéåžžå€åããŒã¿ãåãªãŒãããŒã¿åã³äºåéžæããŒã¿ã¯ïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒ°ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåºåãããèæ¯è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ããã£ã©ã¯ã¿è¡šç€ºããŒã¿ãäºåéžæããŒã¿ã«åºã¥ããŠããã®éœåºŠè©²åœããèæ¯ããã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãäºå峿ã衚瀺ç»é¢ã«è¡šç€ºãããããŸããéåžžå€åããŒã¿ãåãªãŒãããŒã¿ã«åºã¥ããŠããã®éœåºŠè©²åœããå€åãã¿ãŒã³ãèŠå®ã®æéã«ãŒã«ïŒå€åé床ãæéçïŒã«å³ããŠè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«è¡šç€ºãããããã®ä»ã广é³ããŒã¿ãããŒã¿ã圹ç©ããŒã¿ã¯é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåºåãããåããŒã¿ã«åºã¥ããŠãé³å£°é¡ãã©ã³ãé¡ïŒïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€ïŒã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããè£å©æŒåºãé©å®è¡ãããã   In such a case, background display data, character display data, normal variation data, reach data, and notice selection data are output to the VDP 524, and based on the background display data, character display data, and notice selection data, the corresponding background each time. , Characters and notice symbols are displayed on the display screen. Further, based on the normal fluctuation data and each reach data, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is displayed on the display screen in accordance with a prescribed time rule (fluctuation speed, time, etc.). In addition, sound effect data, LED data, and accessory data are output to the sound lamp control device 272, and based on each data, auxiliary effects by sounds, lamps (LED), right door 171 and left door 172 are provided. As appropriate.
次ã«ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ã«ãããŠããªãŒãçºçã«éããŠå®éã«ã©ã®ãããªè¡šç€ºãè¡ãããããã«è¡šç€ºç»é¢äžã®å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãã©ã®ããã«åäœããããå ·äœäŸãæããŠèª¬æãããå³ïŒïŒãå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãåçš®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ã瀺ã衚瀺äŸã瀺ããããã§ã¯ããã¿ãŒã³ïŒããã¿ãŒã³ïŒãŸã§ïŒçš®é¡ã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãäŸç€ºããŠããããã®ãã¡ãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã¯ããŒãã«ãªãŒããšç§°ããããªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ããããã¿ãŒã³ïŒããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã¯ã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒããšç§°ããããªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ããã   Next, in the display control by the display control device 214, a specific example will be given of what display is actually performed when reach occurs and how the right door 171 and the left door 172 operate on the display screen. explain. 45 to 50 show display examples showing the display screens of the first symbol display device 41 in various reach patterns. Here, six types of reach patterns from pattern 1 to pattern 6 are illustrated. Of these, pattern 1 is a reach pattern called normal reach, and patterns 2 to pattern 6 are reach patterns called super reach. is there.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ãããããã«äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããããã®å Žåã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ãããŠèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããæçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžæãšã»ãŒåæ§ã«è¡ãããã   In the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 45, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed, and the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas. In this case, the background screen in the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the variable display of the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is performed in substantially the same manner as in the normal state.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ãããã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒãšãçšããŠãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ããªãŒãæŒåºçšã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯è±ã³ããããã¯ã«ããå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãçŸãããã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ ã§æçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ããããæçµåæ¢å³æã¯ãèšåŒµåã³åçž®ãç¹°ãè¿ããªããå€åããã   In the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both closed, but the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are removed, and the center of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed. A reach effect is performed using the area (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29). In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a girl character with petals in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is displayed. ) Is displayed. The final stop pattern fluctuates while repeating expansion and contraction.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒãéããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ãšãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒãšãçšããŠãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ããªãŒãæŒåºçšã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯ã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»ã«ä¹ã£ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãçŸãããã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ ã§æçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ããããæçµåæ¢å³æã¯ãã¯ã¬ãŒã³ã§æã¡äžãããããªã©ãããªããå€åããã   In the pattern 3 shown in FIG. 47, the right door 171 is opened and the left door 172 is closed. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and the right area and the center area of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (first and third notice areas Rs1, Rs3 described in FIG. 29). And reach production. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character riding a crane truck in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is displayed. ) Is displayed. The final stop symbol changes while being lifted by a crane.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒãéããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ãšãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å·ŠåŽé ååã³äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒãšãçšããŠãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ããªãŒãæŒåºçšã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯ã³ã³ãã¢ãæäœããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãçŸãããã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ ã§æçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ããããæçµåæ¢å³æã¯ãå ã ã®å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å·ŠåŽé ååã³äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒã§ã³ã³ãã¢ã«ä¹ããããŠæšªæ¹åã«ç§»åããªããå€åããã   In the pattern 4 shown in FIG. 48, the right door 171 is closed and the left door 172 is opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and the left area and the center area of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (second and third notice areas Rs2 and Rs3 described in FIG. 29). And reach production. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character who operates the conveyor in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) appears in that display state. Is displayed. The final stop symbol fluctuates while being moved in the horizontal direction on the conveyor in the left side region and the central region (second and third notice regions Rs2 and Rs3 described in FIG. 29) of the original sub display region Rs.
å³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãå
±ã«éããç¶æ
ãšãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœå
šäœãšãçšããŠãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ããªãŒãæŒåºçšã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯æšæ§ãæã£ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãšãããèŠã€ããå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãçŸãããã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ
ã§æçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ããããæçµåæ¢å³æã¯ãäžããäžãžãšç§»åããããã«ïŒã€ãã€æšæ§ã§æ®Žæãããªããå€åããã
æåŸã«ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãå
±ã«éããç¶æ
ãšãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœå
šäœãšãçšããŠãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ããªãŒãæŒåºçšã®ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒå³ã§ã¯æšæ§ãæã£ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒãçŸãããã®è¡šç€ºç¶æ
ã§æçµåæ¢å³æïŒäžå³æåã®å³æïŒã®å€å衚瀺ãè¡ããããç¹ã«ããããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ãéåžžæã®ïŒã©ã€ã³ãããå¢ããããŠããã倧åœããç¶æ
ã«ç§»è¡ããæåŸ
床ãé«ããããŠãããæçµåæ¢å³æã¯ãäžããäžãžãšç§»åããããã«ïŒã€ãã€æšæ§ã§æ®Žæãããªããå€åããã
In the pattern 5 shown in FIG. 49, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character with a mallet and a girl character staring at it) appears, and the final stop pattern is displayed in that state. The change display of (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is performed. The final stop symbol moves from top to bottom and fluctuates while being beaten one by one with a mallet.
Finally, in the pattern 6 shown in FIG. 50, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character with a wooden mallet in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) appears in that display state. ) Is displayed. In particular, in the pattern 6, the number of effective lines is increased from the normal five lines, and the degree of expectation for shifting to the big hit state is increased. The final stop symbol moves from top to bottom and fluctuates while being beaten one by one with a mallet.
次ã«ãäžèšåãã¿ãŒã³ïŒããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«ã€ããŠã峿ã®å€åãæç³»åçã«å³ç€ºããªãããã詳ãã説æããããªãã以äžã®èª¬æã§ã¯äŸ¿å®äžãåè¿°ããäž»å³æãåã ã«ä»ãããæ°åçªå·ã§èšè¿°ããããšãšããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãããããïŒã峿ããïŒã峿ããïŒã峿ãã»ã»ã»ãïŒã峿ãšèšè¿°ããããŸããå·Šå³ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒã«äžæŠåæ¢ããäž»å³æãåäžã§ããå Žåããã®å·Šå³æãšå³å³æãšãçµãã ã©ã€ã³ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãšèšè¿°ããããŸãå¿ èŠã«å¿ããŠãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã峿åïŒãïŒã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒçã®çšèªãçšããããšãšããã   Next, the super reach of each of the patterns 2 to 6 will be described in more detail while showing the change of the symbols in time series. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the above-described main symbols will be described by numerical numbers assigned to them. Specifically, â0â symbol, â1â symbol, â2â symbol,. 9 âDescribe as a symbol. Further, when the main symbols once stopped in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are the same, a line connecting the left symbol and the right symbol is described as a reach line. If necessary, the display screen G, the main display area Rm, the sub display area Rs, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the first notice area Rs1, the second notice area Rs2, and the third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. And other terms will be used.
åèšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æããã   The reach pattern of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes shown in FIGS.
ãŸãïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒäžã§ãªãŒããçºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠãããããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããå³äžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒåã³å·Šäžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããããªãŒãçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ãããŠèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããäžå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžå€åãšåæ§ã«è¡ãããã   First, in (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the change display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach on the reach lines La1 and La2 is temporarily stopped. Occurs. In the reach line La1, the left and right symbols are â1â symbols, and in the reach line La2, the left and right symbols are â0â symbols. These reach lines La1 and La2 correspond to the right rising line L4 and the left rising line L5 described with reference to FIG. Both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed, and the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred. At this stage, the background screen in the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbol is performed in the same manner as the normal change.
ãã®åŸãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åãšãçšããŠæå®ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åãçµ±åããããã«ããŠæ¡åŒµãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ãè±ã³ããããã¯ã«ããå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã衚瀺ãããããŸããïŒïœïŒ,ïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æã
ãäžå³æã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã®äº€å·®ããäœçœ®ã«ãŠèšåŒµåã³åçž®ãç¹°ãè¿ããªããæé ã«å€å衚瀺ãããããããŠãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æããïŒãåã¯ãïŒã峿ã«ãŠåæ¢ã確å®è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãåèšå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããªããäžèšã®ãããªã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«çºå±ããŠããæçµåæ¢å³æãåœããå³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒãåã¯ãïŒã峿ïŒã«ãŠåæ¢ããªãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ãåèšå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããéçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã
Thereafter, as shown in (b), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the central area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from the normal time, and the girl character with the petals in the background is displayed. Further, as shown in (b) and (c), the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is variably displayed in ascending order while repeating expansion and contraction at the position where the reach line La1 and the reach line La2 intersect. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the â0â or â1â symbol and is displayed in a fixed manner, the girl character is notified that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, â0â or â1â symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the girl character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.
次ã«ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æããã   Next, the reach pattern of pattern 3 shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes shown in FIGS.
ïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒäžã§ãªãŒããçºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠããã該ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žã«ããããªãŒãçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   In (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the left and right symbol change display is temporarily stopped, and reach occurs on the reach line Lb1. . In the reach line Lb1, the left and right symbols are â4â symbols, and the reach line Lb1 corresponds to the lower line L3 described in FIG. When the reach display occurs, the boy displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.
ããã§ãå³ç€ºã®ããã«æ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã§ãªãŒã衚瀺ããªãããå Žåãå·Šå³ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒã«ãããŠãïŒã峿ã¯ãªãŒã衚瀺ã®å¯Ÿè±¡å³æãšãªããããã以å€ã®å³æã¯ãªãŒã衚瀺ã®å¯Ÿè±¡ãšãªããªããããã§ããªãŒãçºçæã«ã¯ããªãŒå¯Ÿè±¡å€ã®å³æã«é¢ããŠåéæåã®åŠçãæœãããïŒå³ã§ã¯ãïŒã峿以å€ã®ãïŒã峿ããïŒã峿ãè±ã³ã圢ç¶ã®å¯å³æã«å¯ŸããŠåéæåã®åŠçãæœãããŠããïŒãããã«ããããªãŒã衚瀺以å€ã®å³æãèè²ã§ãŒããããšè¡šç€ºãããã®ã«å¯ŸãããªãŒãè¡šç€ºå³æã匷調衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããªãã説æã¯çç¥ããããåèšå³ïŒïŒã®äºäŸã«ãããŠïŒïœïŒã®ããã«ã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã§ãªãŒã衚瀺ãããå ŽåããªãŒã衚瀺ãšã¯ç¡é¢ä¿ãªå³æïŒãã®å Žåã¯å¯å³æïŒã«ã€ããŠã¯ãã¯ãåéæåã®åŠçãæœãããŠãããåŸè¿°ããä»ã®ãªãŒãã«ã€ããŠãåæ§ã§ããã   Here, when the reach display is performed on the horizontal line as shown in the figure, in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the symbol â4â is the symbol for reach display, but the other symbols are not the targets for reach display. . Therefore, when reach occurs, translucent processing is applied to symbols that are not subject to Lee (in the figure, â3â symbols other than â4â symbols, â5â symbols, and sub-patterns with petal shape). Is being processed). As a result, the symbols other than the reach display are displayed in a light color and blurred, whereas the reach display symbols are highlighted. In addition, although explanation is omitted, in the case of FIG. 51, when the reach display is performed with the cross line as shown in (a), the symbols that are unrelated to the reach display (in this case, the sub-design) are still translucent. Processing has been applied. The same applies to other reach described later.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã峿ïŒïŒïŒãæšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®ãšãã峿ïŒïŒïŒã¯æšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãããããšã§éæŸããããã®åŠãåäœãããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«ã¯ã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»ã衚瀺ããããïŒïœïŒåã³ïŒïœïŒã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®èæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããäžå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžå€åãšã»ãŒåæ§ã«è¡ãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããã   Thereafter, as shown in (b), the boy character strikes the right door 171 with a mallet. At this time, the right door 171 operates as if it is opened by being hit with a wooden mallet, and a crane truck is displayed in the right side area of the sub display area Rs (the first notice area Rs1 described in FIG. 29). Is done. At the stage of (a) and (b), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbols is performed in substantially the same manner as the normal change. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é ååã³å³åŽé åãšãçšããŠæå®ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é ååã³å³åŽé åãçµ±åããããã«ããŠæ¡åŒµãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åã«è¡šç€ºãããŠããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»ãæäœããæ§ã衚瀺ãããããŸããæçµåæ¢å³æããäžå³æã¯ãç°ãªãäž»å³æãïŒé¢ãã€ã«ä»ãããæšç®±ãã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»ã«æã¡äžããããŠå転ããããã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»åæ¹ã«æãåºãããŠè»¢ãåã£ããããããšã§å€å衚瀺ãããããããŠãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æããïŒã峿ã«ãŠåæ¢ã確å®è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãã¯ã¬ãŒã³è»ã«ä¹ã£ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããªããäžèšã®ãããªã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«çºå±ããŠããæçµåæ¢å³æãåœããå³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒã峿ïŒã«ãŠåæ¢ããªãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããéçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   Thereafter, in (c), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the center area and the right area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area and the right area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed to operate the crane vehicle. In addition, the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is variably displayed when a wooden box with different main symbols attached to each side is lifted and rotated by a crane truck, or thrown forward and rolled around the crane truck. The Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the symbol â4â and is displayed in a fixed manner, the boy character riding on the crane vehicle notifies that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, â4â symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the boy character does not generate a big hit. Informed.
次ã«ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æããã   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 4 shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d).
ïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒäžã§ãªãŒããçºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠããã該ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããã®ãšãããªãŒã衚瀺ãšãªããªãã£ãå·Šå³ã®å³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒãããïŒã峿ã«å¯ŸããŠã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããããªãŒãçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   In (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the left and right symbols change display is temporarily stopped, and reach occurs on the reach line Lc1. . In the reach line Lc1, the left and right symbols are â9â symbols, and the reach line Lc1 corresponds to the upper line L1 described in FIG. At this time, the left and right symbols that have not reached reach display (in this example, â0â and â8â symbols are subjected to translucency processing. When reach display occurs, the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed. The boy character displayed in (third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. 29) notifies that a reach has occurred.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãæšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãæŒåºãè¡ãããããã®ãšããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯æšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãããããšã§éæŸããããã®åŠãåäœãããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«ã¯ã³ã³ãã¢ã衚瀺ããããïŒïœïŒåã³ïŒïœïŒã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®èæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããäžå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžå€åãšã»ãŒåæ§ã«è¡ãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããã   Thereafter, as shown in (b), the boy character strikes the left door 172 with a mallet. At this time, the left door 172 operates as if it is opened by being struck by a wooden mallet, and a conveyor is displayed in the left side area of the sub display area Rs (second notice area Rs2 described in FIG. 29). The At the stage of (a) and (b), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbols is performed in substantially the same manner as the normal change. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é ååã³å·ŠåŽé åãšãçšããŠæå®ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é ååã³å·ŠåŽé åãçµ±åããããã«ããŠæ¡åŒµãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åã«è¡šç€ºãããŠããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãã³ã³ãã¢ãæäœããæ§ã衚瀺ãããããŸããæçµåæ¢å³æããäžå³æã¯ãå€å衚瀺ãããäœçœ®ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®äžå€®éšããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åãšå·ŠåŽé åãšã䜵ããé åãžãšå€åããã³ã³ãã¢ã«ä¹ã£ãŠæšªæ¹åãžäœéç§»åããããé«éç§»åããããããªããå€å衚瀺ãããããããŠãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æããïŒã峿ã«ãŠåæ¢ã確å®è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãã³ã³ãã¢ãæäœããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããªããäžèšã®ãããªã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«çºå±ããŠããæçµåæ¢å³æãåœããå³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒã峿ïŒã«ãŠåæ¢ããªãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããéçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   Thereafter, in (c), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the center area and the left area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area and the left area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed to operate the conveyor. In addition, in the middle symbol as the final stop symbol, the variable display position changes from the central portion of the main display region Rm to the region that combines the central region of the sub display region Rs and the left region, and rides on the conveyor in the horizontal direction. Fluctuation is displayed while moving at a low speed or moving at a high speed. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the â9â symbol and is displayed in a fixed manner, the boy character operating the conveyor notifies that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, â9â symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the boy character does not generate a big hit. Informed.
次ã«ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æããã   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 5 shown in FIG. 49 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 54 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 55 (a) to (d).
å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ãããã®ã®ãåæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã®å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã¯çžç°ãªã峿ãšãªã£ãŠãããããªãã¡ããã®æ®µéã§ã¯ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãïŒäžã«ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã¯çºçããŠããªããæ ã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ãããã®éæåã§ã¯å€§åœãããšãªããªããã®ãããªè¡šç€ºãè¡ãããŠãããäœããã®çŽåŸã«ã¯ãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãäž¡æ³ãæ¡ãç· ãããšãšãã«ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿åã³äžå³æã®åŸæ¹ã«çã衚瀺ãããã   In FIG. 54 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the left and right symbols change display temporarily stopped, but the left on each effective line. The design and the right design are different designs. That is, at this stage, no reach line is generated on the effective lines L1 to L5. Therefore, in the central area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. 29), a display is performed as if the boy character does not win a big hit in this game time. However, immediately after that, as shown in (b), the boy character squeezes both fists, and a flame is displayed behind the boy character and the middle symbol.
ãããŠãïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã®èåŸã«çãäžããçã®ç±é¢šã«ãã£ãŠå¹ãé£ã°ããããåŠãå·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããã®å·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«ãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒã«ãããŠåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®èåŸã«é ããŠããäž»å³æãçŸããããã®ãšããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åã«ã¯ãå·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®åšææ§ã«åããäž»å³æã衚瀺ãããŠãããéé ã«é åãããŠããå·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯ãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããæé ã«é åãããŠããå³å³æåïŒã§ã¯ãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããããã®çµæãå·Šå³ã®ãïŒã峿ã«ãŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãçºçããå·Šå³ã®ãïŒã峿ã«ãŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãçºçããããªããïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®èæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããäžå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžæãšã»ãŒåæ§ã«è¡ãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããã   Then, in (c), the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as if blown away by the hot air of the flame that burns behind the boy character. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs, the main symbols in accordance with the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. In the left symbol row Z1 arranged in descending order, the symbol â7â is displayed. A symbol â6â appears above the symbol â7â, and a symbol â7â appears above the symbol â6â in the right symbol column Z3 arranged in ascending order. As a result, the reach line Ld1 is generated in the left and right â7â symbols, and the reach line Ld2 is generated in the left and right â6â symbols. In the stages (a) to (c), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the middle symbols are displayed in the same manner as in the normal state. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãçšããŠæå®ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å šäœãçµ±åããããã«ããŠæ¡åŒµãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åã«è¡šç€ºãããŠããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãæšæ§ãæã€å§¿ãšãããèŠã€ããå°å¥³ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãšã衚瀺ãããããŸããåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã®ãªãŒã衚瀺ã®ãŸãŸãåœè©²ãªãŒã衚瀺ãäžæ¹ã«ã¹ã©ã€ãããããããã«ããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãæ¬æ¥è¡šç€ºãããã¹ãé åãããªãã¡äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ç§»åããŠè¡šç€ºããããæŽã«èšãæãããšãéæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãæå®ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ç§»åãããããšãšãªãããã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§ããããã®ç¶æ ã§ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããå³äžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒåã³å·Šäžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããªããåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã®ã¹ã©ã€ãã«äŒŽããåœè©²ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ä»¥å€ã®å·Šå³å³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒã峿ããïŒã峿ïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžããåé€ãããã   Thereafter, in (d), the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the figure of the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs has a mallet and the girl character staring at it are displayed. Further, the reach display is slid downward while the reach display on the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 is maintained. As a result, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are moved and displayed in the area that should be displayed, that is, the main display area Rm. In other words, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 on the ineffective line are moved onto the predetermined effective line. The display form is FIG. 55A, and the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 in this state correspond to the right-up line L4 and the left-up line L5 described in FIG. As the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 slide, the left and right symbols (in this example, â8â symbol and â5â symbol) other than the reach line are deleted from the display screen G.
以éãæçµåæ¢å³æããäžå³æã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒ,ïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®
äžå€®éšã«ãŠäžããäžãžãšç§»åããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«æšæ§ã§ïŒã€ãã€æ®ŽæãããŠåæ¹ãžé£ã³åºãããã«å€å衚瀺ãããããããŠãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æããïŒãåã¯ãïŒã峿ã«ãŠåæ¢ã確å®è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããªããäžèšã®ãããªã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«çºå±ããŠããæçµåæ¢å³æãåœããå³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒãããïŒã峿ïŒã«ãŠåæ¢ããªãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããéçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the middle symbol as the final stop symbol moves from the top to the bottom in the center of the display screen G, and the boy character is beaten one by one with a mallet. Then, it is displayed in a variable manner so as to jump forward. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the symbol â6â or â7â and is confirmed and displayed, the boy character is notified that a big hit has occurred. Even if the super-reach is developed as described above, if the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, â6â, â7â symbol), the boy character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.
次ã«ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®äžé£ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã«åºã¥ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æãããæ¬ãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ãäžè¿°ããåãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãšã®çžéç¹ãšããŠã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«ãããŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢èšãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã䞻衚瀺é åïœã ãã§ãªãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãåããã衚瀺é åãããªãã¡è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®å šäœã䜿ã£ãŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãèšå®ãããã   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 6 shown in FIG. 50 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (d) and FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c). In this pattern 6, as a difference from each of the above reach patterns, an effective line is added on the display screen G, and a display area including not only the main display area Rm but also the sub display area Rs, That is, an effective line is set using the entire display screen G.
å ·äœçã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãå·Šå³ã®æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒã«äžäžïŒæ®µã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããããã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã«ããèšïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãèšå®ãããŠããããã®è¡šç€ºåœ¢æ ã«ã€ããŠã¯æ¢ã«èª¬æããéãã§ãããããã«å¯Ÿããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãå·Šå³ã®æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéããç¶æ ã§äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãåããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§å šäœã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒã«äžäžïŒæ®µã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããããããå Žåãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã«è¡šç€ºããã第ïŒå³æããªãŒã衚瀺ã®å¯Ÿè±¡å³æãšããããšã§ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢èšããããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒãæ°ãã«èšããããŠããã   Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the left and right doors 171 and 172 are closed, and the main display area Rm of the display screen G has three upper and lower stages in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3. One symbol is displayed, and a total of five effective lines are set by these first symbols. This display form is as already described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the entire display screen G including the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs with the left and right doors 171 and 172 opened has a left and right symbol row Z1. , Z3, the first symbol of the upper and lower five stages is displayed. In such a case, the first line displayed in the sub-display area Rs is also set as the target symbol for reach display, thereby increasing the effective line. In the present embodiment, effective lines L11, L12, and L13 are newly provided.
ãªããåèšãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãçšããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãçºçãããããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãå ã ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ã¹ã©ã€ããããæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ãå¢ããããšã¯ãªããããã«å¯Ÿããæ¬ãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã§ã¯ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®è¡šç€ºå³æããã®ãŸãŸçšããããšã§å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã䜿ã£ãŠã®ãªãŒã衚瀺ã蚱容ããããã«ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ãå¢ããããã«ããŠããã   In the pattern 5, the first symbol is displayed using the sub display area Rs and a reach line is generated. However, in the pattern 5, the reach line is slid to the original main display area Rm and the number of effective lines is increased. Absent. On the other hand, in the present pattern 6, reach display using the sub display area Rs is allowed by using the display design of the sub display area Rs as it is, thereby increasing the number of effective lines.
以äžããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã説æãããšããŸãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã§ã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããçºçããããã®ãšãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠãããããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããå³äžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒåã³å·Šäžããã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããããªãŒãçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   Hereinafter, the display mode of the pattern 6 will be described. First, in FIG. 56A, in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, the left symbol and the right symbol change display after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change. Temporarily stops and cross line reach occurs on the reach lines Le1 and Le2. At this time, in the reach line Le1, the left and right symbols are â7â symbols, and in the reach line Le2, the left and right symbols are â6â symbols. These reach lines Le1 and Le2 correspond to the right rising line L4 and the left rising line L5 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.
ãã®åŸïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžéšãæšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãæŒåºãè¡ãããæšæ§ã§å©ããéã®æ¯åãäŒæ¬ãããã®åŠãå·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããã®å·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«ãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒã«ãããŠåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®èåŸã«é ããŠããäž»å³æãçŸããããã®ãšããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åã«ã¯ãå·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®åšææ§ïŒäºãå®ããé åïŒã«åãã峿ã衚瀺ãããŠãããéé ã«é åãããŠããå·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯ãæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããæé ã«é åãããŠããå³å³æåïŒã§ããæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸãããæŽã«èšããšãå ã«äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«è¡šç€ºãããŠããäž»å³æã®ãã¡äžåŽã®äž»å³æãšåãäž»å³æãæ°ãã«çŸããããã®çµæãåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœ ïŒãšã¯å¥ã«ãæ°ãã«ãïŒã峿ãããªããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒãšãïŒã峿ãããªããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒãšãçºçããèšïŒæ¬ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãåæã«çºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§èª¬æããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒã«ãããã察å¿ããŠããã   Thereafter, as shown in (b) and (c), the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and both left and right vibrations are propagated as if the vibrations when hit with the mallet were propagated. Doors 171 and 172 are opened. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, in the right and left areas of the sub display area Rs, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity (predetermined arrangement) of the left symbols and the right symbols are displayed, and the left symbol row Z1 arranged in descending order. Then, a â7â symbol appears above the â6â symbol against the original arrangement order, and even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order, a â7â symbol appears above the â7â symbol against the original arrangement order. 6 âsymbol appears. More specifically, a main symbol that is the same as the lower main symbol among the main symbols previously displayed in the main display region Rm newly appears. As a result, apart from the reach lines Le1 and Le2, a reach line Le3 consisting of a â6â symbol and a reach line Le4 consisting of a â7â symbol are generated, and a total of four reach lines are generated simultaneously. The reach lines Le3 and Le4 correspond to the effective lines L12 and L13 described with reference to FIG.
ïŒïœïŒã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã§ã¯ãåäžå³æåã«ãããŠé åéãã®å³æïŒäŸãã°å·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯äžå€®ã®ãïŒã峿ãšäžæ®µã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãšãé åã«åãã峿ïŒäŸãã°å·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯äžæ®µã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãšãæ··åšããŠè¡šç€ºãããæŽã«ãå·Šå³æåïŒã®äžå€®ã®ãïŒã峿ãšãå³å³æåïŒã®äžå€®ã®ãïŒã峿ã«é¢ããŠèšãã°ãå ±ã«ïŒã€ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã«é¢äžããããšãšãªããããã«ãããèŠãç®äžã¯ãã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããäžäžã«ïŒã€éè€ããŠçºçããããã«ãªãããŸããå·Šå³ã®å³æåïŒïŒïŒºïŒã®å³æãå ¥ãéããšãªãããããããããžã°ã¶ã°ã©ã€ã³ã§ã®ãªãŒããçºçãããã®ããã«ãªãããªããïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®èæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæã®ãã®ãã倿Žãããããšã¯ãªããäžå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãéåžžæãšã»ãŒåæ§ã«è¡ãããããŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã¯ïŒã€ã«é ååºåããããŸãŸã§ããã   In the display mode of (c), as shown in the same symbol sequence (for example, the center symbol â6â and the bottom symbol â7â in the left symbol column Z1) and the symbol â7â in the lower row), and the symbols (eg, in the left symbol column Z1). The upper â7â symbol) is displayed in a mixed manner. Furthermore, regarding the â6â symbol at the center of the left symbol row Z1 and the â7â symbol at the center of the right symbol row Z3, both reach lines Will be involved. As a result, it seems that the reach of the cross line has overlapped vertically two times. Further, since the symbols in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are misplaced, it is as if a reach in a zigzag line has occurred. In the stages (a) to (c), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the middle symbols are displayed in the same manner as in the normal state. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.
ãã®åŸãïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã䞻衚瀺é åïœåã³å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®é ååºåãå€ããã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãçšããŠæå®ã®ãªãŒãæŒåºãè¡ããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å šäœãçµ±åããããã«ããŠæ¡åŒµãããããã®å Žåãèæ¯ç»é¢ãéåžžæãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã«å€æŽããããšãšãã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åã«è¡šç€ºãããŠããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãæšæ§ãæã€å§¿ã衚瀺ãããã   Thereafter, as shown in (d), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that at the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs is displayed with a wooden mallet.
以éãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒ,ïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãæçµåæ¢å³æããäžå³æ
ã¯è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžå€®éšã«ãŠäžããäžãžãšå€å衚瀺ãããããããŠã倧åœãããšãªãäžå³æïŒå³ã§ã¯ãïŒã峿åã¯ãïŒã峿ïŒããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã«è¿ã¥ããšãåœè©²äžå³æã忢ããããåŠãäžå³æãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããæšæ§ã«ãŠæ®Žæãããããã®ãšããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã¯ãåžžã«è¡šç€ºç»é¢äžäžæ¹åã®ã»ãŒäžå€®ã«äœçœ®ãããã倧åœãã峿ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã«è¿ã¥ããæã«åœè©²ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³äžã«è¡šç€ºãããå·Šå³ã®å³æã®èŠèªæ§ã劚ããããªãããã«ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã®å³åŽãšå·ŠåŽãšãè¡ãæ¥ããªããäžå³æãæšæ§ã«ãŠæ®Žæãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãäžå³æåïŒã®ãïŒã峿ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ
ïŒã«è¿ã¥ããæãåœè©²ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ
ïŒäžã®å³æïŒãã®å Žåã¯å·Šå³æåïŒã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãšéãªããªãããã«ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã¯å³åŽããæšæ§ã«ãŠãïŒãå³æãæ®ŽæããããŸããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ
ïŒã«äžå³æåïŒã®ãïŒã峿ãè¿ã¥ããæãåœè©²ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ
ïŒäžã®å³æïŒãã®å Žåã¯å³å³æåïŒã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãšéãªããªãããã«ãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã¯å·ŠåŽããæšæ§ã«ãŠãïŒãå³æãæ®Žæããã
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 56 (d) and 57 (a), (b), the middle symbol as the final stop symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen G from the top to the bottom. When the medium symbol (â6â symbol or â7â symbol in the figure) that is a big hit approaches the reach line, the middle symbol is beaten with a mallet by the boy character as if the middle symbol is stopped. At this time, the boy character is always located at the approximate center in the vertical direction of the display screen, but when the jackpot symbol approaches the reach line, the visibility of the left and right symbols displayed on the reach line is not hindered. While going back and forth between the right side and the left side on the display screen G, the middle symbol is beaten with a mallet. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), when the â6â symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 approaches the reach line Le3, the symbol on the reach line Le3 (in this case, the symbol in the left symbol row Z1). The boy character strikes the â6â symbol from the right side with a mallet so that it does not overlap with the â6â symbol. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the â7â symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 approaches the reach line Le4, the symbol on the reach line Le4 (in this case, the â7â symbol in the right symbol row Z3). ) The boy character strikes the â7â symbol with a wooden mallet from the left side.
ããã§ãäžæ¹ããéããŠããäžå³æãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã殎æããéãåœè©²äžå³æã«é¢ããŠã¯ã殎æããã察象ãšãªã峿ã ããé垞衚瀺ãããä»ã®å³æã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããŠè¡šç€ºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããŸããå·Šå³ã®å³æã«é¢ããŠã¯ã殎æå¯Ÿè±¡ã®äžå³æãšåãå³æã§æç«ããŠãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã®ã¿é垞衚瀺ãããä»ã®å³æã¯åéæååŠçãããŠè¡šç€ºãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããå ·äœçã«èª¬æãããšãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã«ãïŒã峿ã䞊ã¶ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãè¿ã¥ãå Žåã瀺ããŠããããããå Žåã«ã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã®ãïŒã峿ãšäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãšãé垞衚瀺ãããä»ã®å³æã«ã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããŠããããŸããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã«ãïŒã峿ã䞊ã¶ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãè¿ã¥ãå Žåã瀺ããŠããããããå Žåã«ã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã®ãïŒã峿ãšäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãšãé垞衚瀺ãããä»ã®å³æã«ã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããŠãããããã«å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã«ãïŒã峿ã䞊ã¶ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã«å¯ŸããŠäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãè¿ã¥ãå Žåã瀺ããŠããããããå Žåã«ã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã®ãïŒã峿ãšäžå³æã§ãããïŒã峿ãšãé垞衚瀺ãããä»ã®å³æã«ã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããŠããã   Here, when the boy character strikes the middle symbol coming down from above, only the symbol subject to the strike is normally displayed for the middle symbol, and the other symbols are displayed with the semi-transparent processing applied. It has come to be. As for the left and right symbols, only the reach line that is established with the same symbol as the middle symbol to be beaten is normally displayed, and the other symbols are displayed after being translucently processed. More specifically, FIG. 56 (d) shows a case where the â6â symbol, which is the middle symbol, approaches the reach line Le3 in which â6â symbols are arranged on the left and right sides. The â6â symbol on the line Le3 and the â6â symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing. FIG. 57A shows a case in which the â7â symbol, which is the middle symbol, approaches the reach line Le4 in which â7â symbols are arranged on the left and right. In such a case, on the reach line Le4, FIG. The â7â symbol and the â7â symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing. Further, FIG. 57B shows a case where the middle symbol â7â comes closer to the reach line Le1 in which â7â symbols are arranged on the left and right. In this case, the â7â symbol on the reach line Le1 The â7â symbol and the â7â symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing.
æ¬ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«è¡šç€ºããã峿æ°ãå¢ãããšãšãã«æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢ããããäžèšã®åŠãåéæååŠçãæœããããããã©ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã§å€§åœãã峿ãæãããããåããããããªããéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠã¯ã該åœç®æã®ã¿ã泚èŠããã°è¯ããªãã   In this reach pattern, the number of symbols displayed on the display screen G increases and the number of effective lines increases. However, since the translucency processing is performed as described above, it is easy to understand which reach line is likely to have the jackpot symbols. Thus, for the player, it is only necessary to pay attention to only the corresponding part.
ãããŠå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãäœããã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³äžã«ãããŠæçµåæ¢å³æããïŒãåã¯ãïŒã峿ã«ãŠåæ¢ã確å®è¡šç€ºãããå Žåãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããããªããäžèšã®ãããªã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒãã«çºå±ããŠããæçµåæ¢å³æãåœããå³æïŒæ¬äŸã§ã¯ãïŒãããïŒã峿ïŒã«ãŠåæ¢ããªãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ãåèšå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããã倧åœããéçºçã§ããæšå ±ç¥ãããã   Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the final stop symbol is stopped at â6â or â7â symbol and displayed on any reach line, the boy character informs that a big hit has occurred. Is done. Even if the super-reach is developed as described above, if the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, â6â, â7â symbol), the boy character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.
å ã¿ã«ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã§ãïŒã峿ã忢ããå Žåã«ã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã§ãïŒã峿ã忢ããããšãšãªããïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãŠå€§åœããã®çµã¿åãããçããããšãšãªããããã®å Žåã«ã¯ãäºãèŠå®ããŠãããã«ãŒã«ã«åŸã倧åœããå³æãæ±ºå®ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãé«ç¢ºç峿ã§ãããïŒã峿ã®çµã¿åãããæå¹ãªå€§åœããã®çµã¿åãããšããŠæ¡çšãããããã«èšå®ãããŠããã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«ãããŠã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã«ãïŒã峿ãæãããã«ãªããšåæã«ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒäžã«ãïŒã峿ãæãããã«ãªãå ŽåïŒå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã®å ŽåïŒãæå¹ãšãªã倧åœãã峿ããïŒã峿ã§ããããšããããïŒã峿ã«é¢ããŠé垞衚瀺ãããã®ã«å¯ŸãããïŒã峿ã«é¢ããŠã¯åéæååŠçãæœãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããã   By the way, when the â7â symbol stops on the reach line Le4, the â6â symbol stops on the reach line Le2, and a jackpot combination occurs on the two effective lines. In this case, the jackpot symbol is determined according to a rule defined in advance. In the present embodiment, the combination of â7â symbols, which is a high probability symbol, is set to be adopted as an effective jackpot combination. On the display screen G, when the â7â symbols are likely to be aligned on the reach line Le4, the â6â symbols are likely to be aligned on the reach line Le2 (in the case of FIG. 57 (a)), this is effective. Since the jackpot symbol is the â7â symbol, the â7â symbol is normally displayed, whereas the â6â symbol is subjected to a translucent process.
åèšå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒã§ã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ãŠã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããçºçãã圢ãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãžãšç§»è¡ããããã«ããã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããäžäžã«ïŒã€éè€ããŠçºçããå ŽåãäŸç€ºããããåœè©²ãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãšããŠã¯ãæ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããçºçãã圢ããç§»è¡ããå Žåãããã以äžã«ãæ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããçºçãã圢ããç§»è¡ããäºäŸããå³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒãçšããŠèª¬æããããªãããªãŒãè¡šç€ºæ æ§ã®äž»èŠãªæµãã¯åæ§ã®ãããå³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç°ãªãç¶æ³ã®ã¿ãå³ç€ºããŠãããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã¯åèšå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒãšãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã¯åèšå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒïœïŒã®å Žé¢ãšãããã察å¿ããŠããã   In FIGS. 56 and 57, when the cross line reach occurs in the main display region Rm, the pattern 6 shifts to the reach pattern 6 and this causes the cross line reach to overlap twice. However, the reach pattern of the pattern 6 may shift from the form in which the horizontal line reach occurs. In the following, an example of shifting from the form in which the horizontal line reach occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. Since the main flow of the reach display mode is the same, only different situations are shown in FIGS. 59 and 60. FIGS. 59 (a) and 60 (a) are the same as FIG. 56 (a). FIGS. 59B and 60B correspond to the scene of FIG. 56C, respectively.
å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ããæ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã§ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒäžã§ãªãŒããçºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠããã該ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããããªãŒãçºçã®æšãå ±ç¥ãããã   In FIG. 59 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the change display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach line Lf1 that is a horizontal line is temporarily stopped. Reach occurs above. In the reach line Lf1, the left and right symbols are â6â symbols, and the reach line Lf1 corresponds to the lower line L3 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.
ãã®åŸãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžéšãæšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãæŒåºãè¡ãããïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãå·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããã®å·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«ãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒã«ãããŠåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®èåŸã«é ããŠããäž»å³æãçŸããããã®ãšããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åã«ã¯ãå·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®åšææ§ã«åãã峿ã衚瀺ãããŠãããéé ã«é åãããŠããå·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯ãæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããæé ã«é åãããŠããå³å³æåïŒã§ããæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããããã®çµæãåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãšã¯å¥ã«ãæ°ãã«ãïŒã峿ãããªããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãšãïŒã峿ãããªããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãšãçºçããèšïŒæ¬ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãåæã«çºçããããã®ãšããèŠãç®äžã¯ãã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããšæ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããšãäžäžã«çºçããããã«ãªãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§èª¬æããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒã«ãããã察å¿ããŠããã以äžã®å±éã¯å³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã®ãšåäžã§ããã   Thereafter, the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as shown in FIG. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs. In the left symbol row Z1 that is arranged in descending order, the original arrangement order is displayed. On the contrary, a â7â symbol appears above the â5â symbol, and a â5â symbol appears above the â7â symbol even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order. As a result, apart from the reach line Lf1, a reach line Lf2 consisting of a â5â symbol and a reach line Lf3 consisting of a â7â symbol are generated, and a total of three reach lines are generated simultaneously. At this time, it seems that the reach of the cross line and the reach of the horizontal line are generated up and down. The reach lines Lf2 and Lf3 correspond to the effective lines L12 and L13 described with reference to FIG. The following development is the same as that shown in FIGS.
äžæ¹ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸã«å·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ããæ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã§ãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒäžã§ãªãŒããçºçããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®å³æããïŒã峿ãšãªã£ãŠããã該ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æããäžã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããŠããããã®æ®µéã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯å ±ã«éãããŸãŸã§ããããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçãããšãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžå€®é åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«è¡šç€ºãããå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã«ããããªãŒãçºçã®æšãå ±ç¥ãããã   On the other hand, in FIG. 60 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the left and right symbols change display is temporarily stopped and reach is a horizontal line. Reach occurs on line Lg1. In the reach line Lg1, the left and right symbols are â1â symbols, and the reach line Lg1 corresponds to the upper line L1 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.
ãã®åŸãå°å¹Žãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®äžéšãæšæ§ã«ãŠå©ãæŒåºãè¡ãããïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ãå·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããã®å·Šå³ã®äž¡æïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«ãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒïŒ²ïœïŒïŒã«ãããŠåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®èåŸã«é ããŠããäž»å³æãçŸããããã®ãšããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé ååã³å·ŠåŽé åã«ã¯ãå·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®åšææ§ã«åãã峿ã衚瀺ãããŠãããéé ã«é åãããŠããå·Šå³æåïŒã§ã¯ãæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«æŽã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããæé ã«é åãããŠããå³å³æåïŒã§ããæ¬æ¥ã®é åé åºã«åããŠãïŒã峿ã®äžæ¹ã«æŽã«ãïŒã峿ãçŸããããã®çµæãåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒãšã¯å¥ã«ãæ°ãã«ãïŒã峿ãããªããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãçºçããèšïŒæ¬ã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãåæã«çºçããããã®ãšããèŠãç®äžã¯ãïŒã€ã®æ°Žå¹³ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããšã¯ãã¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãªãŒããšãéè€ããŠçºçããããã«ãªãããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã§èª¬æããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒïŒã«ãããã察å¿ããŠããã以äžã®å±éã¯å³ïŒïŒïŒå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããã®ãšåäžã§ããã   Thereafter, the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as shown in FIG. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs. In the left symbol row Z1 that is arranged in descending order, the original arrangement order is displayed. On the other hand, a â1â symbol appears above the â1â symbol, and even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order, a â1â symbol further exists above the â1â symbol against the original arrangement order. appear. As a result, apart from the reach line Lg1, reach lines Lg2, Lg3, and Lg4 each having a â1â symbol are newly generated, and a total of four reach lines are simultaneously generated. At this time, it seems that the reach of two horizontal lines and the reach of a cross line overlap. The reach lines Lg2, Lg3, and Lg4 correspond to the effective lines L11, L12, and L13 described with reference to FIG. The following development is the same as that shown in FIGS.
å³ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºäŸãæŽã«èª¬æãããšãïŒåã®äž»å³æïŒäŸãã°å·Šåæäžã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãä»ã®è€æ°åã®äž»å³æïŒäŸãã°å³åäžïŒã€ã®ãïŒã峿ïŒãšã®çµã¿åããã«ããè€æ°ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ã§ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãæç«ãããéåžžããªãŒãæç«æã«ã¯ãå·Šå³ã®äž»å³æã®é¢ä¿ã¯ïŒåïŒïŒåã§ããã®ã«å¯Ÿããæ¬è¡šç€ºäŸã§ã¯å·Šå³ã®äž»å³æã®é¢ä¿ãïŒåïŒïœåïŒããã§ã¯ïŒåïŒïŒåïŒãšããããšãã§ãããæ ã«ãéæè ã«ãšã£ãŠäºæž¬å€ã®è¡šç€ºãè¡ãããšãå¯èœãšãªãããã®å Žåãéæè ã¯ç¹æ®ãªç¶æ ïŒéåžžæã«ã¯ãªãç¶æ ïŒã§ããããšãèªèããããšã§ãç¹å¥éæç¶æ ã®çºçã«å¯ŸããŠæåŸ ã倧ãã«æ±ãããšãã§ããã   The display example of FIG. 60 will be further described. One main symbol (for example, â1â symbol at the top of the left column) is combined with a plurality of other main symbols (for example, two â1â symbols in the right column). A reach line is formed by a plurality of active lines. Normally, when the reach is established, the relationship between the left and right main symbols is 1: 1, whereas in this display example, the relationship between the left and right main symbols is 1: n (here, 1: 2). can do. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected display for the player. In this case, the player can greatly expect the occurrence of the special gaming state by recognizing that the player is in a special state (a state that is not normal).
ãªãã以äžã®åãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã«ãããŠã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«æçµåæ¢å³æã確å®è¡šç€ºããããšãéæŸããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã¯å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéãããããšãšãã«ãåã³è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã䞻衚瀺é åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšã«é ååºåããããããªãã¡ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã¯å ã®ç¶æ ã«ãŸã§çž®å°ãããããšãšãªãã   In each of the above reach patterns, when the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the display screen G, the opened right door 171 or left door 172 is closed and the display screen G is again displayed as the main display region Rm. The area is divided into sub-display areas Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is reduced to the original state.
å ã¿ã«ãäžèšãã¿ãŒã³ïŒããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã«ã¯ã倧åœããçºçæã«ãããéžæçã«å·®ç°ãèšããããŠãããåŸè ã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã»ã©å€§åœããçºçæã«éžæããããããªãããæ§æãããŠãããäžæ¹ã倧åœãããçºçããªãæã«ããããªãŒãéžæçã«ãå·®ç°ãèšããããŠãããåè ã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã»ã©éžæããããããªãããæ§æãããŠãããããã¯ã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®åœ¢ç¶ã倧ãããå€åããããšã«å¯ŸããŠéæè ãæ±ãæå€æ§ã®çšåºŠãšã倧åœããã®çºçãšãé¢é£ä»ããããšã«ãããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ãã工倫ã§ããã   Incidentally, the reach patterns of the patterns 1 to 6 are different in the selection rate at the time of jackpot occurrence, and the latter reach pattern is configured to be more easily selected at the time of jackpot occurrence. On the other hand, there is a difference in reach selection rate when no big hit occurs, and the former reach pattern is more easily selected. This is a device that enhances the interest of the game by associating the degree of unexpectedness that the player has with respect to the change in the shape and size of the main display region Rm and the occurrence of the jackpot.
ãŸããæ¬è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ã§ã¯ãäºåæŒåºãšããŠããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ãããããšãäºåãããªãŒãäºåãã倧åœããçºçãäºåãã倧åœããäºåã宿œãããããã«ãªã£ãŠããããã®äºåæŒåºäŸãå³ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠèª¬æããããããã®äºåæŒåºã¯ãäŸãã°ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®éåžžå€åæã«å®æœãããã説æã®äŸ¿å®äžãå³ïŒïŒã®ïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒãããããäºåïŒïŒäºåïŒïŒäºåïŒïŒäºåïŒãšããã   In the present display control, a reach notice for notifying that the reach display is performed and a jackpot notice for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot are implemented as the notice effects, and an example of the notice effect is shown in FIG. I will explain. These notice effects are performed, for example, at the time of normal fluctuation of the first symbol. For convenience of explanation, (a) to (d) in FIG. 61 are referred to as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, and notice 4, respectively.
å ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãäºåïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®éåžžå€åæã«ãããŠäž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«çã®å¡ãçŸãã䞻衚瀺é åïœã®å³äžé éšããæèšåãæ¹åã«çãåšåããããããŠãå³å³æåïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãçã«å ãŸããããã«ããŠé«éã§å€å衚瀺ãããåŸããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ãããã   First, in the notice 1 shown in FIG. 61A, a flame lump appears in the main display area Rm during normal fluctuation of the first symbol, and the flame circulates clockwise from the upper right corner of the main display area Rm. Then, after the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 is variably displayed at high speed so as to be enveloped in flame, reach display is performed.
ãŸããå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãäºåïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®éåžžå€åæã«ãããŠå³æïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«ãªãŒãäºåãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãè¶ã飲ãã§ãã€ããçžãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒã衚瀺ãããã峿ïŒïŒïŒã¯äžæçã«éæŸãããåŸãåã³ééãããããã®åŸãå³å³æåïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãçã«å ãŸããããã«ããŠé«éã§å€å衚瀺ãããããšã§ããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ãããã   Also, in the notice 2 shown in FIG. 61 (b), the right door 171 is opened during the normal variation of the first symbol, and the reach notice is given in the right area (the first notice area Rs1 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display area Rs. A character (a strawberry character that relaxes by drinking tea in the present embodiment) is displayed. The right door 171 is temporarily opened and then closed again. Thereafter, reach display is performed by variably displaying the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 so as to be surrounded by flames.
å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãäºåïŒã¯åèšäºåïŒã®çºå±åäºåãšãªã£ãŠããã峿ïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããŠåèšçžãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã衚瀺ãããåŸã峿ïŒïŒïŒãéããåã«çžãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã®èåŸã«çãçºçããããããŠããã®çã䞻衚瀺é åïœå ãæèšåãæ¹åã«åšåãããšåæã«ãèäžã«ç«ãã€ãããšã§çžãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ãæ ãŠãµãããããã«ããŠå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å³åŽé åãã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ãããŠèœäžããŠããããã®åŸãå³å³æåïŒã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãçã«å ãŸããããã«ããŠé«éã§å€å衚瀺ãããããšã§ããªãŒã衚瀺ãè¡ãããã   The notice 3 shown in FIG. 61 (c) is an advanced notice of the notice 2, and after the right door 171 is opened and the heel character is displayed, before the right door 171 is closed, it is behind the heel character. A flame is generated. The flame circulates in the main display area Rm in the clockwise direction, and at the same time, the fire ignites on the back so that the samurai character strikes and flutters and falls from the right area of the sub display area Rs to the main display area Rm. Go. Thereafter, reach display is performed by variably displaying the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 so as to be surrounded by flames.
å³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãäºåïŒã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æã®éåžžå€åæã«ãããŠå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å·ŠåŽé åïŒå³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãã第ïŒäºåé åïœïŒïŒã«ãªãŒãäºåãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯å°å€ãæã€è€æ°ã®ç«ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ïŒã衚瀺ããããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã¯äžæçã«éæŸãããåŸãåã³ééãããããããŠãåèšç«ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ã®è¡šç€ºåŸã¯ãå°ãªããšãïŒã€ã®ç«ãã£ã©ã¯ã¿ããå·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®ééã«ãããããäžå®æéåšæã§å¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å·ŠåŽé åãã䞻衚瀺é åïœã«ãããŠèœäžããŠããããã®åŸããªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçããã   In notice 4 shown in FIG. 61 (d), the left door 172 is opened during normal fluctuation of the first symbol, and a reach notice character (in the second notice area Rs2 described in FIG. 29) is displayed on the left side of the sub display area Rs. In the present embodiment, a plurality of cat characters having an oval) are displayed. The left door 172 is temporarily opened and then closed again. After the cat character is displayed, at least one cat character falls from the left side region of the sub display region Rs to the main display region Rm at regular intervals regardless of whether the left door 172 is opened or closed. After that, reach display occurs.
äžèšäºåïŒãäºåïŒã¯ãã®åºçŸã«äŒŽã倧åœããæåŸ 床ãäºã決ããããŠãããäŸãã°ãäºåïŒâäºåïŒâäºåïŒâäºåïŒã®é ã«å€§åœããæåŸ 床ãå¢ããã®ãšãªã£ãŠããããªããåãäºåæŒåºãè€æ°åç¹°ãè¿ã宿œãããåŸã«ãªãŒã衚瀺ãçºçããå Žåã«ã倧åœããæåŸ åºŠãæŽã«é«ãããããåã¯å€§åœãã確å®ãšãªãããã«è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ã宿œããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   In the above notice 1 to notice 4, the degree of jackpot expectation associated with its appearance is determined in advance. For example, the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of notice 1 â notice 2 â notice 3 â notice 4. In addition, when reach display occurs after the same announcement effect is repeatedly performed a plurality of times, it is possible to perform display control so that the expected degree of jackpot is further increased or the jackpot is confirmed.
以äžè©³è¿°ããæ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã«ããã°ã以äžã®åªãã广ãå¥ããã   According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.
衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ã®åãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã«ãããŠãã¿ãŒã³ïŒãšããŠèª¬æããããã«ãå ïŒã€ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æãäžæŠåæ¢ããæã«ãªãŒã衚瀺ãšãªã£ãŠããªããŠãããã®åŸã®å·Šå³ã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸãåã³å³æã®ã¹ã©ã€ãã«ãã£ãŠãªãŒã衚瀺ã«ç§»è¡ãããããšãããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ãããäžè¬ã«éæè ã¯ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³ä»¥å€ã§ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãçºçããç¶æ³ã«ãªãããèããä»®ã«çºçããç¶æ³ã«ãã£ãå Žåã«ã¯ããã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã§ãªãããšãæããããã®ã§ãããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã§ã¯ãå·Šå³ã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸããããšã«ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ä»¥å€ã§ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãçºçããŠããããšãéæè ã«å ±ç¥ãããã®ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžãžã¹ã©ã€ãããããããã¯ããŸãã«éæè ã®æãæãçæ³ã®å±éã§ãããæ³åã©ããã«äºãé²ãã ããšããã倧åœãããžã®æåŸ æãå¢ãããšãšãªããããã«å€§åœãããçºçããéã«ã¯ãå šãŠãéæè ã®æ³åã©ããã«é²ãã ããšãšãªãã倧åœããã®åã³ãæ Œå¥ãªãã®ãšãªãããŸãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã¯ãã¯ããã¯äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœå ã«ãŠãªãŒããçºçããªãç¶æ ããçºå±ãããããéæè ã¯ããªãŒããçºçããŠããªãç¶æ³ã«ãããŠããåžžã«ãªãŒããžã®çºå±ãæåŸ ããªããéæãè¡ãããšãšãªãã   As explained as pattern 5 in each reach pattern of the display control, even if the first two first symbols are temporarily stopped and reach display is not performed, the subsequent opening of the left and right door bodies 171 and 172, and Since the display is shifted to the reach display by the slide, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In general, the player considers whether a reach line is generated other than the active line, and if the player is in a situation where it occurs, the player regrets that the reach line is not on the active line. In the pachinko machine 10, the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened to notify the player that a reach line other than the active line is generated, and the reach line is slid onto the active line. This is exactly the ideal development envisioned by the player, and as things have progressed as expected, the expectation for jackpots will also increase. In addition, when a jackpot occurs, everything goes as the player imagines, and the joy of the jackpot becomes exceptional. Further, since the reach pattern of pattern 5 is initially developed from a state where no reach occurs in the main display area Rm, the player always expects to develop to reach even in a situation where no reach occurs. While playing games.
衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ã®åãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã«ãããŠãã¿ãŒã³ïŒãšããŠèª¬æããããã«ãäžæŠã¯ãªãŒã衚瀺ããªãããåŸã«ãå·Šå³ã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸãåã³èŠåæ§ïŒé åïŒã«åããå·Šå³ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®åºçŸã«ãã£ãŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãä»å çã«å¢å ãããããšããã倧åœãããšãªãçµã¿åãããå¢å ããéæè ã¯å€§åœããã«ããè¿ã¥ãããšæããããšãã§ããéæã®èè¶£ãããã«é«ããããšãã§ããããŸããéæè ãããåŸãªããšãããããããå Žåã«ãã倧åœããïŒç¹å¥éæç¶æ ïŒãžã®æåŸ ãæ°ãã«çããããããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   As explained as pattern 6 in each reach pattern of display control, once reach display is made, the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened, and the left and right first symbols appear against the regularity (array). Since the reach line is additionally increased, the combination of jackpots increases, the player can feel closer to the jackpot, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, even when it is determined that there is no player, it is possible to newly generate an expectation for a big hit (special game state).
æ¬å®æœã®åœ¢æ ã®ããã«è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§äžã®å·Šå³ã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã䜿ã£ãæŒåºã§ã¯ç¹ã«ãéæè ã¯å·Šå³ã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããããšã«é©ãã®ã¿ãªãããéæè ã®äºæããªãã£ã峿ããåæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®èåŸããçŸããããšã«ãé©ãããšãšãªãããããã®æå€æ§ããéæè ã¯å€§åœãããžã®æåŸ æãèšããŸãããããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ããã   Especially in the production using the left and right door bodies 171 and 172 on the display screen G as in the present embodiment, the player is not only surprised that the left and right door bodies 171 and 172 are opened, but also the player's It is also surprising that an unexpected pattern appears from behind the door bodies 171 and 172. Because of these surprises, the player expands the sense of expectation for the jackpot, and can increase the interest of the game.
å¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ãããŠã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«èšãããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšã¯é»æºç³»ãç°ãªãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããå¶åŸ¡ãããæ§æãšãããããæ©çš®å€æŽçã«ãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«é¢ããèšèšå€æŽã«éããŠã¯ãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåŽã§å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®é»æºç³»ã®èšèšå€æŽçãè¡ãããã°ãããããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåŽã§åŒ·ããããããšã¯ãªããã€ãŸãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã衚瀺æŒåºã®å¶åŸ¡ä»æ§ã«ã€ããŠå€æŽãããã°ããããã®çµæãè£å©æŒåºãè¡ãããšã§éæã®èè¶£åäžçãå³ãããã«ããæ¬ããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ãããŠæ©çš®å€æŽæçã«ããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®èšèšå·¥æ°ãåæžããããšãã§ããããã«ãªãããŸããäžèšã®éã黿ºç³»ãç°ãªãæ§æãšããããšã«ããã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãå¶åŸ¡ããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåŽã§é»æºé»å§å€åããã€ãºçãçºçããŠãããã«ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒåŽãžã®åœ±é¿ãæå¶ã§ããã   In the variable display unit 35, the operations of the right door 171 and the left door 172 provided on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 are controlled by an audio lamp control device 272 having a power system different from that of the display control device 214. Therefore, when changing the design of the right door 171 and the left door 172 due to a model change or the like, it is only necessary to change the design of the power supply system of the right door 171 and the left door 172 on the sound lamp control device 272 side. Is not forced on the display control device 214 side. That is, the display control device 214 only needs to change the control specifications for display effects. As a result, it is possible to reduce the design man-hours of the display control device 214 at the time of model change in the pachinko machine 10 which is intended to improve the interest of the game by performing the auxiliary effect. In addition, by adopting a different power supply system as described above, even if a power supply voltage fluctuation or noise occurs on the sound lamp control device 272 side that controls the right door 171 and the left door 172, the display control device 214 side thereof The influence on can be suppressed.
ãŸãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãã第ïŒå³æã®å€å衚瀺ãå¶åŸ¡ãããéã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšã¯å¥ã®é³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ä»»ãããããšãšãªãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åŠçè² è·ã®å¢å ã鲿¢ã§ããã   Further, when the display control device 214 controls the variation display of the first symbol, the control of the right door 171 and the left door 172 is left to the sound lamp control device 272 different from the display control device 214, and the display An increase in the processing load of the control device 214 can be prevented.
峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®é è§éšã«é¢éããŠé 眮ãããŠãããããã«ãã®éã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ããã瞊æ¹ååã³æšªæ¹åã®æé·éšåã®è¡šç€ºé åãæ®ãããããã«ãªã£ãŠãããæ ã«ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«éããŠé èœéšæãèšããããŠããåœè©²è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãçž®å°åããããšããå°è±¡ã¯æ¯èŒçå°ãªããã®ãšãªããåŸã£ãŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãçµã¿åãããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã®è¡šç€ºæŒåºãè¡ãå Žåã«ãã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ãæå¹ã«çšãã€ã€å¥œé©ãªè¡šç€ºæŒåºãå®çŸã§ãããäŸãã°ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒãšããŠæ¯èŒç倧ããªè¡šç€ºç»é¢ãæ¡çšããŠããã®å€§ç»é¢ãååã«æŽ»ããããªããšãã£ãäžéœåãè§£æ¶ã§ããã   The right door 171 and the left door 172 are spaced apart from the corners of the display screen G, and at that time, the display areas of the longest portions in the vertical and horizontal directions on the display screen G are left. Yes. Therefore, even if a concealing member is provided over the display screen G, the impression that the display screen G is reduced is relatively small. Therefore, even when the display effect of the first symbol is performed by combining the operations of the right door 171 and the left door 172, a suitable display effect can be realized while using the display screen G effectively. For example, even if a relatively large display screen is adopted as the first symbol display device 41, the inconvenience that the large screen is not fully utilized can be solved.
ãªãŒãæŒåºã«ãããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã¯å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸãã¿ãŒã³ãšãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãšãïŒå¯ŸïŒåã¯ïŒå¯ŸïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ãããããšã«ãããéæè ãæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ããæŒåºãããªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã容æã«æ³åããããšãå¯èœãšãªããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ããã   In the reach production, the player can easily imagine the reach pattern from the production by the door bodies 171 and 172 by making the opening pattern and the reach pattern of the right door 171 or the left door 172 correspond one-to-one or one-to-two. Can increase the interest of the game.
ãªããäžè¿°ãã宿œã®åœ¢æ ã®èšèŒå 容ã«éå®ããããäŸãã°æ¬¡ã®ããã«å®æœããŠãããã   In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ãããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã巊端éšåã¯å³ç«¯éšã®è»žéšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒïœãäžå¿ãšããŠå·Šå³æ¹åã«ååãããæ§æãšãããïŒå³ïŒïŒå³ïŒã®æ§æåç §ïŒãåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã®è»žéšããã®äžç«¯éšã«èšããŠäžäžæ¹åã«ååãããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ãããŸããåæïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§äžãã¹ã©ã€ãããæ§æã§ãã£ãŠãè¯ãã   (A) In the above-described embodiment, the variable display unit 35 is configured to rotate the right door 171 and the left door 172 in the left-right direction around the left or right shaft portions 171a and 172a (FIG. 5). , See the configuration of FIG. 6), the shaft portion of each door 171, 172 may be provided at the upper end portion thereof and rotated in the vertical direction. The doors 171 and 172 may be configured to slide on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠãããïŒïŒã«ãããŠãé èœéšæãšããŠç©åœ¢æ¿ç¶ã®å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«ïŒçèšãããããã®æ§æã倿Žãããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ãã®å€åœ¢äŸã瀺ããå³ïŒïŒã«ãããŠãïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ãäŸãã°æ¿ç¶ã®æäœãããªãé èœéšæïŒïŒïŒãåè§åœ¢ã§ã¯ãªãå¥ã®å€è§åœ¢ïŒå³ã§ã¯äºè§åœ¢ïŒãšãªã£ãŠãããïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ãé èœéšæïŒïŒïŒãå匧ãæãã圢ç¶ãšãªã£ãŠãããïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ãé èœéšæïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®åé ã«ããããèšããããŠããããŸããïŒïœïŒã§ã¯ãé èœéšæïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äžèŸºéšåã«æ²¿ã£ãŠå»¶ã³ãããã«ããŠäžäœã§èšããããŠããããã®äžå€®éšã«ã¯è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ãé ãéšåãæžããã¹ã衚瀺é åæ¡åŒµéšãšããŠã®åæ¬ éšïŒïŒïŒïœãèšããããŠããããªããïŒïœïŒã®å Žåãé èœéšæïŒïŒïŒãæäœã§æ§æããã®ã§ããã°ããã®äžç«¯éšã«è»žéšãèšããŠäžäžæ¹åã«ååããæ§æãšãããšè¯ããåèšïŒïœïŒãïŒïœïŒä»¥å€ã«ããå·Šå³åã¯äžäžã«è€æ°èšããããé èœéšæãé察称圢ç¶ã«ããæ§æãé èœéšæã®è¡šé¢ã«ç«äœç¶ã®èµ·äŒãçªèµ·çãèšããæ§æçã ãæ¡çšããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   (B) In the above embodiment, in the variable display unit 35, two pieces of the rectangular plate-shaped right door 171 and left door 172 are provided on the display screen G as concealing members, but this configuration is changed. FIG. 62 shows a modification thereof. In FIG. 62A, the concealing member 195 made of, for example, a plate-like door is not a quadrangle but another polygon (a pentagon in the figure). In (b), the concealing member 196 has a shape having an arc. In (c), concealment members 197 are provided at the four corners of the display screen G, respectively. Further, in (d), the concealment member 198 is integrally provided so as to extend along the upper side portion of the display screen G, and as a display area expansion portion in order to reduce the portion concealing the display screen G at the center. The notch 198a is provided. In the case of (d), if the concealing member 198 is constituted by a door body, it is preferable to provide a shaft portion at the upper end portion thereof and rotate in the vertical direction. In addition to the above (a) to (d), it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of concealing members provided on the left and right or top and bottom are asymmetrical, a configuration in which three-dimensional undulations or protrusions are provided on the surface of the concealing member It is.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåŸå±çã«èšãããããã®è¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããã®å¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åŸã£ãŠå¶åŸ¡ã宿œãããããã®æ§æã倿ŽãããäŸãã°ãé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãªãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å¯ŸããŠåŸå±çã«èšãããã€ãŸããé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããã®å¶åŸ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åŸã£ãŠå¶åŸ¡ã宿œããããã®å Žåãé³å£°é¡ãã©ã³ãé¡ã®å¶åŸ¡ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®åãã¯ãäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããçŽæ¥ç®¡çãããããã«ãªãã   (C) In the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 272 is provided as a subordinate to the display control device 214, and the control is performed according to the control command from the display control device 214, but this configuration is changed. For example, the audio lamp control device 272 is provided as a subordinate to the main control device 271 instead of the display control device 214. That is, the sound lamp control device 272 performs control according to the control command from the main control device 271. In this case, control of voices and lamps and movements of the right door 171 and the left door 172 are directly managed by the main controller 271.
ïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãé¡ïŒçºå äœïŒãšé³å£°é¡ãšãå¥ç³»çµ±ã§å¶åŸ¡ããæ§æãšãããã®ãã¡ãã©ã³ãé¡ãå¶åŸ¡ããããã®ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡çšã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«ãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®åããå¶åŸ¡ããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ããã©ã³ãé¡ã«ããè£å©æŒåºã¯ãããã³ã³æ©ã®æ©çš®å€æŽã«äŒŽã£ãŠèšèšå€æŽãããå Žåãæ¯èŒçå€ããé³å£°é¡ã®è£å©æŒåºãšæ¯èŒããŠããããèšãããæ¬æ§æã§ã¯ãã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡çšã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«ãããŠãã©ã³ãé¡ãšåãããŠå³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«é¢ããèšèšå€æŽããªããããããèšèšå€æŽå¯Ÿè±¡ãšãªãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ãå¿ èŠæå°éãšããããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   (D) The lamps (light emitters) and the voices are controlled by different systems, and the movement of the right door 171 and the left door 172 is controlled by a lamp control device for controlling the lamps. It is good also as a structure. Auxiliary effects by lamps are relatively often changed in design as the model of the pachinko machine is changed. This is true even when compared to the auxiliary production of voices. In this configuration, in the control device for lamp control, the design change for the right door 171 and the left door 172 is made together with the lamps, so that it is possible to minimize the control device to be changed. .
ïŒïœ ïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒãšã¯ç°ãªããã®ã§ããããšãæ¡ä»¶ã«ãé èœéšæãšããŠã®å³æïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãå¥ã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«ããå¶åŸ¡ããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ããé èœéšæã®åäœãå¶åŸ¡ããããã®å°çšè£ 眮ïŒå°çšãããïŒãèšããæ§æãå¯èœã§ããã   (E) It is good also as a structure which controls operation | movement of the right door 171 and the left door 172 as a concealment member by another control apparatus on the condition that it is different from the display control apparatus 214. A configuration in which a dedicated device (dedicated chip) for controlling the operation of the concealing member is also possible.
ïŒïœïŒè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšé èœéšæå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšãåäžã®å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ã«ãŠå ·äœåããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ããäŸãã°ã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããåèšäž¡å¶åŸ¡ææ®µãå®çŸããŠãè¯ãã   (F) The display control means and the concealing member control means may be embodied by the same control device. For example, both the control means may be realized by the display control device 214.
ïŒïœïŒè¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã®äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã«ãããŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«æå®æ°åã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ããããšã«å ããåœè©²äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœã®å¢çéšã«ãããšã¯å¥ã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã®äžéšãèŠèªå¯èœã«è¡šç€ºããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ãããã®å Žåã䞻衚瀺é åïœããå€ãã第ïŒå³æã®äžéšãèŠããŠããã ãã«ããã®å€ã峿ãšçµã¿åãããããšã§ããå°ãã§ãªãŒãã§ãã£ãã®ã«ããšã®å°è±¡ãéæè ã«æãããããšãã§ãããã®ç¶æ ãããªãŒã衚瀺ã«ç§»è¡ãããããšã§ãããäžå±€éæè ã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãã§ããã   (G) In addition to displaying a predetermined number of first symbols on the active line in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, a part of the first symbol is separately displayed at the boundary of the main display region Rm. It is good also as a structure displayed so that visual recognition is possible. In this case, only a part of the first symbol deviating from the main display area Rm can be seen, so that it is possible to give the player the impression that it was a little more reach by combining with this deviating symbol. Yes, by shifting from this state to reach display, the player's interest can be further enhanced.
ïŒïœïŒåèšå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ã¯ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãäžæ¹ã«ã¹ã©ã€ããããŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒïŒïŒ¬ïŒãšå¯Ÿå¿ããäœçœ®ã«æ¥ãããæ§æãããããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãã¹ã©ã€ããããªãæ§æãšããŠãããããããæ§æã«ãããŠã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéããŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒãçºçããéããã®ãŸãŸã®ç¶æ ã§ãªãŒãæŒåºã宿œãããããã®å ŽåããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœïŒïŒïŒ¬ïœïŒã¯æ¬æ¥ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïŒãïŒãšç°ãªããããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãæ°ãã«è¿œå ããããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ãè¡ããããšè¯ãã   (H) In the reach pattern of the pattern 5 described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are slid downward to come to positions corresponding to the effective lines L4 and L5. It is good also as a structure which does not slide Ld2. In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened and the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are generated, the reach effect is performed as it is. In this case, since the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are different from the original effective lines L1 to L5, display control may be performed so that new effective lines are added.
ïŒïœïŒåèšå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒã§èª¬æãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§ã¯ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããæããã®èåŸãããåæ¹ãšãæ°ããªãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãæ§æããäž»å³æãçŸããæ§æãšãããããã®æ§æã«ã¯éå®ãããªããäŸãã°ãå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ãããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéæŸãããæããã®èåŸããå·Šå³æãšããŠãïŒã峿ããå³å³æãšããŠããïŒã峿ãçŸããæ§æãšããïŒäœããå³å³æã¯ãïŒã峿以å€ã§ããã°ä»»æïŒããããå ŽåããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã¯æç«ãããã®ã®ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ïŒ¬ïœ ïŒã¯æç«ããªãããããã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ã«ãã£ãŠãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«äŒŽããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãå¢ããããšã«ã¯å€ãããªããéæè ã®èè¶£ã¯é«ããããããªãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«äŒŽãçæ¹ã§ã®ã¿ãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãå¢ããã®ã§ã¯ããã°ããªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãå¢ããªãæ¹ã®æäœïŒåäŸã§èšãã°å³æïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯éæŸããªãæ§æãšããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   (I) In the reach pattern of the pattern 6 described in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the main symbols constituting a new reach line appear from both behind the right door 171 and the left door 172. However, it is not limited to this configuration. For example, in FIG. 56 (c), when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the "7" symbol appears as the left symbol and the "7" symbol appears as the right symbol from behind (however, The right symbol is optional unless the symbol is â6â. In this case, the reach line Le4 is established, but the reach line Le3 is not established. Even in such display control, the reach line is increased as the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, and the interest of the player is enhanced. If the reach line increases only on one side with the opening of the right door 171 and the left door 172, the door body (the right door 171 in the previous example) on which the reach line does not increase is not opened. Is also possible.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã«ãããŠãæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãåœåã®ïŒã©ã€ã³ããïŒã©ã€ã³åå¢ããããšãå¯èœãªæ§æãšããããããå€ãã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãå¢èšããæ§æãšããŠãè¯ããçŸå®ã«ã¯ãåèšå³ïŒïŒïŒïœïŒã«ç€ºãããã«ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«ãããŠã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã®éæŸã«äŒŽãå·Šå³ã®å³æåã«çžŠïŒæ®µãã€ã®ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããæ§æã«ãã£ãŠã¯ãæå€§ïŒã©ã€ã³åãå¢ããããšãã§ããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãèšïŒïŒã©ã€ã³ãšããããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   (J) In the above embodiment, in the reach pattern of pattern 6, the number of effective lines can be increased by 3 lines from the initial 5 lines. However, a structure in which more effective lines are added may be used. Actually, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), on the display screen G, as the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the first symbol is displayed in five vertical columns in the left and right symbol rows. In this case, a maximum of 6 lines can be increased, and the total number of effective lines can be 11 lines.
ïŒïœïŒè¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ãããŠäž»è¡šç€ºé åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãé ååºåããªãæ§æãšããŠãè¯ãããããå ŽåãäŸãã°åèšã®åŠã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãäºãïŒã©ã€ã³èšå®ãããŠããæ§æã«ãããŠãåæå¹ã©ã€ã³ã®ãã¡å°ãªããšãïŒã©ã€ã³ã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããäžéšé ããä»ã®ã©ã€ã³ãåžžæèŠèªã§ããããã«ããŠããããããŠãæå®ã®æ¡ä»¶ã«å¿ããŠãèŠèªå¯èœãªæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ãå¢å ãããæ§æãšãããäŸãã°ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ãããŠäžäžïŒæ®µã«ç¬¬ïŒå³æã衚瀺ããæ§æã«ãã£ãŠãäžïŒæ®µåã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒã«ããé ããŠããã°ãéåžžã¯æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãïŒã©ã€ã³èŠèªã§ãã峿ïŒïŒïŒåã³å·ŠæïŒïŒïŒãéæŸããããšã§æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãïŒã©ã€ã³èŠèªã§ããããã«å€åãããããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   (K) The display screen G may be configured such that the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are not divided into areas. In such a case, for example, in the configuration in which five effective lines are set in advance on the display screen G as described above, at least one of the effective lines is partially hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, and the other lines are hidden. Keep it visible at all times. And it is set as the structure which increases the number of visible effective lines according to predetermined conditions. For example, in the configuration in which the first symbol is displayed in the upper and lower three stages on the display screen G and the upper one stage is hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, normally two effective lines can be visually recognized. By opening the door 171 and the left door 172, it is possible to change so that five effective lines can be visually recognized.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«å·Šå³äžå¯Ÿã®æäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãèšããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠåçš®ã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã説æããããæäœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãæããªãããã³ã³æ©ã«åèšåãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãé©çšããããšãå¯èœã§ãããäŸãã°ããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã®å Žåãåèšåæ§ã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§äžã«äž»è¡šç€ºé åïœãšå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœãšãèšããŠãããæ¬æ¥ã¯æå¹ã©ã€ã³ã§ã¯ãªããäŸå€çã«ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã«è¡šç€ºããã第ïŒå³æãçšããŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãçºçãããæ§æãšããããã®ãšãããã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ã®ãŸãŸãªãŒã衚瀺ãšããŠãè¯ãããåèšãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ã䞻衚瀺é åïœå ã«ã¹ã©ã€ããããŠãè¯ãããŸãããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã®å Žåã«ã¯ãå¯è¡šç€ºé åïœã«é åã«åãã第ïŒå³æã衚瀺ãããã®è¡šç€ºãã第ïŒå³æãçšããŠãªãŒãã©ã€ã³ãä»å çã«çºçãããæ§æãšããã   (L) In the above-described embodiment, various reach patterns have been described for the pachinko machine 10 provided with the pair of left and right door bodies 171 and 172 on the display screen G. However, the pachinko machine without the door bodies 171 and 172 has been described above. It is also possible to apply each reach pattern. For example, in the case of the reach pattern of pattern 5, a main display area Rm and a sub display area Rs are provided on the display screen G as described above, and they are not originally effective lines but are exceptionally displayed in the sub display area Rs. It is set as the structure which generates a reach line using the made 1st symbol. At this time, the reach display may be used as it is, or the reach line may be slid into the main display area Rm. Further, in the case of the reach pattern of pattern 6, the first design contrary to the arrangement is displayed in the sub-display area Rs, and a reach line is additionally generated using the displayed first design.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ã§èª¬æããããã«ãïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³äžã«ãŠå€§åœããã®çµã¿åãããçºçããå Žåãé«ç¢ºç峿ã®çµã¿åãããæå¹ãªå€§åœããã®çµã¿åãããšããŠæ¡çšããããæ§æãããã倧åœããç¶æ çµäºåŸã«ã©ã¡ãã®çµã¿åãããæå¹ã§ãã£ãããå ±ç¥ããæ§æãšããŠãããããã®å Žåã倧åœããç¶æ ãçµäºãããŸã§éæè ã®ã©ãã©ãæãç¶ç¶ãããããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãå¯èœãšãªãã   (M) In the above embodiment, as described in the reach pattern of pattern 6, when a jackpot combination occurs on two effective lines, a combination of high probability symbols is adopted as an effective jackpot combination. Although comprised, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports which combination was effective after the jackpot state end. In this case, the player's thrilling feeling continues until the jackpot state ends, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãå峿åïŒãïŒã®å³æãéåžžå€åããåŸãå·Šå³æåã³å³å³æã®å€å衚瀺ãäžæŠåæ¢ããããããåçš®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãžãšç§»è¡ããæ§æãšããããäŸãã°ããã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³çµäºåŸã«ãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãžãããã«ã¯ãã®åŸãã¿ãŒã³ïŒã®ãªãŒããã¿ãŒã³ãžãšé²è¡ããŠããæ§æãšããŠãããããããæ§æã«ãããŠã¯ãã¹ãŒããŒãªãŒããšå³æè¡šç€ºé åã®åœ¢ç¶ãé£ç¶çã«å€åããŠãããããéæã®èè¶£ãé«ããããšãå¯èœã§ããã   (N) In the above embodiment, after the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 normally fluctuate, the left and right symbols fluctuate display once and then shift to various reach patterns. For example, after reaching the reach pattern of pattern 2, it may be configured to proceed to the reach pattern of pattern 3 and then to the reach pattern of pattern 4. In such a configuration, the shape of the super reach and the symbol display area is continuously changed, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã第ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ïŒïŒã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ãããŠç¬¬ïŒå³æã瞊æ¹åã«å€å衚瀺ãããããæ§æããããæšªæ¹åã«å€å衚瀺ãããããæ§æããŠããåæ§ã®å¹æãåŸãããããšã¯èšããŸã§ããªãããŸããïŒã€ã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãæããããã³ã³æ©ã«éãããïŒã€ä»¥å€ïŒäŸãã°ïŒã€ãïŒã€ïŒã®æå¹ã©ã€ã³ãæããããã³ã³æ©ã«é©çšããŠãããã第ïŒå³æã®å€åæ¹åãšæå¹ã©ã€ã³æ°ã®çµã¿åããã¯ä»»æã§ããããŸãã衚瀺ç»é¢ïŒ§ã«ãããŠãïŒåã®å³æåãèšããããšã«ãéå®ã¯ãããããšã¯ãªããïŒåãïŒååã¯ïŒå以äžã®å³æåãèšããæ§æã§ãã£ãŠãè¯ãã   (O) In the above-described embodiment, the first symbol is variably displayed in the vertical direction on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. It goes without saying that the effect of can be obtained. In addition to pachinko machines having five effective lines, the present invention may be applied to pachinko machines having five (for example, two or three) effective lines. Is optional. In addition, the display screen G is not limited to providing three symbol rows, and may be configured to provide one, two, or four or more symbol rows.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåææ ïŒïŒã«ååŸäžå¯Ÿã®ã¬ã©ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåãä»ããããæå®ã®éææ§ãæããŠããã°ããããªãæè³ªã®ãã®ãæ¡çšããŠããããäŸãã°ããã¬ã©ã¹ãã«ä»£ããŠãæš¹èæ¿ããæ¡çšããŠãããã   (P) In the above embodiment, the pair of front and rear glasses 137 are attached to the front door frame 13, but any material may be adopted as long as it has predetermined transparency. For example, âresin plateâ may be employed instead of âglassâ.
ïŒïœïŒäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã§ã¯ãåŸæ¥ã«æ¯ã¹ãŠéæé åãæ¯èŒç倧ããããã³ã³æ©ïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠèª¬æããããããã«éãããåŸæ¥ã®ãããªéæé åãçªéšçãæããããã³ã³æ©çã®éææ©ã«ãé©çšã§ããããŸããäžèšå®æœã®åœ¢æ ãšã¯ç°ãªãä»ã®ã¿ã€ãã®åŒŸçéææ©ãäŸãã°ä»ã®åœ¹ç©ãåããããã³ã³æ©ãã¢ã¬ã³ãžããŒã«æ©ãéççã®éææ©ã«ãé©çšã§ããããã®ä»ãã¹ããããã·ã³çã®åèŽåŒéææ©ããããã³ã³ççã®éæçãéæåªäœãšããŠäœ¿çšããç䜿çšãã«ãåŒéææ©ã«ãé©çšã§ããã   (Q) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having a relatively large game area as compared with the conventional game machine has been described. It can also be applied to. Further, the invention can be applied to other types of ball game machines different from the above-described embodiment, for example, game machines such as a pachinko machine, an arrange ball machine, and a sparrow ball provided with other objects. In addition, it can also be applied to a swivel type gaming machine such as a slot machine, and a ball-type belt type gaming machine that uses a gaming ball such as a pachinko ball as a gaming medium.
ïŒïŒâŠéææ©ãšããŠã®ããã³ã³æ©ãïŒïŒâŠå€æ ãïŒïŒâŠæ¬äœæ ãïŒïŒâŠåææ ãïŒïŒâŠéæç€ãïŒïŒâŠå¯å€è¡šç€ºãŠããããïŒïŒâŠåæ¬ ãïŒïŒâŠç¬¬ïŒå³æè¡šç€ºè£ 眮ãïŒïŒâŠã¬ãŒã«ãŠããããïŒïŒâŠã·ãªã³ãé ãïŒïŒïŒâŠçªéšãïŒïŒïŒâŠå³æãïŒïŒïŒïœâŠè»žéšãïŒïŒïŒâŠå·ŠæãïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒâŠé èœéšæãïŒïŒïŒïœâŠåæ¬ éšãïŒïŒïŒâŠç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠããããïŒïŒïŒâŠç¬¬ïŒå¶åŸ¡åºæ¿ãŠããããïŒïŒïŒâŠè£ããã¯ãŠããããïŒïŒïŒâŠè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ãïŒïŒïŒâŠé£åæãïŒïŒïŒâŠäž»å¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ãïŒïŒïŒâŠé³å£°ã©ã³ãå¶åŸ¡è£ 眮ãâŠè¡šç€ºç»é¢ãïŒãïŒâŠæå¹ã©ã€ã³ãïœâŠäž»è¡šç€ºé åãïœâŠå¯è¡šç€ºé åãïŒãïŒâŠå³æåã   DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Main body frame, 13 ... Front door frame, 30 ... Game board, 35 ... Variable display unit, 38 ... Notch, 41 ... First symbol display device, 50 ... Rail unit, 91 ... cylinder lock, 101 ... window, 171 ... right door, 171a ... shaft, 172 ... left door, 195-198 ... concealing member, 198a ... notch, 201 ... first control board unit, 202 ... 2nd control board unit, 203 ... back pack unit, 214 ... display control device, 248 ... interlocking rod, 271 ... main control device, 272 ... audio lamp control device, G ... display screen, L1-L5 ... effective line, Rm ... Main display area, Rs ... sub-display area, Z1-Z3 ... design row.
Claims (3)
衚瀺ç»é¢ã«çµµæãå€å衚瀺ãããçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µãšã  A pattern display means for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen;
åèšçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ãããçµµæã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ãå¶åŸ¡ãã衚瀺å¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã  Display control means for controlling the display mode of the picture on the display screen of the picture display means;
åèšè¡šç€ºç»é¢ã®åé¢åŽã«é 眮ãããåäœå¯èœã«èšããããå¯åéšæãšã  A movable member disposed on the front side of the display screen and provided to be operable;
åèšå¯åéšæã®åäœãå¶åŸ¡ããå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã  Movable control means for controlling the operation of the movable member;
ãåããéææ©ã§ãã£ãŠãA gaming machine equipped with
åèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µããåèšäž»å¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«çŽåã«æ¥ç¶ãããæ§æãšããäžæ¹ãåèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«å¯ŸããŠåã ç¬ç«ããŠé»åäŸçµŠææ®µããé»åãäŸçµŠãããæ§æãšãã  The display control unit and the movable control unit are connected in series to the main control unit, while power is supplied from the power supply unit to the display control unit and the movable control unit independently. And
åèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšå¯åéšæã®åäœã«å¯Ÿå¿ãããŠåèšçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã«ããã衚瀺ç»é¢ã®è¡šç€ºæ æ§ãå¶åŸ¡ãããã®ã§ããã  The display control means controls the display mode of the display screen in the picture display means in correspondence with the operation of the movable member,
åèšå¯åéšæã¯ãåœè©²å¯åéšæã®äžç«¯ãäžæãããåååäœãå¯èœãªè»žéšãæãã  The movable member has a shaft portion capable of rotating to raise the lower end of the movable member,
åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšå¯åéšæã®äžç«¯ãäžæãããå¶åŸ¡ãå®è¡å¯èœã§ããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable control means is capable of executing control to raise a lower end of the movable member.
åèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã¯ãåèšå¯åéšæã®äžç«¯ãäžæãããå Žåã«ãåèšçµµæè¡šç€ºææ®µã®è¡šç€ºç»é¢ã«ãããŠåœããçµµæãé åå¯èœãšããæå¹ã©ã€ã³ã®æ°ããã®åäœã®åãããå¢å ãããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  The display control means is characterized in that when the lower end of the movable member is raised, the number of effective lines on the display screen of the picture display means for enabling the arrangement of hit pictures is increased from that before the operation. To play.
åèšé»åäŸçµŠææ®µãšãåèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µãšã®éã«ã¯ãåèšé»åäŸçµŠææ®µããã®é»åãåèšè¡šç€ºå¶åŸ¡ææ®µåã³åèšå¯åå¶åŸ¡ææ®µã«å¯ŸããŠåã ç¬ç«ããŠäŸçµŠãããããã«ããç¬ç«äŸçµŠææ®µãèšããããŠããããšãç¹åŸŽãšããéææ©ã  Between the power supply means and the display control means and the movable control means, power from the power supply means is supplied independently to the display control means and the movable control means. An independent supply means is provided.
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2003304357A JP4461742B2 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2003-08-28 | Game machine |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2003304357A JP4461742B2 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2003-08-28 | Game machine |
Related Child Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2009094424A Division JP2009148642A (en) | 2009-04-08 | 2009-04-08 | Game machine |
Publications (3)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| JP2005073732A JP2005073732A (en) | 2005-03-24 |
| JP2005073732A5 true JP2005073732A5 (en) | 2009-05-21 |
| JP4461742B2 JP4461742B2 (en) | 2010-05-12 |
Family
ID=34408072
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2003304357A Expired - Fee Related JP4461742B2 (en) | 2003-08-28 | 2003-08-28 | Game machine |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JP4461742B2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP6405678B2 (en) * | 2014-04-17 | 2018-10-17 | æ ªåŒäŒç€ŸäžæŽç©ç£ | Game machine |
| JP6662426B2 (en) * | 2018-09-18 | 2020-03-11 | æ ªåŒäŒç€ŸäžæŽç©ç£ | Gaming machine |
| JP7067642B2 (en) * | 2021-01-14 | 2022-05-16 | æ ªåŒäŒç€ŸäžæŽç©ç£ | Pachinko machine |
-
2003
- 2003-08-28 JP JP2003304357A patent/JP4461742B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP4433733B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4461743B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP6493493B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4461742B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4952852B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP5282805B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4461751B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2005073733A5 (en) | ||
| JP2005073732A5 (en) | ||
| JP4766148B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP6406421B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP5817765B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4461752B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4766147B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP4952851B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP5282804B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP5842845B2 (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2005066243A (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2005095276A5 (en) | ||
| JP2009148642A (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2011194260A (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2005095277A5 (en) | ||
| JP2013075240A (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2009148641A (en) | Game machine | |
| JP2011194259A (en) | Game machine |